Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE
BY
JONATHAN
RIGDON
*'
Mend
your
speech
mar
your
"
fortune'*
Lsab
Kino
HINDS,
NEW YORK
NOBLE
"
ELDREDGE
PHILADELPHIA
tiarvard Umversi^)
Ubnuy-^L^ ^ 0 08f"koFEd"caHon
'
^^
'"
RIGDON'S
Grammar
of the Gnimmar Grammar of the
in
English
for the for
Sentence. Common
85
cents.
English English
School. 40 with
cents.
60
cents.
Beginners.
Analysis
Outlines
English Sentence,
and
cents.
Diagrams.
of
75 cents. and
Grammar
Discussion
Infinitives
Participles. 25
Methods Outlines
in in
Arithmetic.
25 25
cents. cents.
Psychology.
iHANSf-hrtl.LL
to
oiVARD
miu
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
26
1921
Copyright,
By
JONATHAN
1890, 1903,
BIGDON.
J. 8. CuhlnK
Norwood
" and
Co.
"
Berwick
Smith
U.S.A.
Go.
Boiton, Mmb.,
TO
THE
MEMORY
OF
J"2
iFatfjer
WHOSE
INTEREST
IN
ENGLISH
WAS
MY
INSPIRATION
PREFACE
TO
THE
THIRTIETH
THOUSAND.^
Since years
the
ago,
of the
has
English
it
as
Sentence
a
appeared,
in
twelve
used
ten
text
sixty
to
different There
classes,
could what
aggregating
been
are
nearly
no
thousand
students.
have
offered
better what be
opportunity points
has need
positions
what be omitted.
tenable,
should The
statements
modified,
riot
opportunity
has been
allowed
unused.
sentence
The has
book been
entirely
but every
rewritten.
one
changed,
of
that
carefully
The science
examined.
ideas
fundamental
the
the
old
book
"
th^ is
grammar
is
the the
of
it
the
sentence,
that
sentence
determined he
an
by
thought
eatresses,
English
thai
a
grammar
should
tion exposi-
of present
to
usage,
and
and
knowledge
"
of
it is
indispensable
in
ability
new
to
one.
speak
The
vrrite
correctly
feature done
fundamental
no
the
"
attention,
than
as
partly because
could
to
it
so
better
the
sential unes-
writer
do the
it,
but
chiefly
of this
because book.
now
regarded
been
purpose hundred
one
has
estimated
grammar
that
not
of
more
every
than age
one
pupils
will
ever
studying
a
English
of for
page is the
English
the
earlier and of
than nine.
the The
of
Elizabeth.
must
book
ninety study
find
exhaustive
historical
English
among attention
accidence.
the
to
new
Conspicuous
features
are
"
(1)
The work forms
care an
More
the
thought
the
founda/tions
teacher relations This
an
of
grammar.
to
Introduction
out
afford the
opportunity
between will
with
essential
thought require
Yet
and and
their
expressions.
it
must not to
work
patience,
has well
and
be
thoroughly
this mind in
mastered. of the
effort it is
been
to
not
overdo
phase
that
work,
is
for
keep
logic
or
constantly
psychology.
gramvtvar
grammar
The
Preface
to
the
First
Thousand
v
may
be
seen
on
page
292.
VI
PREFACE
TO
THIRTIETH
THOUSAND.
fuller explanation of some fundamental which subject a verb, subject distinctions, among of (a) are, of a thought, and subject or agent of an ojct; (b) object of a verb, object of a thought, and object of an act; (c) a verb, the thought rekUion the related and in it expresses, action thought Any"
(2)
An
earlier
and
express
or
implied
identification ends in
of
these
everlasting
It in is
(3)
systematic
master
series matter
of
reviews.
possible
reviews
for
class to
the
contained
these
without
in English grammar and being well grounded abundantly able to apply its principles in correct expression. exercises in the construction to of original sentences (4) More illustrate consideration. the Of all gramprinciple under matical
exercises, this
is
the
best.
such as grammatical difficulties, Transitive and Intransitive and Copulative Verbs; Attributive and Verbs; Voice, Mode, Tense; Participles; Infinitives and Indirect terrogativ InDirect Conjunctive or Relative, Inten-ogative, and Conjunctive Adverbs, Relative Pronouns; Ordinary Indirect Conjunctive Adverbs, Direct Interrogative Adverbs, and
(5)
fuller
discussion
of
all
Interrogative Adverbs,
Purpose
Grammar
text-book
of the Book.
"
In
its
present
is
and
final
to
form
serve as a as
the
a
Sentence and
intended
normal
schools, and
more
book hand-
for teachers of
not
something
in
than of
a
the
essentials it is
Except
to
the of
hands
master,
The
the
needs and
not
beginners.
for
the
author's Schools
; and
Grammar
are one
for Beginners
to
Grammar
Common
those
a more
any
for
study
of
the
of
Diagrammed
Sentence
it in
the
Analysis
have in
English
the
many the
thousands
that
of
English
this
Sentence
wishes with
more
opportunity to the hope that they will find interesting, and in every way
to
use
spoken kindly of the Gramauthor its original form, the his gratitude, together express
this
more
book
more
accurate,
helpful.
JONATHAN RIGDON.
Central
Normal June
Collbob,
1, 1903.
CONTENTS.
PART
I.
INTRODUCTION.
PAOX
SOME
THOUGHT
FOUNDATIONS
SPEECH
of
the
OF
LANGUAGE
. .
11
PARTS
OF Pbopebties OF
DEFINED Parts
of
16 Speech
22
PARSING
THE
PARTS
OF
SPEECH
....
23
SUBJECTS,
COMPLEMENTS
AGENTS,
VERBS,
ACTIONS,
AND
OBJECTS
.
24
26
SENTENCES Classes
of
27 Sextences 28
PHRASES Classes
of
.30 Phbases 80
CLAUSES Classes
of
32 Clauses 32
CAPITAL
LETTERS
.
33
PUNCTUATION
GENERAL REVIEW
.........
.33
35
PAET
II.
PAETS
OF
SPEECH.
THE
NOUN Classes
of
38 Nouns 38
Sub-classes
Pbopebties Person
op
of
Nouns
40 41 .42
.
Nouns
43 47 50
VIU
CONTENTS.
PAGB
Declension Fabsino
Review
of
op
Nounb
. . . .
,63 04 65
Nouns
.
of
Nouns
THE
PRONOUN Classes
of
66 Pronouns
........
66
Personal
68 71 72
Declension
Parsing
Pronouns Personal
Pronouns
...
73 73
....
Pronouns of
Interrogative Pronouns
Pronouns
74 76
Parsing
Belative
or
of
Interrogative
....
Conjunctive
of Relative
77 78 79 80 81
Classes
Comparison
Declension
of Relative of Relative
Pronouns
Kinds
of Relative
to
Clauses
in Each
Relative Connective
be Use
preferred
Kind
of Clause
.
82
.
of Relative Pronouns
Pronouns
.
83
....
Parsing
of Relative with
.85
.
.
Filling Blanks
Relative
Pronouns
and
Pronouns
Outline Syntax Review
of
of
of
THE
ADJECTIVE
Classes
of
109
Adjectives
109 109
.......
Sub-classes Comparison
Parsing
of of
of Adjectives
Adjectives
Outline
Syntax Review
of
of
of
CONTENTS,
IX
PAOB
THE
123 Verbs
of
Verbs
Voice
Mode Tense Person Inflection Parsing Outline Syntax Review
of
and
of
Number Verbs
of
of
of
THE
ADVERB Classes
of
of
Adverbs
of
of
of
184
THE
PREPOSITION
Classes Parsing Outline Syntax Review
of
186 Prepositions Prepositions Prepositions Prepositions Prepositions 186 187 189 189 191
of
of
of
op
'
THE
CONJUNCTION
Classes
Parsing
of
192 193
.
Conjunctions
,
of
of
of
of
CONTENTS.
PA"B
THE
INTERJECTION
.........
200
Syntax
of
Interjections
200
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES
202
Review
of
Infinitives
and
Participles
. . . ,
233
RULES
OF
SYNTAX
.
234
ANALYSIS
237
Classification
of
Sentences
238
Classification
of
Elements
.
241
Connectives
*
. . .
245
DIAGRAMS
AND
ANALYSES
248
Abridgment
266
Sentences
fob
Diagrams
and
Analysis
....
270
Review
of
Sentences
and
Elements
291
PREFACE
TO
THE
FIRST
THOUSAND
292
INDEX
297
GEAMMAE
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
INTRODUCTION.
1.
We
find
in
of may
we
objects.
he
An
object
This
is
anything
not
toward
the
directed.
only
the be
things
senses,
become
acquainted
;
through
that In and
can
material
things
hut
also
represented
class the
only
such
in
thought,
as as
things.
stones
the
first in mind.
belong
second,
books fear
chairs,
stars;
and
such
hope,
melancholy
2. 3. The and is to Name But world relate form
objects.
is
a
Ten
immaterial
objects.
of
mental
life, a
till
we
life
thinking.
them mind
an
objects
in
meaningless
To is
a
represent
them
ideas.
represent
mental
objects
in
An
in
representation of
of
object.
(Keep
mind
broad
can
definition be of
object^ anything
To A think
which
thought
the
directed.) objects.
mentally
relations
a
thought
affirmation of
a
relation.
social
to
being.
share his
to
By
his
nature
he
is
cative. communiTo do
wishes
life
in
with
some
embody
others
thoughts
think
form
bodiment em-
induce of
them.
This of
thought,
It
this of for
instrument
communication,
is
language.
and
can
consists used
symbols
established
by by
agree^ those
ment,
be
communication
11
only
12
OBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
that the
in participate
the
agreement.
In
the
broad
sense
of
used in expression. word, Language is any and aU ayrriboh and colors, motions and forms, pictures sounds It includes
and
well
as
words.
can symbols of expression think? animals (3) Do
many lower
yoy,
name
f have
they
should
language f
readilybe
time
are
seen
that
men
even
if there the
same
ever
have
when many
all
causes
used
system
of
symbols, there
them 7. have
8.
that would
to
have
long continuing
some
do
so.
of
these
causes
and
show
how
clear,then, that
as
at
any
time
there
be
as
many agree
use
a
languages
upon
one
there
are
use
systems of symbols.
one
that
can
system
language.
that he
Any
extent
a
is master
of
its
languages,
process
moves
language
in two
directions in
The
seizes upon
movement
contents is
and
thought. mind seizes its thought is impression. The in appropriatesymbols. This embodies them symbols
and
interpretsthem
expression.
(o)
The
thought
also be
process included
in
which
the
mind
seizes
and
not
interprets
under
impression^ though
strictly a
process,
The
relation
between
can never
the
two
movements
is
easily
Expression
be
a
always
little but
not
much
should be so and of one inseparablemovements process developed. Expression without impression is impossible^ and impressionvnthout expression is worthless.
INTRODUCTION.
13
12.
The
to
unit of
a
sary neces-
thought.
a
It
is called
sentence.
sentence
expressionof
works. teaches. studies.
thought.
George
Martha is is is
a a a
worker.
teacher. student
Henry
Henry
twenty
sentences,
Write
13. many
as
The ideas
elements
as
of
are
thought
are
ideas.
There
will be
as
there of
many
kinds all
ideas
enumerate
objects,material
be
an
imaginary,
into
14.
a
would classes.
is
endless
task.
they
all fall
few
Language
and of analysis and
it expresses, final
matter
science and
resolved inside
we
the outside
into and
motion,
That
the
world, into
consider
thought.
or
is to say, whether
are
outside kinds of
the
inside
world, there
us
objects. Let
and mind A
as
see
what
of
matter
as
stances.
that
is,
We
sviName think of
a
attributes. each.
twenty stibstances.
of motion and
as
attribute
of
and
thought as
of An
a
mover,
thought
is, we
think
a
of stance. sub-
them
attributes. Name
quality of
a
twenty
be
a
attributes.
substance
of
which (a)
can
each
These
may
quality.
in
are a
definitions
ran
it is
so
of
necessity. Things
substance other.
nor
be defined is thinkable
only
as
they
each
thought, thought
neither
bute attri-
except
be
in terms
of the
15.
but
two
general
must
classes include
of
substance objects,
attributes, thought
14
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
but
two
general classes
of ideas,stLbstance-ideaa
and
attribute-
ideas. 16. of
a
Define each.
This
easilyleads
"
to
thought,
and the
not
mental
attribute ; necessary
more
as, matter
moves,
mind
thinks.
elements than
of
a
thought
Certainly
and
an
two,
substance-idea
attribute-idea. 17.
a
We
two
a
corresponding parts
or
of
sentence,
a
part
to
express of
suj)stance-idea (Subject),
connect
and
part
of
to
an
predicate
attribute in
it
with
it
the
expression
idea
are
(Predicate).
three likelyto name parts of a thought, a subject idea, a predicateidea, and their this relation is the relation. But thought itself, and not a name thing as one of certainly a logician would
(a) Beginners
"
Logic
its
own
parts.
three parts of a some (li) Likewise grammarians name a sentence, subject,a predicate,and a copula; but it should be kept in mind that the predicate, the name as that predicates. It indicates, is the part of the sentence
"
includes
the
office of
copula
and
that
of
an
Thus, in the
subject,and copula
the and
farmer
and
is the
attribute.
In
this
sentence,
copulative
attributive
predicateare
are as monly com-
expressed by
What
are
different
a
words;
two
expressed by
the the three Besides indivisible contend and there the
are
single word,
is but
in ?
George farms.
it is
an
parts in this
sentence
one
subject there
some
word, and
one
part of the
the
sentence.
Certainly no
of
could
that others
of the
letters
farms
one
are
the
copula
that
to
predicate 1
in
a
Any
maintaining
when asked
three
elements
sentence,
INTRODUCTION.
15
out
in such
sentence
as,
by adroitly leaving it But after its stead its equivalent, George is a farmer." such a performance it is always in order to insist.What ? the three elements in this sentence, are George farms The must answer be, The subject is George," the predicate
do it
"
"
"
"
is
"
"farms,"
"
and
there
a
are
no
others.
The
word
farms
double
office, copulativeand
whether it contains
as
attributive, as
one
a
every but
"
predicate
farms
no
"
word
or
is the
more
part of the
sentence
it is
divisible
then, has
resolvable mind but
but
((?)Just
and
so
as
all outer
realityis
form verb.
into and
two
matter
motion, and
into reality
thought,
parts of
language
the
in
early
the
needs
speech,
it could element
as a
noun
Indeed, if
be
not
one
should
feel inclined to
the
push
is
the
synthesis,
an
made further
sentence
no
is itself such
for there
thing
without a a subjectwithout predicateor a predicate In the is the unit of language. subject. The sentence of all form mental world, the thought is the elemental if we And push on into the thinking. It is the unit. field of reality, the parallelis perfect, for we do not have and motion have only matter matter moving or moving ; we There not the two matter. are things mind and thought; but only the one thing, mind thinking or thinkingmind. So it is next that in the very to certain beginning of not two even language there were parts of speech, but The substantive contained in only one. (subject) was the that verb, so a single word expressed an entire find good evidence sentence. of this even Indeed, we in a highly developed stage of language. For example, take awo, it rains^ etc. meaning I love ; pluit^
16
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
FASTS 18.
to
uses
OF
By parts of speech
their
the
uses
we
mean
of
now
words learn
ing accordthese
in the
sentence.
corresponding parts of speech. Incidentally have and the verb. we two, the noun already named 19. Ifoim. of words is use Perhaps the most common to name be very inconvenient to converse objects. It would about write A or objects without naming them. is a name noun of an object; as, Henry, man, Indianapolis, city,Ohio, state, St. Lawrence, river.
"
and
(a) Observe
"
again
the
broad
our
sense
of the
word
object^
anything
includes also such
toward
This but
thought may be directed. not only such things as those just named, mind, hope, love, beauty, laziness. as
that may be stand the in
a
which
(6) Any
noun,
expression
that
a
sentence
a
as
anything
is called
to
may
made
subject of
How you
can
tence, sen-
substantive well
so names
; as.
To lie is
;
disgraceful ; For
be
so
one
do when
is difficult
happy
20. and ahout
a
hard
puzzleshim.
named
a
the
above
sentence
much Draw
possible, (2)
line under
one
over
Write
noun.
line 21.
each
"
subjectand
Pronoun.
Many naming
and
times it.
we
objectwithout
pronoun. I
This
each
like him
he likes
J,
Aim, Ae, you^ and her designatethe would. Also, in the sentences,
"
"
who
and
that words A
them.
Since
such
used
instead
of nouns,
called pronouns.
pronoun
is that
designate an
objectwithout
is
a
naming
used
it.
it is
defined, a pronoun
word
instead
of a
PARTS
OF
SPEECH.
17
22.
(1) Designate
them.
in
sentences
twenty
naming
each 23.
(2)
each A
Underline
each pronoun.
subjectand
Verb.
;
"
predicate,
class blows of
;
large
wind
words The
man was are
is used
to
assert
attributes
smms;
were
as, The
reels ; The
duck tools
are
The dull.
boy
All
child words
not
the The
they
but
not
all alike.
also
express, that
are
attributes; the
three
assert
attributes
expressed by
verb The is the definition
other
words.
an
The
(a)
and be
stated
assert
for but
brevity;
do not
only assume,
contains the
a
(6)
You
Remember
every
sentence
verb.
tence sen-
may that
know
verb
by
its
being
or
part of the
asserts^
declares^ affirms^
that every verb
tells. is
a
("?) Remember
contains
one.
predicate either
asserts
verb
or
If the
both is the
and If
the
attribute, the
asserts
or
predicate
verb.
only
the
attribute, then
the verb
together with
the
the word
words
expressing by
the attribute
constitutes
predicate.
Make
24.
ten
this clear
illustrations.
(1)
Name
verbs. thirty
(2)
Use
them
in sentences^
"
of them
and
twenty both
out
ing assert-
expressing
(3)
;
Point
the
subject
and
the
the
the
nouns
pronouns.
express We
an
Adjectives.
"
It either
is often
necessary
attribute
without
asserting or naming
a
it.
have
already learned
and
asserts
an noun. an
that
when
expresses when it
attribute, it is
attribute We have
or now
verb
and
that
expresses
it
'%
a
any
other
to
see
object by naming
that it is the
it,
office of
18
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
another
class of words
to express
attributes
are
without
italicized struck
either words
asserting or
in the floor. little the The
naming
old master Such
them.
:
the
following sentences
made words
heavy ball
the hard
pupil.
attribute
of
substance
without 26.
assertingor naming
it.
(1)
each.
Use
in
sentences
nate twenty adjectives. (2) Desigthe nouns, pronouns, State and verbs. and
(3)
each
Point
out
(4)
Also
subjectand
each
totters.
fully
The
of clearlythe office
The is
man
italicized word
in the
man.
in the
frail. (6)
27. Adverb.
Give
"
the In the
we
(7) Why
the
slowly
note
descending
expresses that the
an
sun,"
see
adjective descending
We has is
must
attribute
of the
object sun.
of
man an
attribute
expressed by descending
attribute In
"
itself the
attribute,slow.
This
attribute
expressed
only
was
prising sur-
by
as
the
we
word have
slowly.
The
already learned,
an us
the
surprised not
man.
attribute
see
He
Let
attribute
had
an
great.
greatlyexpresses
as
attribute
attribute.
slowly
and
greatlyare
and
"
adverbs.
Also, in
"
You the
probably mistaken,"
in which used The the like adverb Words
express
modes
mind
substances.
certainlyand
is the
an
either
an
attribute
of
attribute
mode
of
connection.
Adverbs may be
commonly
called
common
express
attributes When
a
of
attributes.
an
When expresses
they
the
do, they
adverbs. it is called
adverb
of mental
connection,
modal
adverb.
PARTS
OF
SPEECH.
19
28.
Common
Adverb, Hodal
and
Adverb.
common
(2) (4)
out
modal
adverbs
twenty
(3) Explain
lines
noun^
over
the
pronoun^
carefullywhy each is so called* and predicates. (6) Point subjects and tell why verb^ and adjective^
verb
it is the chief relational element Maude is
each 29. in
a
called.
"
Preposition. The
Whether
language.
only
asserts,
as
an
in
"
attribute, as in
between of
relation
substance that
only part
speech
affirmrelation.
express
relation. expresses
gentleman
between relation the
by
the
me
/or him," by
and
act
relation
tleman gen-
expresses
the
of
and be
the
object represented by
also called
to
observed
that its
each
governs that
ms
substantive
substantive and that him
are
object.
That
is,
requires
pronouns
for.
govern
Words
express called
objects are
objective case. the objects of by respectively relation without affirmingit prepositions. The preposition
relation its without
be
in. the
affirming
substantive in and
sentences
called
object.
Draw
out
(1)
Use
Designate each
each
the
parts it relates.
adverbs. you and
line
over
subject and
each
predicate. (3)
Point
the
nouns^
pronouns^
reason
(4)
Q-ive your
call it.
In
"He
I is
came,"
"She
or
he
go,"
and
;
"
Paul
is
express
relations.
verbs
prepositions.
and unlike
verbs, they do
and
affirm
relation
both
they prepositions,
20
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
have
no
governing
relations
a
power without
over
substantives.
that
are
express without
aifirming them
over
governing
The
power
substantives
called that
conjunctions.
lacks
a
of speech
relation
governing
Use
expresses
without
affirming it.
32. in sentences relates
or
ten
parts
each
pronouns^ Q-ive
reasons.
(5)
(6)
How In
are
verhs^ prepositions^
conjunctions alike?
what
respect is
prepositionand unlike the conjunction? (7^ In what respect is the prepositionlike the conjunction and unlike the verb ? (8) Justify your answers by reference
to the sentences
you
"
have written.
If
we
33.
we
Interjection.
see
observe
our
thoughts carefully,
in between them. called
shall
that
feelingsare expressed by
in
thrown words
These The
are feelings
interjections.
the Such words
isolated
as a
feelings thrown
bah
ten
are
between
thoughts.
A, ha^ and
Name expresses.
we
interjections.
and interjections tell what
34.
other
feeling
each
(a) If
the
adhere
closely to
the
definition
of
language,
be
garded re-
cannot interjection
part of speech
express
all
but
without
it
we
should
our
not
be
able
to
that
takes
place
in
mental
processes.
(J)
35. into
one
The
excessive is
"
thought
process
of
that
the
Expletives.
of these
Any
word
in
our
language
a
may few
be
put
eight classes,but there are that are often merely introductory and without Those most dependence. frequentlyused
words
cal grammatiare
and^for^
PARTS
OF
SPEECH.
21
thaU there;
as,
^^
And
to
none
a
it eame act
so
to
pass."
a
''''And I say
to
unto
you."
in their
"jPor
"
him is
is but
an
disgrace
"And
his
ents." parwas
There
good
n[ian
one." unclean
"
there
synagogue
a
with
spirit."
That you, he that
there
came
voice
did
mischief is indeed
is settled." come."
unto
called
Introductory
expletives.
36. (a)
necessary the
power
Grammar
Its end is
the
study of
the
of
sentence.
of the
the
structure
sentence,
preparation
of
of
discrimination, and
expression acquired
treats in
divisiona
are
etymology
sentence.
and
syntax.
Etymology
the
of the which'
properties of words,
related
to form
a
while
syntax
discusses
ways
and
prosody
so
were
formerly
the form
named
as
divisions
of
longer
be
may
studied
analysis
or
is such
separation
combination
of
the
sentence
as
will
show
the
of parts
as
will form
sentence.
be be
seen
from
the under
followingthat
five classes:
all the
parts
speech
grouped
(a) Substantives.
^
\^^{
1(2)
^
Pronouns.
(6)
Verbs
(3)
^ ^
{^^"^l^^' flnfinitives.
(In-finite, i
^
( Participles.
X3
j.-
"
(rf) Connective
ie)
/^
\
or
Relation
words.
\ 'i
r^
*
'
[ (7) Conjunction.
Independent ^
T J J
J.
j.-
wordsJ
"
\^
(
fC8) ^
Interjections.
/,.
^
Expletives.
22
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
PB0PEETIE8 38.
OF
THE
PAETS
OF
8PEE0H.
Property is any
of the modification
called
sentential
force of a
Form
Grrammatical
Modification.
89. Thus than
number,
one,
;
mode
of
distinguishingone
nouns
from
;
more
is
property of
of
and
pronouns
as,
book, books
40.
I, we,
a
Tense,
mode
"
denoting time,
is
property of the
verb.
41.
(Walk
walked.)
"
is
"
Comparison, a mode of denoting degrees of quality, longer property of adjectivesand adverbs. Long
The
longest.
42.
following are
all
the
properties
of
the
parts
of
speech.
rJ\
(3)
7"r
^0P"rt^"s
^ ^.
^^
nouns,
pronouns,
and
verbs.
Gender
n
1
I
)A
(6) (6) (7) (8)
The
Properties of
nouns
and a
pronouns.
\ Properties of
"
verbs.
J
A
Comparison properties.
property
of
adjectives and
and the
adverbs.
no
preposition, the
conjunction,
interjection have
matical gram-
43.
Inflection
to
is any
variation
in
form
part of speech
It may be
denote
in
grammatical
the of auxiliaries.
property.
change
ending, (2) by
is indicated
different
words,
the
addition
a a
Sometimes word in
property
by
the
positioh
of
sentence.
and pronouns. of nouns inflection and adverbs. of adjectives (6) Comparison is inflection of verbs. (^) Conjug^ationor Synopsis is the inflection
(a)
Declension
is
PARSING.
28
45. word
Exercise.
"
Tell
the
Part
of
Speech
name
to
which
each
know
them^
its
properties.
all free
a
1.
ment
liberty of
could
the
not
press exist
It
to
govern-
2. Ours
It is like of from
great, exalting,
which distil
and
their
abounding
sweetest
river.
4.
to
is fed it.
6.
by
It
dews
heaven,
the
drops
caverns
form
of the the
gushes
It is
as rill,
it breaks thousand
a
from
the
deep
earth.
6.
augmented
7. On
by
irom
mountain
and
irrigatingstreams
barks. 8. There
oar.
bosom
thousand
genius
10. There
spreads
purpling
11.
There
poetry
dips
its silver
safely and
securely
It wanders and
spiration in-
land
12.
It is a
genial, cordial
and
source
thought Upon
wherever
there I am 15. not
it touches, whatever
every to
it surrounds.
every
13.
grows here
not
flower that
of that
grace river
fruit of truth.
Sir,
deny
to
sometimes sometimes
oversteps
becomes
its bounds.
a
am
here
deny
that
towns
that and
stream
ous dangerI am
torrent, and
here makes ancient
to say
destroys
without
cities upon
its bank.
16.
But
that
it,civilization, humanity,
government,
would
return
all that
to
disappear,
Baker,
and
the
world
its
E.
D.
PAEsrsfa. 46.
Parsing
a
is
naming
in
order
the
part
of speech
to
whigh
and
word
governing
is
an
the construction,
exercise for their is meant
excellent and
to
leading beginners
relation. its
to
distinguish other,
be
the
parts of
speech
determine
a
(6) By (c)
either The oral
construction
of
word
dependence
on
some
its government.
abridged parsing
or
may
be
oral ; the
complete parsing
that the
may
written.
In
all written
parsing
see
spelling,punctuation,
and
capitalsare
correct.
47.
Abridged
Model 2.
234
for
All
the
Parts
of
Speech. Rule.
1. (a)
See
Species.
Rules
on
Construction.
3.
page
24
"
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(1) 0,
instruments. 0 is
an
how
well Mattie
and
Susan
play
upon
their
new
interjection; it
adverb
a
has
no
grammatical
R. XI. I. Mattie
tion, construc-
and
limits
play^
connects
is
a
noun,
subjectoiplay^
and
R.
conjunction
verb and
and
Susan^
and
Play Upon
Their New
is
agrees
with
its
subjectsMattie
relation
Susan^ R. XV.
is
a
preposition and
shows
the
between
instruments is is
an a
and
play^ R.
and
pronoun
adjectiveand
SUBJEOTS,
48. We
must
AGENTS,
be
:
VEBBS,
to
ACTIONS,
mark the
"
AND
OBJEOTS.
careful In the
following important
cut
;
" "
distinctions
"
sentence,
a
Bob
the Bob
"
tree,"
is the
cut
"
is
verb
representing
a
subjectrepresenting
of "cut" and of
real agent;
"tree
is the the
object
that
was
object
an
of the
action and
or
act
cutting.
an
that
agent performs
doer
of the is the and say
upon
object.
upon which
act.
agent
act
we
is the
act,
the
thing
terminates
are
receiver of
of the
thinking
reality.
cut
we
But
is
if
a
talk
of
language^ we things.
our
sentence,
Here The
its
object
is tree. 49.
an
speak
a as we
objectof
an
always
better
expresses
the
objectof
later, the
the
action; but
verb but
understand
object of
of
a
action
is not
always representedby
object
sometimes
by
its
subject;
and
the
agent of
PRBDICATB-ATTBIBUTES
AND
OBJECTS.
25
an
action
verb, but
50. With the (1) (2)
the
statements
made
italicized
broke
were
words
her
vase.
in the
following sentences
the
Matilda The
sheds
bloion
down
by
storm.
PEEDI0ATE-ATTBIBUTE8
51.
to
a
AHD
0BJE0T8.
By
attribute We
we
mean
svhBtance,
But
an
say
transparency
is also
is
a
an
attribute
of
glass. meaning
of
an
"
the
word
attribute
language
in the is
term,
attributive
or
expression
tences, sen-
attribute Glass is
an
group
Thus,
old
man
is
transparent,"
artist,"we
say
The
infirm,"
artist is
a
and of
an
"
Ruth
transparent is an
of man^ and attribute
attribute
glass;
old and of
infirmare
Ruth.
a
attributes
an
attribute
When
completes
modifier of
mam.
predicate,it
same as
is called
This predicate-attribute.
an
is the of
to
say
transparent is
attributive
glass;
In this 52.
to
and
sense
old and
infirmare
attributive
modifiers
is often
used
instead
of attribute.
We
the
realitythat
this verb. both that
receives
action, and
the
same
word
that
a
reality and
We
to
a
at
seen
time that
to
a
completes
term
have
also
the
qualityattributed
this
terms
substance
must
now as
the
word
to
expresses
quality. objectand
We
careful
the distinguish
attribute
Object is any
the expressing Predicate-Attribute
expressioncompleting a
receiver
transitive
of
an
action.
is any
attributive
that expression
26
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(a) (6)
An
objectis always
a
noun
or
an
expression
used
as
noun
; that
is,it is always
A
substantive.
an
predicate-attribute is always
so
adjective or
noun,
or
an
pression ex-
used.
55. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 56. (1) (2) (3) (4) 57. the and
Distinguishthe objectsand
Men
in predicate-attributes
"
love
sun
pleasure.
is
(6)
(8) (9) (10)
We
like to
are
sing. help.
did it ? will come.
The
golden.
(7) They
The I know We
without
It is unbelievable.
John It is
surprising.
are
Complements.
Children Flowers God Birds
play.
bloom. the
(5) (6)
world.
men
are a
agreeable.
is
detective.
ill.
a.
created build
(7)
became
7iests.
became
scholar.
By comparing
bloom
of these that
some
sentences
with
be
observed in
verbs
like others
play
like of
complete
are^
themselves, while
created^ builds
other scholar be
seen
is, and
addition
words
to
like
complete
into
meaning.
verbs
Verbs
may
divided
complete and
incomplete.
like
Again,
created
that, some
"
incomplete
words them
"
build
require objects
"
that while
to
complete
require attributes
(a)
became In the
sentences
words given
build and
expressing qualities.
above
are
play
and
and
bloom
are
intransitive
; are,
was
and
attributive
are
; created
and
transitive
attributive in
**
is, and
intransitive
"
copulative ;
and the
She
are
considered and
honest,"
and
He
was
appointed
captain,"
verbs
transitive
copulative.
(1) an affecting
59.
58.
verb
that
of
an
agent
as
is object A verb
Transitive.
(2)
as
that
an
agent
an affecting
objectis
Intransitive.
KINDS
OF
SENTENCES.
27
60.
attribute
of
its
subjectto of
its
61.
(4)
verb
that
does
not
requirean
attribute
subjectto completeit
62.
is Attributive.
(5)
(6)
Whatever
completesan
verb incomplete
is
plement. Com-
63.
The
objectthat completesa
attribute
transitive
verb
is
an
Objective Complement.
64.
an
(7)
In
The
that
is
Complement.
following
sentences
tell whether
or
the verbs
;
are
attributive each
transitive copulative,
intransitive
designate
complement and
Columbus God She
tell whether
America. be
it is
objectiveor attributive.
light.
discovered
there
to(i8
said, Let
light,and
Lost. of the
there
wets
thought
lorote
mistaken.
Milton She
was
Paradise
made
never
secretary
becomes
a
convention.
(6) Slang
He
was
lady
or
gentleman.
reported absent.
for
us
It is
good
to
be here.
Whatever He became
is, is right.
President after he had served several
terms
in
the
(1)
Ask
ten
on good questions
articles 61-65.
(2)
swer An-
them,
EUTDS 66. OF SEITTEirOES.
the Observing the attitude of our thoughts toward that of them realities they represent, we some are see emotional are tions^ connecmerely intellectual declarations^ some and others represent real relations some are questions^ not as of yet established^but to be requestedor demanded
some
agent.
:
"
We
of sentences
as
to use
67.
Declarative
as
Sentence has
a
is
one
relation;
"John
bird
in his
pocket."
28
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
68.
An
Exclamatory
"
Sentence
i"
one
that
;
expresses
as,
"
the has
feeling aroused
a
bird 69.
in his An
hy apprehending a pocket !
of
a
relation
John
InterrogativeSentence
relation ; as,
"
is
one
that John
inquiresas
a
to
the
existence
Has
bird
in
his
pocket?"
70. An
Imperative Sentence of
a
is
one
that
relation;
as,
also
the
form
are
of
onr
thonghts, some
hut another.
as
a
are
dinate^ coor-
isolated
single^others
others
us are
closely connected
one
and
dependent
is the
upon
Their
"
expression gives
72.
as,
"
three kinds
of sentences
to form:
A The A
Simple Sentence
flowers
are
expressionof
singlethought;
two
fragrant."
Sentence
73.
Componnd
but the
is
one
that expresses
as,
or
more are
connected
thoughts;
nourished
is
or one
"The
flowers
fragrant and
74. A
them."
expresses subordinate
are a
Complex
Sentence
one
"
that
more
principal
thoughts
thought
the rain
togetherwith
it ; as, has nourished last
depending upon
(a)
In the the
The
flowers
fragrant because
are
example,
fragrant"
has
ished nour-
expresses
the
rain
expressingthe complex sentence, the sentence principalthought is called the principalsentence, and any one tence expressing a subordinate thought is a subordinate sen(b)
or
clause.
75.
Classes of Sentences. As
TO FORM:
"
(1)
(a) Simple.
"
Paul
"
walks. Paul
walks
walks
and
Peter
rides. rides.
Paul
because
Peter
'
KINDS
OF
SENTENCES.
29
(2)
(d)
As
TO
USE:
"
"
Declarative.
The
"
boys
the
are
Are The
boys
are
boys
be
(gr)Imperative.
76.
use
:
"
"
Boys,
honest.
Classifyeach of
The last of all the
can
the
following sentences
he.
according to
Bards have
was
anywhere.
be commenced ?
education
by
a
your
convictions. these
contrast
boys present
each Classify
:
"
of the following
Arabia the the
sentences
accordingto
form
In
the
sands
of Africa
camel
is valuable.
The
Let
gain
us
is doubtful
we
danger
the
is certain.
live while is
The
harvest ye
plenteous,
but
laborers
are
few.
perish.
Classifyeach of
and
rise :
"
the
following sentences
increased
no
according to
of the
form
(1) (2)
The
A
decision
of the
man a
judge
borrows habit
the
irritation
people.
truly great
to
lustre
from
splendid ancestry.
acquire
is
us
expression.
turns
that
giddy
our
thinks
as
(5) Forgive
Now It is What
debts,
we
forgive our
the shutters
close well
thing
to be
informed this
; it is another
wise. if it could
thrillingexperiences
that for
a
old
oak
might
The It is
song
moves man
nation's he bear
heart the
is in itself
deed.
good
"
that
yoke
in his
youth.
Write:
three three
declarative
sentences,
(3)
jthree complex
imperative
sentences.
30
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
is any
group
as,
of
words
forming
modifier
**The
men
is not
sentence;
our
"The
came
history of
great part
of
country
to drive
thrilling events^
away
with
clamor
/rom
word
thefiocky
may
or
"
(a) Any
called
a
speech
together with
from
a noun
properly
basis. little
an
be
phrase,
to
which
we
is named may
as, is
" *'
Thus
according
cried"
;
a
basis
have
as,
The
hoy
verb
**
phrase,
Grammar
very
George
stood
elm'*'* ;
adjective
as,
phrase,
**
as,
very
interesting'*'' ; an
phrase, infinitive
as, as,
adverbial
as,
**
phrase,
We
advance
a
rapidly
an
He
rapidly'*'* ; Major"
We
or a
'*The "The
dog
coming
stands '"''Alas
was
is
d, even
prepositional phrase,
an
captain
as,
by for
his
wicn."
may
interjection phrase,
"John
as
maiden'*'* ;
well
as
Susan
two
mistaken." of
only
kinds
phrases
as
to
basis
considered, prepositional
word of
and in
a
infinitive.
very broad
sense.
(c)
bad and
The
modifier is
used
Ordinarily
In of
"
we
speak only
boys
adjective,adverbial,
us are we
and is
an
Those
us
tease
constantly,"
modifiers may
as
bad
boys;
its
constantly
But
of
tease.
objective,and
a
constantly,
adverbial.
as
correctly say
its verb. When the
that
we
verb
an
modifies
object
its
; and
that
we a
the
object modifies
the modifies form its of
say
object
the
modifies action
verb,
to say
mean
recipient of
that
the verb's
verb
it determines
case we
and
a
often
the
its
object.
a
"
With
equal
modifies
correctness
subject
and
modifies
verb
are
both
its
subject
the he.
attributive
are,
are
complement.
in turn
You
he,"
you
of
determines
the
form
of both
81.
Classes As (a)
TO
of Plirases,
FORM
"
(1)
"
Simple.
We
"
left in the To
came
evening.
well and
to
(6) Compound.
things. (c) Complex.
"
direct
do
at
well
noon,
are
different
at
He The
"
in the morning,
over
and
night.
kite flew
the tops
of
the trees.
(2)
As
TO
basis:
(jd) Prepositional."ThQ
New York.
"
city of Brooklyn
to learn.
is in
the
state
of
(e) Infinitive.
He
came
He
asks
permission
to remain.
PHRASES.
81
(3)
As
TO
USE:
"
(/) Adjective.
"
The
road
vote,
through
the
v"Uley
is
rough.
All
have
the
"
right to
He
"
(jg) Adverbial.
does To
his work is
-voUh
care.
(Ji) Substantive.
alone.
forgive
divine.
He
likes
(o be
lei
82. 83.
A A
Simple Plirase
Compound
is
singlephrase.
is
one
Phrase
consistingof
two
or
more
coordinate 84.
phrases.
Complex
Phrase is
one some
in modifier
which
is
85.
PrepositionalPhrase
its
is
one
whose
basis is
tion preposi-
object.
is is is is
one
An
An
Infinitive Phrase
whose
used used used
used
basis is
as an
an
infinitive.
Adjective Phrase
Adverbial Substantive Phrase Phrase
one
adjective.
adverb.
noun.
An A
A
one
as
an
one
as
prepositionalphrase In
is not
often
substantively.
90.
(1)
as
each following sentences, classify toform^ (2) as to basis and (8) as to use. the
j
phrase,
(1) (2)
To He We
see came
is to believe.
to learn not
and
to
improve
from
to unite
(3)
(5) (6)
do
reputation.
our
(4) They
To
have
I got the
information in
in the up
letter from
a
succeed it.
covering
fault
is harder
keep
from
committing
Write
three three three three
sentences
containing:
* "
infinitive
adjective phrases,
adverbial
substantive
.(4)
32
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
is any
group
of
words
forming
when
he that
was
sentence
that worth
wanted.
horse
died
day yester-
dollars.
as a
(a)
above,
The
word
synonym with
for
sentence,
but
throughout
to
this book
in accordance
the definition
given
fiers. modiand
signify a
careful
are a
sentence,
(6)
Be
to
distinguish a phrase
in that does
a a
from
clause. contains
Both
a
are
They (c)
cannot A
unlike
clause
always
in
'^
subject
predicate, while
clause hid'* how be
phrase
not.
may
;
or
contain
a
phrase,
may
as
A
a
house
that ia set
as
on
hill
were
phrase
contain
clause,
in,
^'
We
talking
about
it
happened,"*^
GLASSES 93.
OF
:
"
GLAUSES.
(1)
As
TO
FORM
"
That
"
he
was
wrong
was
That
he
(c) Complex.
94.
"
That
use:
he
was
wrong
when
he said
it is evident
(2)
(c)
As
TO
"
(d) Adjective,
"
Here
"
is the
boy
that
is sick,
Adverbial,
He
"
(/) Substantive.
not
honest.
it is
mystery.
men men
is, All
Most
should
may
work. be
motto,
one.
trusted, is
safe
95. 96.
A A
singleclause.
is
one
consistingof
two
or
more
Complex
Clause
is
one
some
modifierin
as an
which
is
An
An
Adjective Clause is
Adverbial Clause is
one
used used
adjective.
adverb.
one
as
an
PUNCTUATION.
33
100. 101.
Substantive the
Clanse
i%
one
used
as
noun.
In
to
We
(1)
as
classify each
is near.
clause.
(1)
must
shelter, for
whole child need
I
the
not
as
storm
a
(2) They
(3)
(4)
you. When He
that
I
was
physician.
children in
spoke
speak.
when I went
to
see
is the
gentleman
should
to not
that
I met
Washington
all the
(6)
That
he
have
failed
when
conditions
were
so
favorable,
is hard does
(6)
102. (1) (2) (3)
Who
promises
Write
three three three
sentences
containing:
(4) (6) (6)
"
adjective clauses,
adverbial substantive
clauses,
clauses.
CAPITALS. 103.
A
The The The All
CapitalLetter should
first word first word first word proper of
nouns
begin :
"
(1) (2)
(3)
sentence.
quotation. adjectives.
and of the
(4)
(5) (6)
not
Names Names
of the
of the year
; but
of the
seasons.
(7)
(8) (9)
words words
used
as
titles or
the
referring to /, the
be
pronoun should
interjectionO,
single
letters
forming
breviatio ab-
capitals. PUUCTUATIGir.
104.
Pnnctnation
is the 4irt
sentence.
Marks
"
period
mark interrogation exclamation mark
. "
?
. .
34
GRAMMAR
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
106.
The
Period
is used
at
the end
of
declarative
or
an
imperative sentence.
(a)
any the The
period
used
is used
as a a
within
sentence
after
all
abbreviations^after
letters used
to
expression
sections
or
heading,
and
after
figuresor
mark
parts of
production. is used
at
107.
The
Interrogation Mark
the
end
of
an
interrogativesentence.
(a)
The
may
to
be
used the
after
any
word
in
the
tence sen-
to denote
imply
opposite
of what
is
expressed. of
an
108.
The
Mark
is used
at
the
end
exclamatory
(a)
other It
is often
sentence
after
an
inteijection or
any
exclamatory B.
109.
used
within
the
sentence
-^
"
"
semicolon
. . . .
;
:
colon
. . . "
(a) Only
each
are
those
most
frequently used,
and
only
the
principal
uses
of
named
here.
110.
General
Sule it would
Comma.
^"
Use
comma
when
the omission
of
the construction
of some
part
of
the sentence 1
.
obscure.
To
separate elements
having the
are
same
construction
of
success.
"
the up
elements the
and
fears,pleasures and
till
pains,
make
interestingside
whiled her
night
morning,
When
as a
from
was a
morning
till
night, she
as a
life away.
child, I spake
child,I
understood
child, I thought
Excbption.
no
"
child.
two
When
elements
; as,
"
are
by
junction, con-
comma
is needed
Learning
elevates
the
mind."
2.
To
set
or parenthetical,
PUNCTUATION.
35
Dickens,
which and
to
the
great novelist,is
all
teacher
of human
nature.
The
can
mind, think,
studies all
can
things,
should
not
study
itself most To
He
that
do
that, need
him.
be
lonely.
speak plainly, I
do
not
care
associate with
3.
The
To
wise
mark
man
the
omission
what he
of
verb
; the
"
considers
wants
fool,what
"
he
abounds
in.
111. letween
General elements
Sule less
for
the
Semicolon.
Ufie
semicolon
closelyconnected
wisdom avoid
than
those
separated
to
by
comma.
It is the
first
point
of
to
evil ; the
second,
make
it
good. 112.
Improve
every
minute
; for time
General
Snle
for
the
Colon.
"
The
colon
is used
to
the sublime
passage
''
God
said, Let
there
be
and light,
there
light."
EXERCISE IN
PUNCTUATION
AND
CAPITAI.IZATION.
113.
of
and closelythe capitals punctuation (1) Observe everything you read. and sentence capitalize (2) Punctuate correctly every write. In
you
114.
the follomng
correct
Review^
"
let
answers
be
given
in
complete and
A.
sentences:
Name f
to two
(1)
Define
object, (2)
What
kinds.
(3)
a
Hlustrate.
(4) (7)
What
fine De-
idea. is
(6)
f f
is it to think How do
we come we
(6)
Define
thought.
?
What is
a
language
(8)
(10;
How
have
language (18)
Name
(9)
f six.
language
How many
is it that may
have
different languages
(11) (14)
Name
be ?
two
directions
of
State
language
relation
(16)
them.
sentence.
each.
(17)
?
(18)
What What
is
o/language
elements
(19) Why?
to
(20) (22)
f
How
(21)
are
the What
of thought? language
how
ideas
possible?
to
(28)
(24)
and and
gives/orm
material each. and
thought f
how,
class. the
two
(26) Explain.
fall into
Show
all
objects,both
define
matter
immaterial,
Show
same are
according
to this
are
(28)
to
belong
the
(29)
How
thought
alike
(30) What,
then,
36
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
elements
of every
are
thought
(31)
not
Define
each.
every
(32) Why
sentence
not
three Define
(33)
and
What
two
parts
of
(34)
illustrate
each.
three?
B.
or even
In
a reality, sentence^
two
parts, is
(2)
Make
an
instead
of
three
parts"
similar
is meant
about
thought (6)
reality.
parts
ment. state-
(4)
What
by parts
of speech f
?
speech
are
indispensable
in
all
expression
(6) Explam
C.
"
offices that
words
must
the
corresponding parts
part of speech.
is
an
of
their Define
In what
?
each
sense
(1)
used
interjection
is
an
part of speech ?
(2)
In what
most
is it not
as
(3)
What
expletive f
(4)
What
words
are
expletives?
D. (1)
Arrange
Define
all the
jiveclasses.
all
property.
tell to what
(3)
each
Name
grammatical
part
speech
belongs.
f
(4)
and
Define is it to
(5)
Illustrate. of
a
(6)
word?
is parsing
(7)
What
the
construction
agent.
Illustrate.
(10) Distinguish
the
(11)
the
uses
Illustrate.
an
(12) Distinguish
State and f their the verb
object of
object of
between
action.
relation.
(14)
an
State
relation
are
subject of
agent
of
act.
(15)
the
two
of the word
attribute
(16)
Define
Illustrate.
(18)
Each
tinguish Dismay
object and
be what
predicate-attribute.
Illustrate.
(20)
part
(22)
verbs. of
Define
complete
verbs. verbs.
(24)
Transitive
verbs.
(26)
Intransitive
Copulative explain
two
Attributive
two
(28)
classes
as
Complement. (30) of
use.
define,and define,and
kinds
complements.
to to
Name
thought
that
give
kind
rise
sentences.
illustrate each
of sentence
(32)
As
form. E.
Referring
:
"
to
the
outline
of
sentences.
Article
75,
illustrate
PUNCTUATION.
37
ad
J
ae^
ag
Id, cd,
he,
cCj
hg;
eg.
(1)
each of
Define the
phrase.
kinds
(2)
Illustrate.
of
(3)
:
Name, verb,
define,
and
illustrate
following
participial,
phrases
noun,
adjective,
adverbial,
infinitive,
the the
prepositional,
of the word
conjunction, Name,
to
(4)
and
to
plain Ex-
broad kinds
use
define, (c)
as
trate illus-
of
phrases
(a)
as
to
form,
basis,
use.
F. illustrate
Referring
:
"
to
the
outline
of
phrases,
Article
81,
adf, adg,
adh,
hdf, hdg,
bdh,
cdf; cdg
cdh;
;
aef,
aeg,
hef,
cef;
ceg; ceh.
beg,
beh,
aeh,
(1)
phrase.
Define
(2)
may
Illustrate. be of contained
(3)
Distinguish
in the
to
clause
from Name,
use.
(4)
and
Show
other.
(6)
as
define,
illustrate
kinds
clauses
(a)
as
form,
(b)
to
G.
Referring
illustrate
:
"
to
the
outline
of
clauses.
Articles
93
and
94,
ad,
ae,
bd, be,
cd
ce
"/
*/"
^"
(1)
illustrate
Name
one
and of
illustrate each of
five the
uses
of
most
capital commonly
letters. used
(2)
in
Name
and
use
marks
punctuation.
PARTS
OP
SPEECH.
THE
NOUN.
115.
tenee
as
Having
a
made
we
general
now
examination for
a
of
more
the
sen
whole,
of
are
ready
Parts
of
thorough
form
it.
investigation
We shall 116. A
of the
name
the
Speech
that
begin
Sfonn
Sfoun.
of
farmer
an
object;
^
as,
Kate^
James^
Columbus^
Brooklyn^
water^
flock^
Jane
Any
X
word,
and
-^
sign, phrase,
are
**
or
clause, signs.
may There
be
was
used Tom
as
noun
;
"
as,
mathematical
with
his
How
you Such
do
?"
and
What
have
can
I do
uses
for
of
you
nouns
?"
expressions
words So but upon there
can
the
only
rather be
so
far
as
their
relation
names
to
other
is
concerned,
this be
is
but
they
are
things
than
to
of
them
things.
nouns,
groimd
no
there
may
to
objection
them
calling
objection
word
or
calling
substantives. that
may stand
A
as
Substantive
any
combinatioii
of
words
the
subject of
verb,
GLASSES 117.
OF of
name
ITOimS.
There
We may it Common We of may
are
two
ways it
a
naming merely
any
to
object
denote
"
(1)
to
give belongs;
or
the
class
which
"
as,
state^
Class it
as,
a
Name.
name
(2)
others
give
;
that
will
distinguish
it from
its class
"
George^ Mars^
or
London^
Name. classes
Orinoco^
lish, Eng-
Ohio^
118. Common We
Particular
Individual
two
have,
therefore,
general
of Noons,
"
and
Proper.
38
GLASSES
OF
NOUNS.
89
119,
to
Noun
to
is
name
given
to
an
denote
which
it
belongs; as,
given
;
mountains^ book.
120. A
Proper Noun
others
is
name
to
an
objectto
tinguish dis-
it from
of its
class
as,
Daniel
Boone^ Queen
Victoria^Rochys^ Standard
(a)
common, the is
men a
Dictionary,
a noun
It may and
readily be
that
'*
seen
that
ustially proper
may become
may
become
In
noun
usually
was
common
a
sentence,
proper
; but
Daniel used
we
Webster
to
"
great
statesman,"
man
noun,
distinguish one
Where
name
particular
Daniel
to
when
say,
are
a
the
Websters may be
to-day
?"
Daniel
one name
Webster
is used of
to
class
which
admitted
a
any class
man
having
or a common
certain
Webster's And
characteristics;
in the
to
it is therefore
an
common
noun.
sentence,
denote the
**
^^
saw
is
noun,
merely
rude
class Old
to
object
Man
"
belongs;
about here
but
when has
a
boy
says, used
The
Man
7%oun,
knows
The may say
nothing
Old
it," he
denotes
improperly
the
proper father.
particular person,
noun
boy's
common
We
then,
(1)
proper its
becomes others
when
same
it
ceases
tinguish to dis"
object from
"
of the
the
"the Coesars^''
are
Oiceros^^ "the
same
"
Beethovens.^^
sions expres-
the
as
the
warmr*,"
"the
succeed
Milton here may inglorious the Washington of South America." but he is neither Solomon a tolerably,
mute
Some
Samson.'*'*
(2)
"
common
noun
becomes
proper
when
it is used
tinguish to disclass ;
as,
others
of the
same
(a)
is
cannot account is soon
has
meaning
of
At to
an
and
can
be defined.
; it is without
noun
proper
noun
merely
symbol,
be
sign,
object
a
meaning
a
and
on
defined.
first
proper
has
meaning,
it is selected
the
signification
the We
(Jb) Our
may
be
language
increased
has
as
more
than
40,000
common are
nouns,
and
ber num-
new
classes of objects
formed.
have
40
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
almost
names
an
unlimited
number
of proper
nouns.
There
are
more
than
80,000
Nevo
of
places
or
alone.
more
(c)
York Parse
Two
words
are
often
used
to
form Dr.
one
name
; as,
City,
such
Webster^s combinations
International
as
Dictionary,
David
Starr
Jordan.
(d)
In
^^
It is often
difficult to
common
from
proper Earth
noun. are
Sunday
the and show
^^
follows
and Saturday,'*'*
nouns are on
Mercury,
but
in
Venus,
"He
are common
and
planets," Sunday,
the
italicized *'The
sun
preaches
common.
every
shines
earth,^^ they
of
(Let
and proper
pupil
why
by applying
definitions
The
may^
Proper
for
Noun
has
no
subclasses.
2^e
Common
convenience, he divided
Class.
abstract.
into three
subclasses,
All verbal
nouns
are
Collective group
A
Noun
is
one
whose
singularform
swarm.
may
sent repre-
(a)
Such
collective
as
always
represents
group
of
animate
objects.
of
nouns
not
collective
may
refer
to
its
object in
of two
ways
-^
unit,
one
whole
in which
the
individuals
are
lost
sight of.
first use, the
In the
gender
the have
of the verb
noun
is determined pronoun
on
by
to
the
sex
of the be
and
and
referring
their
it should
Your the
a
club
silver buckles
noun
caps.'^
uses,
collective
is of the
a
neuter
gender
; it would ; as,
require
club beats is This
assurance
singular verb,
every very time
and
singular, neuter
No
pronoun
Your
ours a
important
has mastered
noun
student
can
speak
with
till he When
the
a
(c)
noun
collective
pluralized, it usually
were seven or
becomes
class
of
the
neuter
gender;
are so
"There of.
to
eight swarms,^''
may
"
Here in the
individuals number
lost
as
sight
But the
collective
noun
be
used the
plural
were
to
refer
individuals
"
; as,
All
wear
day
regiments
bells
on
calling on
necks."
their commander."
The
herds
all
silver
their
PROPERTIES
OF
NOUNS.
41
122.
as a
An
Abstract
Noun
is the
name
of
an
objectconceived
of another quality
of the following
object; as,
the
drunkenness (a)
The
city,the honestyof
a
are
few
of
our
abstract
nouns
Timey space,
life,
magnitude,
disease,
war,
peace,
government,
sorrow,
murder,
revenge,
cold, heat,
rest, flight,
brightness, darkness,
motion,
deception, drunkenness,
must
poverty,
be
names
(b)
nouns.
be
always
ways
:
"
abstract
Any
To To
name
of them
an an
in either
of two
(1)
(2) fatal,"
noun,
attribute
of
it is
an
object;
attributes. abstract
noun
*^
name
object as
uses
having
an
In the
'*
first of Your
as
these
; as,
use
His it is
disease
a mere noun
was
silence
is my
more
answer."
In the
second
class
or,
it is often
appropriately called,a
^^
concrete
more
; as, than
^''Disease
is to be
"
dreaded,**
a
Silence Death
is sometimes
comes
eloquent
speech," 123.
She
is
beauty,^'*
are
**
to
us
all alike."
Class
Sfouns
included
in the other
divisions ; as,
girl^man^
house^ knife.
124.
FBOFEBTIES
OF
NOnirS.
(1) I, Theodore Roosevelt^ do issue this proclamation. (2) Theodore Roosevelt^ you are President. Roosevelt. is Theodore (3) The President bad books. (4) One good book is better than many (5) A boy and a girl tore the child's hat.
125.
in these
five
tences, sen-
may Nouns
or
see
"
Firsts
"
may
denote
the
as
speaker^ the
the
noun,
person Theodore
spoken
to^
the
objectspoken of
(3).
This
42
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Second^
than
one;
"
A
as
noun
stand in
for
one
objector for
more
look
(4).
an
This
property is called
the male
not
ITumber.
Thirds
an
"
A the
an
noun
may
denote
an
objectof
sex
%ex^
objectof
Fourth^
female
aex^
objectwith
sex.
definitely
ferent difit.
or specijied^
"
without object
noun
This in any
property is Oender.
one
may the
stand
relations For
to
part of the
be in the
sentence
a
example,
in is called
it may
subjectof
and
President This
(3),
a
book
(4),
Nominative
Relation.
verb^ like finite boy and girl in (5). be the object It may
hatia
of
(6).
This
is called
noun
Relation. Objective
to denote
Also, it may
limit another
so
as
Relation.
noun
to
the
possession. This is called a Possessive This property^ depending upon the relation of a that governs it^is Case. part of the sentence
simplest
form of each relation is
(a) Only
several three
the
given
here.
There
are
nominative
constructions,
Nominative because does
several
objective constructions,
to
and
possessive constructions.
The
term not
(6)
one.
appear
be
very
It is retained
(c)
to
All
these
properties, Person^
and Pronouns, observed the the that
our
and
both
(d)
which
be
nouns
are
inflected
; and
Person,
for Case, and
by
noun's
position in
the sentence
are
except
Gender.
denote
possessive. They
inflected
for
Number
126.
Nouns,
then, have
four
properties: Person,
Nam-
127. whether
Person
is the
property of the
noun
that
indicates^
represents the speaker^the person the object spoken of. Hence, there are three Firsts which
denotes
the the
it
spoken
persons
to^
:
or
the
spoken
to ; and
person
PROPERTIES
OP
NOUNS.
43
Person
a
^^
in
nouns
is indicated
by
their
tise
and
am
not
by
"I,
you
are
Henry
a
Anderson^
^^
guilty."
Anderson
thief."
Henry
horse."
nouns are
of the third
are
predicate
first and
nouns
of the
second
persons
belong only
is found of the in
of
persons,
or
objects personified.
A
noun
(d)
that of
of the with
first person
a
no
other
construction in the
than
apposition
A of
a
pronoun
first person
; and
tive nomina-
absolute
by subscription.
the
(e)
noun
second
can
have person,
but and
two
constructions: absolute
pronoun
of
nominative
NUMBER.
128.
noun
Nxunber
is that
one
property used
more
to
show
one.
whether
the
represents
129. There
or object,
than the
are
two ;
numbers: and
singular, denoting
more
one,
one,
as
as
box, child,star
the
denoting plural,
than
130.
Nouns
form
their
plurals by ordinary or
terminal
or by a radical or root change. inflection Most 131. nouns form their (1) By Terminal Inflection : s or as, book^ books ; hat,hats; apple, es; pluralsby suffixing flowers ; church, churches; bench, apples;pin,pins; flower,
"
benches
kiss,kisses.
whether
8
or
es
is to
be
suffixed.
es
of
nouns
generally suflBx
to
the
ending
consonant
in
ch
:
(soft), s, sh^
motto, mottoes,
x,
or
z,
and
some
nouns
in o,
preceded by (b)
i
:
ending
in y
preceded by
;
consonant,
after
changing
y into
stones
lady,
ladies.
44
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
In
Old
English
the
ie has
we
find such
words when
y.
written
we
suQixed
mean
for
plurals. Hence,
been
say,
Change fe
has
y into
we t'e,^*
that
changed ending
in
into
(c)
intov:
few
nouns
or
/e/
after
or
been
changed
wolves,
(2) By by
radical of sound geese ;
Change
"
few
a
nouns
form
their of the
plurals
vowel goose^
modification
wom^n^
men;
women;
toothyteeth;
mice;
louse^lice.
NUMBER.
FECUIXA^RITIES
OF
(a) Singular
A the few
nouns
and have
Plural
the Same
same
"
the
form
for
the
plural
as
for
series,salmon^ heathen.
from
"
The
a
"
noun
must
be determined
was
"
some
other
part
were
thus,
"I
The
sheep
one
in the
**
garden." bought
The
sheep
garden.
bought
sheep,
five
sheep J*^
(6)
Double
Plurals
"
one
have
double
plurals
"
PBOPERTIBS
OP
NOUNS.
45
(2)
double
Another
class of the
nouns same
from
foreignlanguages
:
"
has
plurals with
meanings
snrouLAB.
Bandit Cherub
(Italian),
(Hebrew),
Dogma
in technical
or
scientific
language
the
English pluralsare
ally gener-
preferred.
^
"
((?)Plurals only :
Some
annals
nouns are
found
only
in the
plural :
"
entrails
scissors shears
antipodes
breeches drawers
tongs
victuals vitals
(d)
FlnraLs
as
Singalars:
nouns
"
Another
class of
has
meana^
the
plural form
with
the
gular sin-
signification ; as,
molasses^ news^
oddsy pains^
physics, and
some
^'
plurals, but
the science
are
regarded
of
as
singular. Thus,
"Ethics is
quantity."
(not are)
"
Many (/)
abstract
have
as,
decorum^
Plural
nouns as
of
Proper Nouns
"
Proper
or
es.
But
their
plurals by adding
is unsettled
in y, usage
good writers add 8, others drop y and add Mary, Marys, or Maries ; Story,Storys, or Stories Henrys, or Henries; Tally,Tullys,or Tullies,
some
ies;
;
as,
Henry,
46
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(^)
formed
must
The
signs
as,
"
are
by adding
dot your
apostrophe and
your
"
('s);
i'" and
cross
^'"." At the
"We
prove
were
bottom
of the page
D's/'
words of the word
(K)
is that
The
plnral of compound
generally formed
is described
by
the
rest;
as,
mouse-traps,
ox-carts,
compound
words
ploralize both
paxts
men-servanU^
women-
servants^
PLURALS
OF
PROPER
NAMES.
132.
Plural
of proper the
names
name
preceded by
or
titles is formed
never
either by pluralizing
the
but title,
both.
RULES.
or
is
preceded by
"The flowers.** be
"
numeral,
Mrs.
the
name
is always "The
two
Browns.^'
two
Barlows.''''
had
gathering
always
Irving.
when
it is
(2)
"The
title should
pluralized
a
Mister^ Miss,
Messrs
tor, Doc-
numeral:
"The
Johnson.^^
DilV
"The
Drs.
Bank.'*' unsettled. In
(a)
more
this
point
and
usage
same
is somewhat
name
speaking
of two
or
singleladies
the
name,
of the
some
many the
good
writers the
name.
pluralizethe title,
Perhaps
most
we
many
both
title and
name,
grammarians
most
prefer
not
to
pluralize the
title made
while
in
polite literature
as
commonly
and the
plural.
will
to
"
In this case,
in
all others,
usage,
grammarians,
custom
us
prevail; and
the
true to
finally,I believe, it
titles of such
terms.
will become
universal tell
to
pluralizeonly
the law the of
not
(b)
that the
Grammarians
s
that
noun
the
*'
language requires
but the first and
be affixed
and
title ;
language
"I
saw
if
we
we mean
the named
Banks,''
or
be
mined deter-
whether
lady
"Banks**
named
"Bank."
PBOPBRTIBS
OP
NOUNS.
47
doctor
we
**
I called
**
at
the
Motts,'' would
probably imply
"
one
named
*^
Motts,"
Misses
really two
*^
named
at
Mott" Drs.
But
if
say, there of be
I
no
saw
the
Bank,^^
that
name.
and
called
the law
office of
next
Mott,*'
is
of ambiguity. possibility
Then
the
in
importance,
that
analogy, Would
require
not
similar
titles should
pluralized,and
the
GENDER,
133. several
As
may
sex.
express This
the
property
male
represent
Masculine
objects
Oender.
of
the
sex.
of the may
Nouns
are
female
sex.
They
136.
are
of the
may
Feminine
Nouns
Neuter
represent objectswithout
Oender.
sex.
They
of the 137.
Nouns
may
represent objectswith
are
sex
not
definitely
that
specified. They
138. expresses (a) 139. male Oender
of the Common
Oender.
a noun sex. or
is the
property/ of
pronoun
the relation
of
noun
of its objectto
pronoun the
Instead
and
word
substantive
will be used.
Substantive
as,
of the
Masculine
Oender
represents
object ;
A
140.
Substantive
represents
objects
"
are
personified
and her
"
conceived nouns,
as
persons
"
may
masculine
feminine sails."
as, "The
sun
dispenses
The
ship spread
on on
looks down
the shades of
a
old
Cronest
;
breast. which of
a
She
mellows
lowest
his
shaggy
-^Drakb.
an
(5)
and
In the
as
degrees
neuter
personification,in
characteristic
"
object
is conceived
noun
manifesting only
remain
minor The
person,
its
pronoun sea."
; as,
gentle
brooklet
hastens
to its home
in the
48
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
141.
Sabstantive
sex
of
the
Neater
Gender
represents
an
objectwithout
(a)
be In The called **A "The
neuter
as,
speaking
nouns
is often should
garded. disrethen
representing
objects
as
"
simple
robin
child is
that
lightlydraws
for its mate.'*
its breath."
"
Wordsworth,
looking
142.
A with
Substantiye
sex
of the
Common
Oender
object
persons,
(a)
A
not
as definitely specified,
represents an child,parent,
children.
substantive of is of the
sex common or a
gender
number
when
single object
sex.
unspecified
of
objects that
differ in
143. in three
Nouns
ways,
or
may
distinguish the
kinds
sex
"
of
their
objects
three
of Inflection:
(a) (6)
earlier
terms
women.
Most
words
of
this class
are
or
rank, and
the feminine
are
generally
now so
ends
trix, in best
ess as
There
not
our
many At
feminines
there
were
in such
to
stages of
as
language.
present
as
the
usage
regards
to
men
applicable both
SUFFIXES.
and
(3) He-bear,
Man-servant,
Mr.
BY
PREFIXES
AND
She-bear. Maid-servant.
Jones,
SMiss
Mrs.
Jones. Jones.
PROPERTIES
OP
NOUNS.
49
144.
not
Kemarks
the
on
Oender.
of its
"
(a)
to
if
the
itself
does
show from
relation words
object
sex,
determine
gender
the
if possible
^
other we"
in the
context.
*'
"The
pupil
teacher,^
you,
**
You
hurt
(common
and child broke "The of
a
gender).
you,
her
7, your
uncle,
"The
help
Ber-
nice"
(/is masculine;
"The
feminine).
doll"
child "The
is sick" child
(feminine).
in its cradle" is neuter as,
"
sled"
(masculine).
The
child
sleeps
(neuter).
when it represents enacted burned the the
(b)
a
gender
of
collective
as one
noun
collection
objects acting
before it
whole;
"
Congress
in its
following
town."
laws
adjourned."
The
mob,
fury,
But,
gender
when
it represents
a sex
collection of the
of
by
to
the
objectsrepresented
labors of
The
fair
own
sex, whose
mingle
in the
public
it
have life,
their
sex
and do
the
not
three agree
representing
are
But
in
The
jury
opinions," jury
and
their
are
become
class
nouns
in the
"
gender
; as,
The
numbered lost
fifty-four."
each be then
were
We
Here
individuals
collection
used in the
individual
to
object.
"
But
collective
may
plural so
the
sex
refer
to the
object.
action
Its
gender
herds of
was
depends
upon
upon
pastures."
as so
spoken by
the
not
the
groups
acting
many
nouns
wholes, but
in the
individual and
Herds
and
flocks are
In mind the
collective
plural
number
gender.
Bear well
to
(c)
Sex of
a
distinction
to
nouns nor
between pronouns.
noun
gender
We the male
and
aez.
belongs
man
objects,gender
and of
a
never sex.
speak
of
Some
the masculine
gender,
of
(d)
an common
granmiariana
since there
reject
can
"common
no
gender" thing
as an
as
implying
object
the of
absurdity,
sex. an
be
such
common
This, however,
to
is but
the
blunder
which
always subject
"
follows
attempt
The
be
hypercritical without
arises from
to
our
understanding
"
discussed.
confusion
confounding
some
gender
"
and is
a
sex."
Sex
is
characteristic
to
belonging
In
one
property
be found
belonging
this and
a
all
:
nouns.
"
of
may
expression
similar
Gender
may
is sometimes be found is
objects,"
This There of the is
expressions
in
in many
other
to
carelessness
no
expression
as an
which
confusing
learner.
a noun
is
such
thing
50
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
female
need be
8ex,
although
reason
there
may
not term
be
an
objectof
common
sex, We We
we
not
reject the
term
even man a
common
gender.
same reason.
should say,
compelled
is
reject the
and "man"?
man,
for
the
moHal,^^
ever saw
not
grammarian
have
a
wishes and of
to
criticise
man,
it,
and
we
We and such
man,
the
men, 1 see
this man,
and the
that
thousands
a
and
millions
man,
but
no
explore (e)
since
universe the
term
for
common
material
object as
valid
objection to
Neuter
gender,
been Has
geader
this is the
no
has
objected
no
to
on
the
noun
same
ground,
has
a
that
no
the
object represented
but
same
sex,
the
therefore
sex.
gender,
tells
us
confounding
it does
of
gender
and
When of its
noun
anything,
the different therefore
tree
matter
what, concerning
but
the
object
and
property by which
it,is gender.
sex; tells
us
John
things concerning
has
us
tells
something,
male much
is as
and sex,
gender.
its
John
that its
sex.
object
noun
is of the
tells
as
that
object
is without neither
to
One
more
without
gender
sex.
the
other, because
been
as
than
term
the other
no
concerning
for
neuter
It has
proposed
may be
seen
the
gender
do
gender ; but,
we
above,
such
not
nouns
have for
us
gender, and
the
terms
are
must
have
common
name
for it.
I do
contend for
neuter not
gender
gender.
the
no
Unfortunately suggested
The
sex
they
is
good terms,
determined
they
and when
are
best
ever
; much
better
noun
than
undetermined
much
as
gender
it indicates
as
gender.
gender
of the
or
of
'
just as
it indicates
that when
sex
that the
object
female. is
is undetermined And
a noun sex
when
the
object
is male that
has
as
gender just
it
much
it indicates
the
mean
its
object
without Neuter
never can
when
specifiesthe
that
object has.
neither
would
gender,
the best neither
but
it has
^e
been
intended
to true
by grammarians.
nouns
It is
simply
but
term
sex.
get
to
apply
those that
that
nouns
represent
have and
no
objects of gender;
It
is
certainly not
be in that
to
such
if it were, it would
they
not
would be
respect
like adverbs
and interjections,
necessary
speak
miss
of
gender
of
not
our
at
all.
(/)
we
We
may
most
difiBculties here
by keeping
in mind
that
parse
substantives,
objects.
CASE.
145.
Nominatiye
a
Case.
"
As
may
be stand
seen
from
one
sentences,
relations the
nouns
substantive
may that
in any it.
to
the
expression
the pronouns.
governs
Observe
and
PROPERTIES
OF
NOUNS.
61
(1) George
(2)
It is The
came.
/came. It is /.
came.
George,
(3)
146. In
boy, George,
The
boy, /, the
came.
verb^came.
Zare each
each the
copula^is.
the
(3)
three
each
is in
subjectof
These
147. called
a
dependent nominative
nominative
constructions. construction
dependent
148.
Case
is the
case
substantive
has
when
it is used The
dependent nominative
construction,
are :
"
149.
Dependent Nominative
;
as
Constructions
:
"
lawyer.
the letter.
Henry
You We
have
my
consent.
shall wait
for him.
C2)
Complement of
;
as :
"
verb copulative
whose
subject is
nominative
am
student,
is
a
Martha
musician.
They
She
detectives.
not
/.
we.
They
We
The
shall be
men were were
learners. been
have
good
be
citizens.
We
thought
to be to
they.
we,
They
supposed
a
(3)
In
tvith apposition
Your
nominative
is here.
substantive
as
"
brother, Paul^
is your
He
brother, Pa'iil.
you. you.
I, your
Your
brother, /, pleads
with
62
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
150.
AU
verbs
axe
The
distinguish a finite and observing whether present form its subject is changed in person or beginner
take is the verb in the last two
by
it
not
number. Its
example,
its
sentences.
present form
when brother. form
plead when its subjectis Z, but it is pleads subject is changed to the third person noun,
a
It is therefore
required when singular,but it changes and first person singular, second person singularor
subject is
am are
when when
subject
is in the in the
subjectis
or
in the
are
being^are
an
the
subject of
and the
or
is
monly com-
objectivecase
in the iised called
a as
subjectof
nominative
a
participle
absolute.
commonly
151. A
noun
possessivecase
the Predicate the
complement of
Noun.
is
commonly
This
substantive of the
completing
verb
to
pure
am,
finite form
be
:
"
is,
been.
The
general rule
is in the it
as
is
same
tive substanas
completinga
subject. We
case
verb copulative
see
case
its
shall the
later that
as
appliesto
to the
the
objective
and
to
absolute
to
case
well
must
nominative.
:
(a)
is in
An
exception
nominative
whose
the
rule
be the
remembered
A
a
substantive
the
when
it is
complement
of
copulative
participle
subject
is
possessive.
152.
substantive
is in
appositionwhen,
another in the
without
same
case
necting con-
element, it modifies
of
term to
and
the
same one
is the all
cases.
the appositive that signification.Observe the other. that explains Apposition applies in careful Be to distinguisha substantive
PKOPERTIBS
OP
NOUNS.
63
as apposition,
"
one
used
is
as a
the
complement
^^
copulative verb,
in the the
same
as
case
"Jones
as
lawyer,
used
case
An it
appositiveis
it of
a
the
stantive sub-
modifies, and
means
same.
substantive
same
as
as
the its
complement
copulative verb
the
: same.
is in the So far
subject
This
and
means
they
has^
it to
is their
difference
predicatenoun
to
has not.,a connecting element appositive substantive it explains. Nominative Absolute Case.
"
join
153.
When
noun
or
noun pro-
or
tive when it is the subjector attribuindependently., that is used independently., complement of a participle when substantive it is in apposition with another so used^ is used Absolute Absolute
:
"
Case. Constructions
are
:
"
(1) By
direct address
William^
come
here.
(2) By
exclamation
Good old
"
England
"
(3) By pleonasm:
Out
fathers,
where
are
they
: (4) By inscription
"
Dewey^s
Psychology.
an : independent participle
"
(5) Subject of
Wilson
having
overbid
us,
we
failed
to
(6) Complement of an
:
"
Philip being
our
were
: (7) In apposition
"
Wilson,
the
merchant,
having
overbid
us,
we
failed to
54
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(a) (6)
another
substantive
case.
used
in any
of these
constructions
is in the
nomina"
tive absolute
A in
substantive
in any with
one
of the Illustrate.
use
first six
constructions
may
have
apposition
statement
it.
(c)
Pleonasm
a
is the
independent
or
of
substantive the
before
sentence ;
that makes
as:
"
asks
question
are
about
object it
expresses
troublesome.
can
many
we
you
solve ?
avoided
except when
emotion
wish
to express,
along
with
the
thought of
object, the
are
it of
produces.
inscription, such
on as
((2) There
several isolated
forms
names
superscriptions,
monuments.
subscriptions,and 155. in
a
written
coins,signs,and
Possessive
Case.
"
When
noun
or
pronoun
is used
it is in the Possessive
are :
"
Case.
156.
Constmctions
noun
(1) Limiting
Mary^s
bonnet,
book,
Brown^a
philosophy.
(2) Limiting
noun
of
same
signification apposition;
=
as,
Her
(3) Subject of
substantive
John's Tour The
participlethat
use
has
dependent
;
to
as,
me
whispering
annoyed
her. your
speaking good
may HilVs denote
French
secured of
appointment.
Brown^s the
(a)
com
possessive
author,
Indiana's
as
the
owner
an
object, as
; the
Rhetoric
the
as
kind, meiVs
the sun's
clothing ;
rays.
location,as
oil-fields ; the
origin,
TO
FORM
THE
POSSESSIVE.
157.
Singnlar nouns
and
their
by annexing possessive
The child's
the
the nominative;
books. The
men''s
as,
hats.
book.
The
children's
PROPERTIES
OF
NOUNS.
65
158.
Plurals
ending
in
"
form
as,
their
possessiveby
nexing an-
only
the
apostrophe ;
Birds'
JBoy"'sports, (a)
**
wings,
old
Banks*
charters.
The
's is
contraction
*'
of the
es
or
is.
In
vndowes For
nouns
habite.'*
The
Kingis
crowne."
(b)
law,"
in most
*'
euphony
that
the end
posBesslve
with
an
"
sign
Is sometimeB
"
singular
s-sound
; as,
Xerxes^
army,"
but
Moses^
Socrates^
cases
"
philosophy,"
**
Demosthenes^
as
^'
orations";
works." Prescott
"
it is better
^^
to annex
Dennises
"
Pope.
The
Louis's usage
reign."
sanctions
etc.
Macaulay,
the forms the Bank^s
affairs." Mr.
no
best
Mrs,
s, there
Hemans^s,
would be
Banks^s,
Jameses,
loitnesses^s^
between
The
s
and
Mr.
Banks'*
in
; Miss
and in
Miss
Bounds\ unless it
always
be used
spoken
language
and then
and
brings together
may
as,
too' many
hissing sounds,
*'The law
perhaps
before "The
possession
objective;
of
more
of
Moses,"
As
we
philosophy
Jesus'
Socrates,"
to
"The
Demosthenes."
well-established "For
tions excep-
the
statement
have,
sake,"
sheep
needs
"For
goodness' sake,"
The
conscience'
or
sake."
such
nouns as
(c)
to be
possessive,singular by annexing
some a
plural, of
deer
and
is formed
's to the
nominative.
If the must
noun's do
it.
number
shown,
other
(jA)Wheh used,
the
s
pair
or
implying
common
possession
are
the
name
only
CasKs "
to
the
one
immediately preceding
store,"
"
Wade Clark
"
furniture
Beed
" Kellogg'*
"
Grammar
is made shoe
a
by
Maynard*s
not
Publishing House,"
Lee
"
Shepherd* s (e)
When
the
store,"
or
etc.
pair
series
of
to
nouns
implying
the
name
common
possession
are
used,
"
sign
each, and
of the
limited
by
the
last
each
others
; as,
Day''s and
or more
Fowler^s works
on
(not Logics,
"
each and
is the
author
of
"
two
=
subject),
In
Swmton's Readers.
McGuffey's
the
s
Readers
Swinton's
Readers
McGuffey's (/)
"The
compound
terms
possessive sign
"The
is
annexed
to
s
last;
as,
court-martiaV Decisions
in
a
decisions,"
courts-martiaV
of the
courts-martial.")
is
noun
the
possessive
the
term
limited
or
by
noun
in
position ap-
it, by
descriptive
to
phrase,
by
pronominal
adjec"
the
noun
tive, the
sign is annexed
as, "The
immediately
preceding
limited;
emperor
Napoleon'*s grave,"
"The
secretary of
the
56
GRAMMAR
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Navy^" report,"
noun
'*
What
a
I do
common
is
no noun
one
else
in
business." with
When
is
explained by
noun or
apposition
may be
; as,
it,and
to
when either
limited
common
is the
omitted,
proper
the
possessive sign
but
never
annexed
**
noun, or,
"
to at
both
We
stopped
substantive of
at Ao-
We
stopped
Acton,
a
the
jeweller*8 y
use tence sen-
(Ji) The
must
subject
in the
of
participle
having
Otherwise
a
dependent
the is not
not
one
be is
put
possessive case.
The writer^s man^s
meaning
the and
same
changed.
heard
being
scholar do office, No
doubted,
mean ever
No
one
ever
of that
a
running
is not
for
the heard
as.
The
man
writer
being
scholar
of that
running (t)
The its form.
for office.
poBBeBsive
is the
case
an
English
noun
distinguishes
by
159.
Objective Case.
is in the
"
substantive
having
an
objective
Objective Case.
are,
"
Objective Constructions
(1)
Objectof
God
made
transitive
the world,
verb /
God made
as
"
U8,
as
"
spoke
to her
sister.
She
spoke
:
to
me.
(3)
Svhject of an
He
wants
infinitive ; as
brother
to
come.
"
his
He
wants
me
to
come.
(4)
Complement of
is
He
an
ject sub-
objective ;
me
thought
her.
to be
your
sister.
He
thought
me
to be
(5)
In
I I
apposition ;
saw saw
as:
"
George, George,
the him
hoy you
you
spoke of.
of.
spoke
161. may
substantive another in
in any
of the
constructions
have
apposition with
cases.
Illustrate.
positio Ap-
applies to
all the
Illustrate.
PROPERTIES
OF
NOUNS.
57
162. verb
Direct
Object.
the
"
The
object of
as,
an
active
transitive
is called
direct Henry
The He
men
object;
buys
cattle. the
me.
grass.
likes you
not
completely
called
sometimes
accusative The
objective.
an
163.
Object of
IntraiLsitiye Verb
as
is sometimes if there
cannot
tioned men-
by undiscriminating students
such
a
could
be is
be
the
thing.
of
an
But
there
cannot.
A A
to
word verb
object
when
so
verb.
so
as
that
an
often
intransitive used
govern
object,but
it is transitive. falls on
the
The The
rain
just and
trees.
the
unjust.
(Intransitive.)
woodman
/aZZ" the
(Transitive.) is
:
"
164. similar
A in
direct
object
the
a
verb
noble
as
lived
life. It is called
a
Life
take
is the
direct
are
objectof
a
lived.
cognate
seldoni
objective. There
any
few
but
cognate object.
a
165. The
The
Object of
should
is Preposition
over
objectivecase.
list of each
student and
read
a
a carefully
tions preposia
construct
sentence
in which is doubt
a
governs the
case
noun
a noun
or
pronoun.
When
a
there
about
of the
following
place and
may
preposition, put
the form that
pronoun In
"
in
noun's
observe
it takes.
It is for
we George^^^ noticingthe
easilysee
George
in,
is
by objective,
substituted
It is for It is for
me.
pronouns
us.
58
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Also, if there
is
question
as
to
whether
the
case
of
/or or the verb i", by the preposition it may be answered by omitting the preposition. Then we have It is Q-eorge^''* in which Q-eorgeis nominative, as be shown above : as by substituting may pronouns
"
"
Q-eorgeis determined
It is /. It is
we.
It is he. It is
166.
The
Indirect
two
Object.
"
transitive
objectivesof different significations, direct object^ a denoting that upon which th" action of the verb directly terminates, and an indirect olject^ denoting different a thing that is also affected, but indirectly, by
followed
by
the
same
action
as
"
My The hook
act
teacher
gave
me
book.
of
giving
also
;
me
terminated
direct is for All
directlyupon
object.
this
reason
the
same
book
act
is
therefore
me
the
But
the
affected
as
often
spoken
of
the
indirect be
object.
as
these
so-called
a
indirect
objects
should
or
parsed
the
object of
and
Thus
him my
your
pencil
a
Give
I sent
your
a
him, my
friend
the
present
9,
present
a a
made
girl
a
dress
She
made
dress
for the
to
I asked
the
boy
question that
I asked
question
objects allow, ask, bring,buy, get, give, leave, lend, make, offer, are pass, pay, present, promise,refuse, send, show, sing, teach,
are
The
principalverbs
followed
by
indirect
write.
indirect
objectivecorresponds closelyto
the
to
the
Latin
verb
teach, meaning
either
to
give
structio intwo
is followed
by
PROPERTIES
OF
NOUNS.
59
may
as
the
**
Algebra,"
may
**
be
He
equivalentto either,
teaches
Algebra
to
me,"
or
**
He
teaches
me
in
Algebra." Oovand
168.
The
Adverbial
"
Objective
used
or
Objective without
intransitive
measure,
erning Word.
to adjectives,
Nouns denote
are
after
verbs
timcj distance,
in the
as:
value, and
without
a
similar
ideas,
word
**
often
objectivecase
"
governing
expressed;
die many
Cowards
times
before
their
deaths."
fathom
lies."
walked river
cannons
three is
a
thousand thundered
yards wider.
all
nigJa.
Such
must
substantives
be the
are
called
adverbial
objectives. They
parsed
verbs power
a^
the objectsof
for
are
governing
the
sentence
over
the is
case
of
substantives.
In
preposition during ;
be third
clearly implied.
next
or
it is
in the
to
the In
last it is such be
by
in
as
the the
on,
no
at,
in.
sentences
preposition can
relation. Our
supplied
that does
adequately
not
the
language
it may
yet have
But
proper
preposition, and
the is is
never
have.
mind
thinks that
relation, and
a us
precisely
tion. preposithat in such
that kind
Of
of relation
course
no
expressed only by
he tells inserted
Abbott
right when
was
early English
prepositions were
the relation I should rather
are
before
objectives. But
as
it is
now
and
the
we objectsjof prepositions
very
in need
of but
60
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
do
not
to
say I must
they
are
objectivewithout
is rather
a
governing
case
admit
notable is
of
thing exerting an
it is
one.
centuries influence
an
before it
not
even
lorn; but
an
by
no
means
unnatural
case,
unusual 169.
The
Besnltant followed
one
or
Factitive
Object.
"
transitive
verb
is often
direct
by two objectivesof similar significat expressing the receiver of the verb's object. The other expresses the result
is therefore called
a
action, and
Cigarettes have
We Simon
resultant
object; as:
made her
him
an
idiot.
appointed
he
leader, Peter.
surnamed
Such
not
words
should
be
parsed
but in
as
resultant
appositives^
"
apposition
two
with
the
direct
govern
resultant
are
factitive
Just
Objective Subject of
takes its
an
Infinitive. the
"
as
a so
verb
subject in
case,
case objective as :
"
We
want
George
Iva
to
go."
mistaken."
**
We
want
to
go."
mistaken."
**
They Some
think
to be
to be
erroneously
suppose
words
not
are
governed
the ing follow-
by
the
preceding
we
transitive
by
infinitives.
The
fallacyof
that is
position becomes
apparent when
when
observe infinitive
changes
a
to
native nomi-
the
replaced by
verb remain
finite verb,
unchanged
**We
think
Iva
is mistaken."
or
**
We
think
she is mistaken."
PROPERTIES
OF
NOUNS.
61
The
construction
is
common
in
the
Latin
and
Greek
languages, and is recognized by all English grammarians deserving the name. the subject of an When infinitive is also the subject of
a
finite
verb, it is nominative
George
wants to go.
as
"
He
wants
to go.
171. The
ObjectiveComplement
"
of
an
Infinitive
Copula whose
Subject is Objective.
noun or
The
as
pronoun
same case
used
as
the
is in the
one
its
To subject.^^
there
is the
exception. When
the
mbject of
copulative participle
as :
"
is
being
lawyer made
his services
valuable.
The
rule
itself
appliesto
Case;
as:
"
The
Nominative
We We
was
Tom,
she
was
he.
The
Nominative
Case;
we
as:
"
George being
lawyer^
we
employed
him.
him.
employed
Case; Objective
We We
as:
"
to
be him.
Tom.
to be
This and
not
construction
to be
is
common
in
other
languages,
always
Thus in
dispensed
of when
an
with
in
English.
copula
is not
The
complement
infinitive its
subject is objective.
a
Henry
You
tries to be
teacher.
to be
were
thought
he,
the
complements
are
nominative.
"
172.
use
of
substantive^without
connective
element^
to
modify
another
62
OBAMMAR
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
in the
same
case
and
of the
Case:
the
same
Apposition signification.
appliesto
The Nominative
"
doctor^ came
Absolute Peter,
the
Case:
"
doctor^ come
"
here
The
Possessive
Case:
Peter the
doctor^
horse
is sick ;
The
Case: Objective
We
sent
"
for
Peter,
the
doctor.
Observe
that
the
explanatory
Passive
an
term
is the
one
in
sition. appo-
Object of
govern
an
Verb." Its
verb
in the
passive
the
object.
subject represents
as,
receiver When
of
action. verb
"God
the
in all such
sentences
heaven,"
is
changed
to
the of
passive voice, it
the active resultant
copulative,the
direct
object
becomes
subject
active
of
the
passive,and
the
the
object after
after the
becomes
attributive
complement
passive.
have, "The
course,
Thus,
in
changing
ment
are was
passive voice, we
jiriwanouns
heaven^'^in which, of
case.
both
in the And
when
in such
gave
sentences
me a
as,
[to]
dollar^'^'*
is
changed
should
to
the
passive voice,
the then remain
the
direct
object in
the the
active indirect
;
become
subject
in the the
passive,and
object would
as :
"
object of
by
him."
its preposition
"A
dollar
was
given [to]
me
PROPERTIES
OF
NOUNS.
63
This have
is easy, it.
and
it is tbe
way
all
grammarians
nominative
would
grammarians, good
form
;
as :
"
speakers
the
of
indirect
passive verb
"
was
given
dollar.
In
such after
cases,
the
tive objec-
the
to
passive verb,
parse it. is It
no
we
attempt
be
passive verb,
can
and
there
supplied. In such cases, about all we can say is, that the noun without is idiomatically or objective^ objective grammatical construction^or again, the objectof a preposition
we
do not
Such
not
disposition
the
is not peace,
entirelysatisfactory.
but that
no
does
comes
bring perfect
from
ance assur-
only
one
such
consolation
likelyto do better. 174. Objective by Enallage. By a figureof speech called is sometimes enallage the subjectof a participle given the
else is
"
objectiveform
usage
sentence
when
not
it should be
have
the
should
a :
encouraged, for
different from
meaning
is
no
intended.
Thus
"
**
There
harm
in the
man
sittingon
the
counter,''
expresses
"
an
different entirely
is
no
thought
sittingon should
from
the
There
harm
in the
man's
counter."
What
175.
is the
difference?
of Nouns.
When
each
be usedf
Declension
SINOULAB.
PLUBAL.
Nominative. Possessive.
Boy.
Objective.
(a)
form
to
Boy's. Boy.
English Only
nouns
It will be
observed
that
cases.
in
distinguishtheir
the
possessive has
distinct
form.
.64
ORAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
OP is to
-HOUHS.
give, in order,
its
part of
speech, its
or
sub-classes, its properties,its ernment govconstruction, and the rule applying to its construction.
may
commonly
often
be referred
to
by number,
full.
require them to be stated in to its appropriate rule exercises Referring a construction of generalization mental the same as citing process
teacher should authorizes
a
certain
step in
Parsing
of
affords
good opportunity to
Some in be vrritten
teach be
carefulness, and
but
most
accuracy.
of it may
oral,
it should and
ink, with
correct
punctuation
178. A
capitals.
amount
parsing is excellent, but be easily overdone. It is not it can nearly so helpful as exercises in constructing original septences to illustrate But parsing is easier,and should constructions. specified
reasonable
of
always
179. 1. 2. 3.
come
first. for
Model
Parsing Nouns.
4. 5. 6.
never
Species.
Class. Sub-class. Wise
n.,
men
7. 8. 9.
Case.
Construction. Rule.
(1)
Men^
waste^
waste
com.,
nom.,
subj. of
of
R.
I.
n., com.,
2?me,
wa%te^
(a) 180. R.
See
obj.,obj.
IV.
Bules
on
page
234.
nouns.
Parse
the italicized
Tender The
men
(1)
(2)
sometimes
have
strong loills.
PARSING
OF
NOUNS.
65
(3)
(4)
bent
twig
seeks
set
a
makes
crooked
a
tree.
Water
loafer
companion.
moments
high price
on
your
leisure
; they
are
sands
of
groZd.
One Give
day
John
ran
mile best
through
the
woods. \m
your
cjTorto and
father
will
make
your
brother
asdis^an^.
(8) (9)
Smith
The
was
chosen
wants
secretary
Charles
to
of be
the
c^a^s.
c2u"
its leader.
(10) George
wishes
to
be
our
leader.
181. (1)
nouns.
Beyiew
Define
a
of Nouns.
noun.
(2)
do
we
A have when
substantive. these
a
(3)
classes?
noun
Name
the
classes
of
(4)
Explain
when
nouns a
Why
ajid
common
(5)
becomes Name
two
Define
each.
common,
(6)
and of of
illustrate
noun.
proper proper.
becomes
(7)
the the do
the
properties
methods
names
and
define
each.
(8)
a
Explain
talk
on
general
of have proper
?
forming
by
plurals.
titles.
(9) (10)
plurals
nouns
preceded
genders
sex.
(11) gender
tinguish Disof
carefully
collective and
nouns.
gender
(12)
classes
Explain
of
in
full
the
(13)
the
Name
the
substantives.
(14)
(15)
Name and
illustrate the
dependent
nominative
constructions.
illustrate the is
nominative
absolute
constructions.
(16)
Tell how
Name the
three
possessive
and
constructions.
(17)
Name
a
possessive
of from the the
formed,
singular
constructions. of
a
plural. (19)
(18)
and
noun
illustrate in
each
Distinguish (20)
apposition
does
copulative
what full of
an case
verb.
To
what of
cases a
apposition
verb? ject. object Obtwo
(21) Explain
In
in
is
the
complement
each verb, of
the
copulative
:
and
illustrate
following
(a)
Direct
(Jb) Object
of
a
intransitive
objective,
that
a
(d)
preposition, {g)
Adverbial
(e)
Indirect
or
govern
objects, (h)
objective
without of
an
governing
word.
Resultant
object.
of
a an
(/) Objective
infinitive verb,
infinitive,
in
copula. (w)
of
(Jc) Objective by
passive
the
Objective
nouns.
enallage.
use
by
declension
(24)
What
parsing
66
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
THE
PRONOUN.
182. my book.
(1)
Who
We
The
man
told
me
that
hh
wife
in
(2)
183.
are
took
see
the that
money the
that you
had
?^ in these
sentences
italicized
words
used
are
substantively without
Pronouns.
Pronoun
naming
objects.
to
Such
words
184.
an
is the
nate desig-
without object A
Pronoun
naming
a
Or,
instead
185.
is
word
of
noun.
OF three
FSOITOnirS.
uses
:
"
have the
(1)
**
of repetition
that
**
nouns;
write
as:
"
Alexander his
Elizabeth of
name
she
might
her
name
in her that
book
with
pen*^;
instead
Alexander
told book
Elizabeth with
Elizabeth
might
write
Elizabeth's
in Elizabeth's
Alexander's
pea"
These
are
Personal
a
Pronouns.
as
:
"
C2)
Who
To
came
ask
?
question ;
can
What
she
do
These
are
Pronouns. Interrogatiye
a
(3)
The This
To dog,
join
which
modifying
a
clause
to
an
antecedent
his
owner some
as
"
was
costly animal,
the
cat.
caused
anxiety.
is the
dog
that
worried
are
Belatiye
or
Conjunctiye Pronouns.
is whose
We A
"
form
shows
its person;
or
toe or
is
; thou^ you,
or
ye is
always
second
person
he, she,
it is
third person.
CLASSES
OF
PKONODNS.
67
189.
An
Interrogatiye
in
?
a
Pronoun
as
:
"
is
one
used
as
the inter
word rogative
Who
are
question ;
are
you
What
you
190.
a
Belatiye
or
Conjunctiye Prononn
;
as :
"
is
one
that joins
clause My
The The The
to its antecedent
which that
was was was
horse,
horse
woman,
woman
sick, trayelled
sick died.
slowly.
resented the criticism.
who that
impulsive, quickly
needs much
on
is
impulsive
time
(a)
very
The
term
*'
conjunctive^^ is
it is retained
the
Belative
is not
in
significant ;
only
account
of its
long standing
the grammars.
191.
The
Antecedent
of
pronoun It is be
a
is the
substantive
noun^
as,
for
the
;
which
lost
the pronoun
his
usually
as, John
pencil ;
is the
as.
phrase^
To
pay
debt^which
or a
only honorable
That
the clerk
way
was
clause^
for
us
dishonesty which
;
was
hard his
to
proved
He
has given up
course
of study and
antecedent of
a
regrets it.
is sometimes such
a
(a)
Who dishonest
The
another
statement
pronoun
?
; as,
thai, is
make
He
that
is
suspects
Personal
(6)
relative
follow
their
come
antecedents before
in
tences sen-
not
inverted, but
as:
"
sometimes
in poetry
they
their antecedents;
**
Can Back
storied
urn
or
bust
to its mansion
fleetingbreath
its antecedent
in
noun
*'
(c)
modifiers it bum."
as
In
thought,
; as,
**
pronoun
represents
with
all
its
saw
saw
the
most
beautiful
in
residence the
the
city, and
be
But
for convenience
parsing, only
may
named
the
antecedent.
The
(d)
therefore
are
antecedent the
of
an
interrogative
Here the
pronoun
it, and
wrote
is
called
subsequent.
; as.
pronoun
subsequent
the
in different
sentences
Who
wrote
the
Iliad ?
Homer
niad.
(e) gender.
pronoun
agrees
with
its antecedent
in
person,
number,
and
68
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
THE
FERSONAIi
PRONOUNS.
There thou
are
or
six you of
personal
these of has
pronouns and
for
the
or
first
it for
for the
second;
its ye the
he, she,
third.
we
Each is the
corresponding plural.
thou;
you is either
Thus,
Each
plural
and
I;
of
singularor plural ;
cases,
as
they is
forms
by
called
the
declension. Article
because stand for their form
(a) Tfiese
shows do
not.
pronouns ; not
because stand
they
for
they
may
animals,
inanimate
objects,
You should
was now or more
(6)
but
it
still
or
requires
plural verb
as
regarded
than
one,
as
singular
plural according
Thou
it
repiresents one
(c)
its the of the the
Thou
ye
is the
are
original second
common use
person among in
or
singular
the
pronoun.
or
and in
plural
Bible
still in
Friends,
and
Quakers, poetic
and
other
; but
sacred in all
writing, and
and
forms
expression
ordinary speech
is used
singular and
the
plural. Thy,
and
thine
possessive,thee
nominative
seem or
objective, and
used
to
objective,are
time have literature.
ye.
These
pronouns
also
at
acquired
At Walter
traceable
in
our
Raleigh's trial,Lord
insulted the
at
Coke,
having
failed
him
with
argument
**
and Lord
thou
evidence,
Cobham traitor."
defendant
by thouing
thus,
; for
All
that
did,
was
thy instigation,thou
used instead but
are
viper
thou
thee,
(d) Mine,
your,
one
thine,
yours,
ours,
theirs, hers
noun
are
of my,
thy,
cff
our,
the
limited that
not
is
omitted, They
the
parsing
form
differ from
of
the
other.
all
personal illogical
are
pronouns
U)
in the
a
possessive
class
case,
It is
make
separate
for the
which
personals except
nominative,
and
make If
a we
separate
make
reason
class
case a
one
the
objective.
have and the
for classification
of pronouns,
to person, the
shall
for
no
classifyingthem
pronouns
according
number,
and
have
representing
/ is the
**both
possessor of the
thing possessed."
should
(e)
used
my
or
always
form
be is
when
the and
himself is
me.
possessive
mine,
objective form
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
69
(/)
used,
with refers
"
We
is the
When
plural
the
pronoun
or
of
the
first person,
to
and
as
should
be
(1)
to
speaker
or
writer
refers When of
a
himself the
associated
or
some
other himself
person
as
persons;
(2)
speaker
latter
writer
the
representative
or
people, community,
the
section, state,
we,
use
nation. it is
an
editorial, or
himself
form
representative,
and
exhibition of
bad
taste
and
unpardonable
to
ignorance only.
is
us.
to
it instead of
/, when
is
our
speaker
and
refers its
The
possessive form
we
ours,
often
refers used
to
indefinitely ;
way. knows
"
aa,
**
They
say."
He
and
are
sometimes
a
He
that how
wilfullyinjures
to
another and
is
bad
never
man." make
**
that
merely
dress, dance,
will flirt,
good
has
wife."
no
(A)
need
The
English language
an(^
common
personal
and shall
pronoun
we
of the third
are
person, much
cessful unsuc-
singular number,
of one,
gender,
that
we
although
ever
very Some
in
it is not have
probable
been the
have word
it.
attempts one,^^
*'
made
to
adopt
the
thon, from
and
^Hhat
as,
but
usage
sanctions wishes
masculine
to
him;
If any
person when
to contribute
this cause,
drop
his money
into
the hat
he hears
his
name
called."
(i)
son, to
Peculiar
Uses
of It. and
"
It is
personal
**
pronoun
third
per-,
singular number,
a noun
neuter
gender.
it agrees
It is used
pronouns
represent
it to
with
But
which
; as,
He
"
bought
book
and
gave
me."
it has
names
also
peculiar
uses:
(1)
mother."
It is used
for the
of
infants;
verb
^^
as, "The
child
stood
by its
(2) he";
In
name
"
It is used
as
the and
subject
of the
as,
to
be, followed
; **7it is
by
you"
person
number;
It is I"
we";
sentences
"JMsthey";
the antecedent
"Whoisii^"
is not the
"What
predicate pronoun, by
the
of "the
speaker
which
;
^^
It
(the thing by
see)
is he."
(3)
followed
It is used their
the
grammatical
as,
"
subject
"
of
certain
verbs
are
logicalsubjects ;
; "I
as
to err^^
It is evident
that In such
or
he is mistaken
cases
wish the
it to be
best^
parse
it
subject
it.
verb,
It is used
represent
used
state /( rains
an
antecedent
it
not in
expressed
but
understood
; as, "Princeton
makes
(a mile)
what of the
2.19|."
cannot
a or
to denote
or
"
speaker
the
"
condition
;
"
things,
o'clock."
point
time
/i{thunders
/( is two
70
6RAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
we
uns, that
and
uses
you
uns
are
barbarisms should
gross bother
to
be
mentioned. about
two
or
Any
grammar.
more
one
such
expressions
the the
himself
(A;) In
person
as
:
"
using
pronouns the
of second the
persons,
third third
;
should
precede
You,
the
precede
he,
of
I received
But
this
is
matter
courtesy,
the order
not
of
grammar.
pronouns to as, *'I
The be and
same
rule if
of
we
politeness would
wished
the
use
require
in
an
of the
reversed you
to
speak
'*
uncomplimentary
one
way; be either
deserve he
blame.
Of
course,
should he may
never
impolite, neither
or
should
; but
do
both
without
violating
any
construction.
SUB-CLASSES
OF
FERSONAIi
PRONOUNS.
193.
Personal
pronouns
have
two
sub-classes:
Simple and
he, she, it,
Compound,
194. and The
simple personals
declined
forms.
are
/, thouy you^
their The
195.
myself,thyself, yourself,
themselves. himself,itself, ourselves, yourselves, herself, in use They have two principal uses : (1) a reflexive in the nominative the objective intensive use case ; (2) an the objective case. This second is merely for use or. emphasis. 196.
The
saw
bear him
hung himself.
do it. in
The
house
was me.
divided
You,
yourself, told
(a)
form
**
poetic or antique
nominative;
was some
forms
as,
^^
of
expression
smi
the
compound
"
stands
out
in the
Myself
"
hell."
But
Milton.
Giving
himself only
great one."
with the
Acts. another
ordinarily
as,
it is nominative
when
;
in
or
apposition
is used
as
nominative,
of
a
"She,
as,
"
herself,is coming"
She is not
complement
instead thee
'*
copula,
herselfa,ny
the
(")
as, **6et
simple personal
behind such
as
of the
'Compound
an
(thyself)
But
in
me."
(thyself)
ark
of
gopher
to
expressions
Haste
thee,^^ it is better
thou.
regard
"
* *
objective thee
is sometimes
own
idiomaticallyused substantively ;
as,
(c) Self
self.
used
' '
He
is
great lover of
My
self,
etc.
CLASSES
OF
PBONOUNS.
71
(d) place,"
It
seems
to
have
an
adverbial
to
**
constniction
very
were same
in,
**
The
which
is
The
place."
common
(c) Formerly
now
theirself
in
use, but
are
obsolete.
Ourself
peculiar to
the
regal style.
197.
"
Pronouns,
the
same
whether
sonal, per-
have interrogative,
properties
have also
as
nouns,
same
"
Person, Number,
as
Gender, Case.
They
the
constructions Declension
nouns.
198.
Pronouns. (2)
singular.
Second
Person,
plural.
singular.
(a)
never
The lose
pupil sight
should
declension the
firmly
in
mind,
and
should the
of the
is to
show
differentforms
and
cases.
corresponding
to the
numbers^
in the
use
genders^
of the
Knowing by mastering
and with
this,he
a
errors
pronouns
very
rules,
is
no
especiallyRules
other
can
I.,II.,III.,
to
use
XIV.
way
to
learn
the
degree of
declines
assurance. a
It he
never
be done
by imitation,
to
or use
(6)
case
When in
pupil
pronoun, to
should any
to
be
allowed
each
form
sentence,
teacher
and thinks
illustrate
nominative
objective
construction
the
it advisable
call for.
199. 1. 4.
Model
for
Parsing
Class.
or
Pronouns. 3.
Species.
Antecedent
2.
Sub-class.
Subsequent.
72
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
5. 6.
Agreement
Case. The John 7.
in
(c) Gender.
his.
Construction. took
come
boy
has
your and
top and
took
I like him,
name
Your^
pro.,
per.,
simp., antecedent,
of the
it agrees
person in
or
second,
and
XIV.,
poss.,
top^ R. VIII.
We^ pro.,
per.,
simp., ante.,
R.
name
represented
in
by
the
speaker,with
XIV,
nom.,
first, plu.,
I.
com.,
subj. of took^ R.
name
of the
person
spoken of,
R.
in
third,sing., mas.,
XIV.,
Him^
top^ R. VIII. it agrees in pro., per., simp., ante., John^ with which R. XIV., obj., third, sing., obj. oilike^R. IV. mas.,
Write
the
parsing of italicized pronouns^ observing the italicized and spelling. Parse orally punctuation^ capitals^ Read and to the teacher nouns. class^grammar authority constructions, on questionable
(A)
adored. 5. Ours 1. 4.
are
200.
We
I
as
think.
2. will yours,
She
prattles.
me
3. I
Thou
art
hope good
loss.
you
'e^
give
4.
the book
must
moon
You the
blame
;
your her
me^
7. Behold 8. He
she I,
beauty.
I I
was
than
Them blame.
herselfis
thought
1. JMs
it, too
(B)
knows
to be
a
early
wanted
2. She
me
is very chairman.
beautiful 4. He desired
the
and
she
3.
He
to
elect
to
wanted him
to
preacher^
She
but
he wanted him
8.
a
be
tailor.
5. She
that
go.
6.
compelled
10. He
to go.
7. And
a
methought
9.
lighthouse
him
I to
looked
He
is
good boy.
we
We
believe him.
11. you,
be
good hoy.
he
was
good hoy^
him
to be
to
do
not
fear
thought
try
you.
thought
was
you. you.
13. He
being
I must
to like him.
supposed
be
CLASSES
OF
PBONOUNS.
73
201.
Fill
the
blanks
with
or
me,
:
and
give the
1. 3.
number and
of the
selection and
John John
May
Let
go ?
Let
and
on,
.
boast
it off.
to me,
that He
puts his
calls
no
armor
but
takes
cometh oranges 9.
5.
May
were was
and
out.
I will in
was
.
wise If I
;
cast
7.
Who
the
? it
It
8. No 11.
1 would 10.
.
resist.
Was
1 and
saw
?
.
it
They
came
with them.
Harry
12.
Harry
and
and
to
came
with
She
wants
be
good.
not
13.
O,
And
no,
my
child, 'twas
that kills
a
in war. his
are
singleman
;
we
14.
Look
at
Lucy
to
and
.
thought
I make be
.
be the
was
16.
that 17.
to
overcometh, will
pillarin
18. He
temple.
We
thought
.
him
to
thought
be
:
"
with we,
ns,
That
is whom
good
he
were
Americans.
please.
4. Let touch you She
that
? 5.
none
Helen
are
boys
the clean. have
want
to
speak plainly.
6.
was
Let
it but
saw.
it he
who
mischief
9.
Whom
girls.
INTEBBOGATIVE PRONOUNS.
202.
There
are
two
interrogativepronouns,
classed of who The among and the what. that
who
and
what.
(a) Which
but
is also
commonly
from
or
interrogativepronouns,
Which
noun
its
a
use
is different of
to
one
of
number
persons
or
things.
particular
; as,
"
to
is
always expressed
want?"
**
definitely understood
the
Which will
do
you
"I
want
large book."
It will be
""Which
[hat]
the
take?"
The
cheapest [hat]."
observed
also that
responsive word
74
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Is not
as an
noun,
but
an
adjective.
Which
in such
sentences
should
be
parsed
adjective. interrogative
203. 204.
Who
and
what
are
used
less
Who
to
is used
it is
name
supposed
of
a
answering
205.
it will be is used
person, word
What
to
is
it is
name
answering
(a)
"
it will be the
an
What
horse
adjective when
"
it is
immediately precedes
never
; as,
What
shall I ride ?
Who
used
adjectively.
206.
Declension
of the
InterrogativePronouns.
Who. Whose. Whom. of
an
Nominative, Possessive.
"
Objective.
case
207.
are
The
and
same
constmction
as
interrogativepronoun
always
as,
the
"
that
?
"
answer;
TTAo
came
of its
"It
is
''Whose Gf-eorge:'
"
book ?
"It wanted
same
is
Whom
did
he
want
He
George's George.''
in has in the
has the
construction
the
that
very
useful.
can
the
pupils illustrate
it
by
applying
An
it to every
of word
that is
never
question.
in the nominative absolute
interrogative pronoun
is
never
case, and
An
in
apposition.
has
no
interrogativepronoun
or
compound
forms,
but
may
be
direct
indirect.
THE
INDIRECT
INTERROOATIVE.
"
209.
These
same
words, who
to
and
what,
to
are
often
used
in
substantive
as :
"
clauses, not
ask, but
imply, questions;
(1) (2)
(3)
I know I know He
who who
me
asked
I wanted
CLASSES
OP
PRONOUNS.
75
210.
In
all such
sentences
who
and
what
are
indirect
interrogative pronouns.
211. An Indirect clause have and what
to
Interrogative Frononn
is
one
used
in
this
distinction
by
position disan no
callingwho
But the
in such
sentences.
slightest regard
impossible.
A
to
a
thought
these
makes
this
relative pronoun
always joins
pronouns have clauses.
adjectiveclause
connective
cannot
substantive;
are
force
that
not
and the
used
in
substantive of who is
We
say does
antecedent "I
now means
understood, for
(1)
mean,
know
America."
No
one
discovered [the man] who make such livingcan truthfully that from
statement, unless
the
not
he
history he
discovered
who
has learned is
character
But who
certainlythis thought
America." took
expressed by,
does
Nor
(2)
pen."
a
mean,
[the boy]
give
no we
the
teacher's
This fellow
"
would
information, for he
all know. Or if it
is doubtless is insisted
pupil, whom
[the boy] who took the teacher's a a pen," expresses possible thought, and it does, even beginner will readilysee that the thought is not the one
expressed
213. relative when the it Nor in "I
can
that
I know
know what
who in
the
teacher's
as
pen."
be called pronoun preserve be
so panded. exa
sentences
a
(3)
pronoun.
can
What
double the
relative and
be
expanded
;
thing that
in
meaning
intended in
but
what who in
(3)
cannot
What
(3)
and
indirect
interrogative pronouns.
214.
Here
are
the
Tests.
a
"
Who
what
as
direct
rogative interin
or
asks
direct
or
questionand
substantive
may
be used Who
principal sentence
an
clause.
never
indirect
interrogative pronoun
is
asks^ but
in
a
always used
substan-
76
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
tive clause.
Who
as
relative pronoun
is
always
used What
in
as
an a an
adjectiveclause^ which
relative pronoun antecedent into fhe (a)
No No
is and
always double^
a
is
"
to equivalent
both
part
relative part^
and
can
be
expanded
thing that.
interrogative "word,
is needed declension for
a
direct
or
is indirect, clause.'
ever
connective.
connective
substantive indirect
(6)
as
The
of the
interrogativepronouns
each
is the in
a
same
of the
direct
form
sentence.
(c)
be used
The
substantive
one
containing the
nominative
or
indirect
interrogativemay
in any
of the
five
objective constructions.
is the
Illustrate.
(d)
in the
The
construction
as
interrogative pronoun
of
a
same
implied question
were
the
direct
or an or
interrogativeif the
indirect
question
asked. may
Illustrate. in any
Either of the
direct
tive interroga-
pronoun
be used
nominative
except
apposition.
Illustrate.
215.
Parsing of InterrogativePronouns.
Who
He is he ? asked who
was
(1) (3)
(2)
What
the
do
you
think
she has ?
behind
door.
responsive complement
word in
to
the
question, with
R.
which
it agrees of
num.
and
gen.,
XIV.,
nom.,
f",
What^
in
answer
the
question, with
R.
which
it agrees
in
per.,
num.
Who^ pro.,
in the
and
XIV.,
answer
to
num.
the
implied question,
and gen., R.
with
nom.,
which
it
agrees
was^
in per., I.
an
XIV.,
subj. of
R.
When
(a)
for the
interrogative pronoun
verb
to be
is used
as
the
subject
of
verb
it but
of the third
person,
singular number,
as
interrogative may
always
be
parsed
agreeing
with
responsive word.
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
77
216.
Write
each
came
whether
the
and
tell
you you A
? ?
To
whom
did
speak
?
(3) What
Who Who What
blacksmith.
garden opinion
what
? of
good
you,
nature
? what do
you want
was
(7) Who
Who
you, the
have
and ?
done
first President
Washington
Island ? The
the
first President.
Who
was
the
founder
of
Rhode
founder
of
Rhode
Roger
Who Who What What
Williams.
(10)
guest ?
(11)
(12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
a a
man man
give give
came
for ?
wants wants
to be.
see.
to
217. number (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Fill
the the
blanks each
with
suitable
pronouns,
giving the
of
rule
he
illustrates,
?
am
did do do do
inquire for
say think think wish that
me
men
you you
to be
? ?
to
to
be
me
she
be ? you think
we me are
question,
you you you will know guess
do he he
to be ?
has
been
answered.
thinks
? ? you
were
thought
he she
it
was
imagine
never
thought
?
to be.
know
guessed
you
BELATITE
OR
CONJUNCTIVE
PRONOUNS.
218.
to
Relative
a
or
Conjimctive
Frononn
; as,
"
is A
one man
that
joins
is in
limiting clause
fhat
was
honest very
bad
which
78
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
There
are
five relatives
not
"
They
form,
as
do may I You He
show
seen
their from
by.
be
the
following:
to
town^ etc.
They
We
by the relative clause, is the antecedent. called It is usually a noun or personal but it may To stay be a phrase or a clause^ as, pronoun^ be to acknowledge his inabilityto do would which away^
220. The substantive
"
limited
the
work, would
closed
an
keep
him
from
being
the
selected
"
"
;
or
"
The
hoy
be
the
door^ which
been
darkened
as
room;
it may for
interrogative pronoun;
has
ever
"TTAo
It
that
has
never
asked
bread
refused?"
is
another
relative. 221.
or
The
antecedent
is may
commonly
sometimes
in the be
nominative
case
the
objective;but
;
as
:
"
in the
nominative
absolute
^^John, who
had
"
been
promised
the
position,having
declined
it,they,
give
or
it to
me
;
as :
"
the
'*
possessive ;
thou the
Be His
first true
merit waits
to
befriend
;
"
Pope,
"
**
My
mine,
OF
but
John
vii. 16.
CLASSES
BEIiATIVE
PRONOUNS.
222.
There and
are
three
classes
of
relatives:
Donble.
223. 224.
ever^
or
(1) (2)
and
as
The The
simplerelatives are who, which, that, and as. compound relatives are formed by annexing
to
soever^
the
no
simple relatives,who
and
which.
That
have
compound
forms.
The
compound
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
79
less definite
relatives
use
are
more
comprehensive
double
and
in their
than 225.
(3)
it is
The
relative iawlidit.
two
It is called double,
antecedent
because
a
equivalent to
The is
parts, an
of
or a
part and
or a
relative
part.
sentence
antecedent
simple
contains
pound com-
relative
always expressed
;
a
understood
in the its
own
principal
double
relative
is
equivalent
cases
it is
parsed.
It is better
to
pand ex-
into
the and
What
compound
into the shall that he you
forms, whatever
the
whatsoever^ which
expanded
Thus,
"
thing
whichever
"
thing whichsoever.
gave
"
sentences,
have gave want." (a)
double Whoever
I took you
''
me,"
I took any
and the
You
whatever
want,"
You
mean,
thing
me," and
shall have
thing
whichever
and
'whosoever
are
have but
been
not
erroneously
understood
treated
as
relatives.
to be
They
used and
compound,
double.
are
It is their
peculiar they
characteristic do
when
their antecedents
their
j but
whatever, contain
form of is not the
(ft) The
used when
objective
simple
relative
;
as
^'
its antecedent
expressed
gods
young." 226. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 227. (1) (2)
the The The
Personal
Both Both
Both
and
nouns.
Relative
Frononns
are
alike in
"
represent
have agree have admit
the
properties and
their
constructions in person,
of
nouns.
with
the
antecedents
number,
and
gender.
Both
Both
sub-classes, simple
and
compound.
of Declension.
Personal
relative
and
has has
a a
Relative
connective
Frononns
use,
are
nnlike
in
has
"
and
the
personal
not. person,
personal
has
not.
distinct form
for each
grammatical
and
relative
(3)
tences
The ;
personal
relative
may
be
used
in either
principal
or
subordinate
senr
(4)
The
; the
personal
cannot.
80
GRABIMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
228.
Declension
of fhe Relative
SIMPLE.
Prononns
"
DOUBLE.
Nominative, Possessive.
Who,
Whose.
which, that.
What.
Objective.
Whom,
which, that.
COMPOUND.
What.
Nominative.
Whoever,
whosoever,
whichever,
ever. whichso-
Possessive.
Whosesoever.
Objective.
(a) (6)
which. Whose That is the is
Whomsoever,
whichever, whichsoever.
or
that. it is
aa
usually
the
be
indeclinable, but
declinable
as
(c)
used
What
as
double
and relative,
the
simple
relative
as,
cannot
be
in the
possessive. of other
229.
or
Kinds for
Objects Eepresented.
"
Who
is used "The
"
tor persons
objectspersonified;as,
architect,
goose, words who dressed ad-
who
lives
in the the
city,came
an
to
see
us." in
The
thought
Who
dog
intruder, thus
winged
him." (a)
should
never are
be
used
for
brute
animals,
or
for
inanimate
they
personified. be
as,
Which
may
used
"
either
for
brute
was
animals
or
for with
objects ;
money,
His
horse, which
has left." own."
bought
is all he is all
"The
house^ which
heavily mortgaged,
(a) Which,
in earlier in the
they
used
"
English, was
Bible
; as,
for persons.
This
art
use
of which heaven"
;
is very but
frequent
now
Our it
was
Father, which
in
it is not
good English.
Also,
formerly
used
substantively ;
as, "In
theio^icA."
231.
That
may
be
used
"The sold
near
for persons^
man
animals^
wants
or
animate in-
objects;as,
"The
tree
cow
that
food." "The
that
was
yesterday
the
corner
to-day."
house."
that
fell stood
of the
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
81
232.
Kinds
of Relative
Clauses.
"
Restrictive
and
atory. Explan-
233. the
are names
Restrictive
Clause
i"
one
that restricts
as,
"
or are
narrows
of application
better
are
"
Men y
"
that Words
honest that
to
are
than
men
dishonest
nouns." The
boy
that that
will
lie is not
to this
be
trusted."
was
Washington
of the
emigrated
country
the
ancestor
Washington
has the force
"
father
of
Restrictive
Clause
'*
of
an
adjective ;
etc.
as,
^^
honest
men,"
^''dishonest
men,"
name
words,"
lying boy,"
234.
An
or
Explanatory Clanse is
expresses
a
one
that
explainsthe
to the
one
thought
as
additional
as,
are
in the
principalsentence
are
Men, who
which
are
rational
animals^
better
than
brutes,
irrational which
are
animals. the
Words,
classes. Mr.
signs of ideas,
are
divided
into
Harris, who
who the
was was
me. was
Washington,
spiritof
father of
gave
country,
to
the
Revolution, which
birth
the American
Repullic,
(a)
a
An
Explanatory
sentence.
are
has
the
force
of
an
appositive written,
"
or
of
co'drdinate
first above
might
when
be
Men,
the
rational
aniihals,
Mr. This Harris
brutes,
he
was
irrational there
animals;
it occurred.
and
third,
"
told
(h)
very and
distinction very
between
restrictive
The
and
explanatory
clauses
is
important.
till he
pupil should
mastered in his it.
study
He
these
must
definitions be able
to
sentences
has
point
readily the
and
relative
clauses
and he to
must
or
Reader, Arithmetic,
each
is
History,
or
Geography,
school
Physiology,
why. Also,
restrictive
on
explanatory,, and
able
to talk
any
of the
or
subjects mentioned
as
above,
teacher
to
restrictive
explanatory clauses
the
may be
direct,and
used.
given
relative
(c)
explanatoi^
clause, but
not
is restrictive,
set
ofE by
commas.
82
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
235. 236.
Relative That is
to be Preferred
in Each
Kind who it is
of Clanse.
or
restrictive
which used
in in
never
explanatory
237. clause. (a)
be whom
use
Who
which
must
be
used
in every
explanatory
must
When
or
relative
is needed
immediately
be
so
after
In
preposition it
case we
used.
even
this
a
must
either
or
the
objective
sentence
who
or
which^
in
restrictive
; as,
*'
clause,
He
close
man
the that
preposition.
**
Either
man
is allowable whom
is the
came
or with^''''
He be
woman
is the used
with
a
I came/' clause
to
(")
beautiful
Who
may
sometimes
as,
woman
in
restrictive had
a
avoid
was
the* very
repetition of that;
"
"A
that had
a
daughter
that and
was
who
or
"
who
daughter
use
very in
(c)
neither
Good
writers
often is
carelessly
the
who
a
which
clauses,but
be
nothing
gained by
it ; it is
violation imitated
of rule
encouraged by
grammarian
nor
by
the
student
be
parsed
same.
a man
as
relative
after used
the in
adjectives
restrictive "As has the
"w"?A,many^
clauses many
same
as
It
as
is he
were
always
is,let
me
as,
Such
try
to be."
baptized."
sometimes you
"He
as peculiarities
his father."
are
239. and
whatever
as,
"
used
like which
out
whichever you
are
What
consolation
"
get
money
speech
you may
welcome
to."
Whatever
you
keep." Although these words immediately be called for they cannot adjectives^ nouns, contain sentences are evidentlyjcomplex,and must
The consolation that the
sentences mean,
"
You that
are
welcome
to
"
the You
you
get
out
of
may be
"
"
keep
double
money
whichever
you
not
^'^
cannot
contain
antecedents^
and consolation^^^
money, and
What
whatever
simple compound
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
83
240.
Connective found in
a
Use
of
the
Relative.
"
The
relative
is
always
complex sentence,
on
and
always depends
subordinate
in
tence, sen-
some
word
in the
joins to
"
its antecedent
principal.
learn," is
A will
boy
complex.
and ^Hhat
"A is
boy
learn"
principal,
The
dent its antece-
studious^^^the
The relative
subordinate
sentence
sentence. to
Joy."
a
pronoun
account
therefore of which
performs
the
conjunction^on
its
more
it is sometimes
by
out
conjunctive appropriate name, pronoun. the pupil should always parsing the relative,
its then
point
subject^ predicate^
the nate subordiin
and
sentence
242.
that
always
the
in the
some
and depends for its principalsentence that in the principal sentence; word
comes
construction relative
always
its
con,-
in
the
on
subordinate
word
sentence
and
depends for
sentence.
struction 243.
some
As
is indeclinable;
or
be
singular or
or
plural;
masculine^ feminine^
is
neuter
nominative
objective. It
always
244.
relative
after
the
adjectivesame.
be
Technical
Ab is
Notes
that may
omitted. comparisons
in two ; but
(a)
be
seen
chieflyused
after
to
like than^ in
or
making
it may
:
"
even
such
an
many
it is used
different mentioned. of
senses
(1) (2)
a manner
refer refer
to
identical different
to two
some
classes them.
objects,in
to be
*'
such
suggest
similaritybetween
not
It is the
a
first of these
pronoun.
as were
uses,
us
the
to
that
entitles
as
called sang
try
this
In
She
not
similar,
=
identical
called received
for.
"Such
to
as"
**the
"
=
that." that
(2)
As
many
him,
are
them
same
he power
saw
received,"
etc.
(3)
*'
These
the
you
y ester-
84
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
day"
three
**
=
These should
^*
are
the
same as
that,^^ etc.
a
In
such
sentences
as
the
last
tences sen-
as as
be
parsed
of
relative bananas
pronoun.
as
But
are
in
such
I have
often
the
use
bought
as
such is
are
you
selling,for bought,
The
**
five
not
cents
dozen,**
is
entirely
I have
ones.
;
the
identical
bananas
that
you
above often
sentence
evidently
bananas dozen."
an
elliptical. In
as
have
bought
five
**
such
a
[those
relates
so
bananas
not
as.
that]
you
are
Celling,for
to
cents
"
As
to
"bananas,"
is
a
but
"such." used
Such the
is
adjective ;
of
is
It
predicate adjective
And
in
as
complement
[are], and
The So
...
modifies but
not
[bananas].
so
"Milton
as
has
is
fine
descriptions of morning,
not
a
many
as a
Shakespeare," comparison,
adverbs. adverb and
in
"
evidently
of which
relative.
sentence
as are
expresses
the /S'o"
basis
is number.
responsive
as
a
introduces As is
a
the
comparison
adverb
to
and
limits of
many ;
simple
of
degree. joins
its full the
conjunctive
sentence
degree
The
it limits
[many]
expresses has
subordinate
exact
so.
sentence above
that
in the
as
is,Milton
fine
are
descriptions
many
of
many
[the descriptions
avoid
that]
Shakespeare
It
as
[has].
well in most after should for
cases
may
be
a
to
difficult distinctions
many,
by calling
same;
but
always
teacher
relative
at
the
adjectives such,
that
and
the
least
know
the
distinctions the
exist, and
very best
when
are
prepared thought.
the pronoun
them,
they
will afford
material
in
(6) by
When
a
subject
the
of
sentence,
; as
:
"
it is often
ified mod-
relative
clause
predicate
^^
It is the
tree
that
frightens my
horse."
'"
It is I that
calls him."
"
/i5is you
that is to blame."
common
for relative
speakers, writers,
clauses. of In
the
most
and
cases
even
grammarians belong
to
to
misconstrue
such
It
they
third
the
the
subject
instead pronoun. relative
it.
is the
antecedent should in
and relative, of
the
the verb
person
in the
ordinate sub-
sentence
therefore and
a
be number
singular,
noun or
of
agreeing
It
person
sentence
with
predicate
to
gives
the
to
the
very
different three
meaning
sentences to
construe
are
:
"
the
with intended
predicate.
be
the
Thus
the
above
dently evi-
respective
is it that is it that is it that
answers
the
questions
?
"
"
frightens your
calls him is to blame
?
"
horse
"
"
"
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
85
The it?"
verb
answer
first sentence
Then tree
could be remain
**
be
the
answer
to
the
question,
relative the
?
"
"
What
tree
is the the
would
the
antecedent
of And
the
that, and
could it would be
frightens
to the
would
unchanged
is to In
or
third Then
question,
are
Who
be
censured
case,
read,
is you
that
to
blame."
this
would of
to
construction determine
is the use
of
the
the
clause,
of
rather verb.
the Be
form
the
careful
determine
or
of
Even
then
construct
your
"
sentence,
parse
it,
"
accordingly.
says the
:
Bascom
in and
his
Philosophy
recoil
of Rhetoric thaX
*^It
is this
unexpected
union
quick
of ideas
please
mind."
245. pronoun
of
Relative of the
Fronoims.
"
A
or
relative
any
nominative It Inay
objective
be sive, posses-
constructions
except apposition.
a
also
limiting
used
as
substantive
a
of
different
a
the
use.
subjectof
participlehaving
RememheT absolute
that
no
relative
is
ever
in
appositionor
construction,
of
Parsing
Relative that
(1)
man
is careless
business
will
lose it. which with it agrees That^ pro., rel.,simp., ante, maw, R. XIV., nom., third, sing.,mas., subj.of i",R. I. in
(2)
He
will do
such
work
as
the
man
requires.
it agrees in As^ pro., rel., simp., ante, worh^ with which R. IV. third, sing.,neut., R. XIV., obj.,obj.of requires^
(3)
Whoever
looks
for
perfection will
be
pointed. disap-
(4)
I shall
be
satisfied with
satisfied with
I shall be
thing that
I receive.
86
QSAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
the
thing that.
com.,
n.,
third, sing.,neut.,
in it agrees with which That^ pro., rel.,simp., ante, thing^ third, sing,neut., R. XIV., obj.,obj.of receive^R. IV.
(5)
Ask Ask
you
want
thingwhichever
double,
=
you ^A^
want.
Thing^ the
of
ante,
part,
n., com.,
/or, R. V.
ante,
Whichever^ the rel. part, pro., rel., comp., which it agrees in third, sing., neut.,
R.
obj. of (6)
want^
R.
IV. money
was
Whatever
The money
in the
was
purse
is mine purse
whichever
to
in the
Whatever
comp. agrees R. 248. I.
is
equivalent
not
whichever^ and
ante,
is
rel.,
it
was^
(but
in
double),
money^
with
nom.,
sub.
of
Designate each
antecedent, and
or
principal sentence,
relative. Tell
snbordinate the
tence, sen-
whether
clause
is
restrictive
explanatory, and
words^
other all
why.
and
Write
in
i'^ff ^f
Be
^tt italicized
and
construction
of
words
teacher.
donble
/rom
the
teacher
class
(A)
2. that that The
1.
season
that tries
not
son.
our
affections.
3. He evil
eye, which in
all
things,sees
is
a
itself.
4. said
gathereth
men
wise 5.
The
do
lives
after
them.
Whoever
it must
CLASSES
OP
PRONOUNS.
87
have little
been
misinformed.
7.
me.
He
are
is
man
confidence.
the
is the
lady
came came
spoke
see me.
who that
has
we
Kansas,
Kansas
once
me.
1.
Who
that
heard
are
would 3. The
ever
hear who
him
saw
again
the
is the his
a was
book
that
study.
in all
am was a a
fox,
6.
trap,
companion. dream,
an
4.
I believe
was
religionwhose
dream. the
man
origin
is divine.
to
I had
came
which
not
The
place
Whom
to
which
me
open the
on.
field.
man
7.
not
that he 9.
thought
the
to
be.
8.
He him
is not
that he 10.
we
thought
man
to be.
we
shoe
put it
man
He
is the
whom
to be.
thought
be you.
is the
**
whom
to
thought
at this
you
Who The
stops
birds
plunder
tear
signal hour,
the
shall
him,
and
dogs devour.*'
"
Pope'^8 Homer,
whichever
are
13. best.
Whoever
16.
comes
be
are are
admitted. the
names
14. of
Take
you
Words,
Words I do He you what mindful 18. 20.
signs
are
ideas,
17. 19. asked
we
divided you
see
16. ?
nouns.
Do you
care
what I 23.
she did.
For
thinks.
21.
Do
what
He have
are
Give 24.
what
please.
was
what
I remember than
said. what
was.
25.
Fops
I heard
more
to what
showy,
the 30. he
of he
is necessary. 27.
26. what
wakes 28.
to
bitter memory
of what die
gods
took.
love
young.
29.
heart
Whatever also
she
beauty. found,
may
purifiesthe
Whatever 34. Whoever
fortifies it.
he he
money
I get, I will
spend.
learn. these Whoso
Whatever
Whoever of evil. himself
do,
I shall
come.
studies is
more
will, may
37. of Whom
a
Whatsoever
than 38.
cometh boasteth
the
loveth. He
and
false
rain.
249. number
Fill the is
a
each rule
blank
with
who
or
whom,
hy designating
each word plied sup-
illustrated.
or
Tell whether
relative
interrogative. When
change possible^
the
verb and the finite verb in the clause to a finite infinitive the ease and construction to an of noting carefully infinitive^ both before and after the change. every substantive
88
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
EltGLISH
SENTENCE.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (16) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) 250.
la.
He
knew married
not
a a
they lady,
man,
-^-
were.
He She
they
I
?
say
is very
to be
wealthy.
married do
men
I know
am
worthless.
say
that
me
does does I
saw a
he he
think think
to be ?
to
be
me
man, you
1 think
do do
was
think think
that him
to
see
he
you
he
to be ?
thought
wish you
to
be ? ?
to
see
do
you
is it that He He He He is is is is
a a a a
wish I
I
? you
to
man,
thought thought
to be.
man, man,
man, you you
a a
be you.
to be
was
thought
were
you.
to be.
you
thought
inquu^e for
wish
to
see
? ?
is not is not
lady, lady,
we
supposed
was
her
to be. to be.
she
supposed
and
Ontline
of
Substantives,Nonns,
Mary,
Fronoiins.
Classes. Noun
:
16.
name
as
James, Washington,
water,
air,farmer,
Jane
Proper
Common
name
used
to
object from
others
of the
same
class.
:
2c.
One One
:
that
names
Id, 2d.
that of
in the
an
singular may
name as an
group
of
objects.
of
some
Name
object regarded
included
a
attribute
object.
common noun
: :
A
A
"
not
in any
noun.
of the other
classes.
word One
:
used that
to
represent
distinct
Ic.
has
forms
for
different
grammatical
forms.
/, thou,
you,
their declined
Simple
(Without self or
:
annexed.)
with
an a
Compound
One
(A simple personal
that may and
self or
antecedent
selves
annexed.)
matical gram-
Relative:
represent
of any
:
person,
join to
it
limitingclause
who, which,
what.
Simple
( Who,
Compound:
{Whoever,
whichever.)
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
89
Double:
{What.) (Whatever.)
and what when used in Who
Compound-double: Interrogative:
asking questions.
Properties.
Person.
16.
First.
Second.
Third.
Number.
Singular.
Plural.
Ic.
2c.
Common.
:
Case
That
property
of
noun
or
pronoun
or use.
that
indicates
or
is
by
its construction
Id.
Dependent
means
Constructions.
(Construction in
:
grammar
always
use.)
of
a
Ic. 2c.
Subject
finite verb of
a
Sarah
and
I whose
will go.
Complement
He
subject
were
is the
to be the
thought
were
you
he.
to be
thought
3c.
You
thought
not
Complement
:
of His
subject
excuse
being
Jones
:
him.
4c.
In
Apposition.
With With
a a
word
the
banker
died.
my
phrase
my sentence
His
objectingto
He
to my
statement,
very
rude
act, caused
With
a
defeat.
:
came
ness kind-
I shall
always
be
Constructions.
: :
By By By
George, bring
I of about
a noun
me
your
book.
Mercy
use
pleonasm something
shine
(the
before
: object)
sentence
in which
is said
its
The
forever. Blair^s
a
4c.
By
inscription: planted
Bhetoric.
5c. With
(subject of)
our
having
come,
we
flowers.
III.)
told us,
we
6c.
In
apposition : Johnson,
it.
lieved be-
90
6BAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
2c.
Possessive.
Id.
Limiting
hat.
noun
of different
signification :
Brown'^s
bank.
My
2d.
Limiting
Nelson
noun
of
same
signification apposition :
=
He
read
the
senator^s
speech.
(Better, He
read
Senator
Nelson's 3c.
speech.)
transitive verb
:
They
went
saw
James him
and and
to
me.
preposition :
an
She
with the
her be
a
father.
liar. We
Subject
of
infinitive him of
to
an
I believed
us.
boy
wanted 4d.
leave
Complement
We her.
infinitive
to be
a
copula
whose
subject
We
is
objective :
him
to be
thought
him
merchant.
thought
6d.
In
apposition
We
saw
Brown,
the
new
minister.
OF
noun
SUBSTANTIVES.
or
pronoun
case.
used
as
the
svhject
verb of a finite
Coesar all that is known. be
is in the nominative
Gaul. James We and sometimes / left the
conquered
find
men
that think
we
slate where
thought only
this rule
there
are
no
exceptions,
case. use
and
it is the
rule
that
is
the
nominative
error
to liability not
in the
of for
nouns
according
nominative
to
this
rule, since
the
they
do
have
different
forms
i
the
case
and
applying
a
this
rule to the
pronoun,
"we
are
liable
to
error
"
When
personal, relative, or
as, "He
interrogative
John and
pronoun
me were
is the to
a
subject
of
"*
an
objective clause;
is
a man
thought
not
blame."
He
whom think
you is the I of
suppose
would
do
such
thing."
it
**
Whom In
do the
as
you
"
be
instead
of
*'me,"
because
stands
subject
should
**toere."
should
second,
instead
the of
pronoun "toAom
"
is the ; in the of
subject of
"
would
dOj^^ and
be
be
to
third, ^^whom^^
is,''
changed
who, because
it is the
subject
(2)
1. 2. 3. 4.
When
as
is not
mc
expressed. Shakespeare.
than
as me.
"
Is she She
The
"
suffers nations
hourly
not
so
more
Swift.
"
blessed
ua
thee.
Thomson.
rulers of the land.
"
It is not
for such
as
to sit with
the
Scott.
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
91
6.
She
was
neither
better
nor
ymet
than
you
as
or
me.
"
Thackeray,
Such their
expressions should
;
be
not
condeifined excused
on
false
syntax, regardless of
of
authors The
a
they
must
a
be
the
a
ground
noun or
enallage.
eo^ession
(d)
used
"
subject of
It may
as,
**
finite verb
be
:
"
is always
some
as
noun.
-4 noun; A An A A The
pronoun
God
^^
tempers
She
"*
the
wind
to the
shorn
lamb."
; 2",
plays
To
better
than
^Ae
infinitive; as,
participle ;
subordinate pronoun
are
be contents
as,
"
Thinking
as,
*^
any
(6)
(c)
verbs the
sun
sentence;
it is often
is not
known."
used
as
grammatical
as,
^ **
subject of certain
7i(is
that
followed
'*
by
their
logicalsubjects;
he is mistaken.^ called because
an
pleasant
to
see
set;^^
the
It is
possible that
is sometimes of the
It, in such
cases,
expletive; but
it is the word
it should which
be
parsed
verb
as
subject
the
verb}
be
with
the
or a
agrees
; and
logical subject,generally an
should is often as,
"
infinitivephrase
subordinate
proposition,
adverb there its
parsed
used There
to
as
an
appositive explaining
a
it
(/)
the verb to(W"an." There
The
introduce
came
sentence
a
in which very
precedes
in such
subject ;
should
to
the town
strange
cases
be
parsed
as
an
introductory expletive.
252.
Point
out
the and
subjectsof
tell whether
the each
:
"
finiteverbs
is
a
in
the
followingsentences^
noun^
pronoun^
clause
from cities lived a swain. (1) Remote in health to be idle is disreputable. (2) For a man (3) It is sinful to neglect the development of our powers. (4) Bestowing a kindness is better than receiving one.
(5) (6)
He
Let
that
him
to
anger I have
is better
than it. is
the
mighty.
that
heard
(7)
263.
That
he
weaker
each
day with
Fill the
following blanks
your selection:
"
give
reason
for
the
met
a
(1) (3)
should
saw
man
they thought
young
man
was
dead.
was
(2) They
He
ever was
they agreed
those
nice
looking.
had forbidden
dissatisfied with
like himself. you think
circumstances
be do
(4)
(6) (6)
is in the
as
room
?
a
It is not
for such
to fillsuch
position.
than
.
is taller than
,
but
am
heavier
92
GRAMMAR
OF
TRTS^
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
254.
Rule
II. when
"
The
subject of
also
an
is infinitive
in
the
case objective
it is not
the
subjector complemerit
verb. of a finite
We She He
believe them
wants
me
to be
mistaken.
to
learn.
you
to
is the do
man, you
whom
want
thought
your
to
be
me.
Whom
have
money the
(a)
from in each
above
sentences,
the
subjects of
are
infinitives
being
subjects of the
following sentences,
of the
subject
is also the
subject
case.
complement
We do
is therefore
in the nominative
not
intend
be
mistaken.
She
He He Who
wants
to learn. to be man,
is
man
pitied.
was
is the
wants
who
thought
money know
?
to be
I.
to have
your
to
(i") It
of the and
not
on
may
be
well
student rule
that
some
of the
our
very
best
grammarians
reject the
as
altogether,and
of the
parse verb
infinitive their
object
as
preceding
come
; but
eminence
of it.
grammarians
and
in
spite of
blunder,
account
To
parse
as
the
words
them^
their
me,
whom,
in
the
first four
sentences
above,
the
objects of
"
preceding gives
to
verbs, does
the
"
not
give just
the the
me
meanings
contrary
to
intended.
Indeed,
; as,
sentence
**
meaning
liar."
in
**
We
leave
same we
She
be
Me
in
the
last sentence 7
am a
the
to relation
can no more
that /has
me
She
believes because
liar." the
Now
that
it follows
transitive it follows in
verb
believe
sentence,
believe
to
that
/ is nominative The
two
because
the
transitive
same
verb
other.
pronouns
stand
precisely the
it is the to be.
relation
the verb
me
believe ; then be
because
subject
verb the
of am, of
must
objective because
is
subject of
it
The
subject
or
an
tive infinibut
objective,not
it is the
follows
transitive
as
preposition,
the
because verb
subject of the
because is
so
infinitive, just
the subject
subject of
finite
is nominative the
it is
of
the
finite verb.
and the
In other
words,
language
constructed.
Neither
peculiar
account
to the
English
more
; it is
just as
much
Latin
more
of their
so
extended and
in inflection, of
and
; and
it is
understood
disposed
by
the
grammarians
languages.
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
93
accusative**
"The
"
subject of
"
the
Infinitive Latin
Mood
is in the
(objective).
drews An-
Allen
**
Oreenough^a
of the Latin of the
Grammar,
mood
" 240
is put
(f).
in the accusative/*
"
The "
subject subject
infinitive
Stoddard's
Grammar,
infinitive that the
"
is in
men
239. the
went
"The
accusative; away^
has
"
as,
\4yoviri roi^s
s
Goodwin'*
Greek
The
"
in
dependent
its
subject in
in Art. the
the
sative." accu-
Greek the
Grammar,
infinitive
same
; and
730, he
says, the
"
When
subject of
of the
is the case.**
with
subject of
preceding verb,
"The
it is put in the
subject
the
infinitive
is put
in
the
accusative.'*
"
s Crosby''
Chreek Grammar,
"
When
infinitive the
has
subject of
the it is not
its own,
it is in the different
"
accusative.
from the Greek
When,
however,
subject
of
infinitive
is not
principal subject of
Grammar,
the sentence,
expressed.*'
Kuhner^s
The A A A
subject
noun;
as,
of the
"
infinitive
want
may
to
be
"
We
"
Paul
want
sing
to
pronoun
; as,
We
"
him
sing
participle;
clause
as,
Ha as,
thinks
"
cheating
thinks
I say
me
be to
beating
me."
Another A
infinitive ;
; as,
"
He
to cheat
be
to rob.**
(5)
that
He
thinks
that
nothing about
it to be evidence
I know
nothing.**
is
one
(d) (e)
the
This
of the
rules the
most
frequently violated,and
be known verbs
it should
be
thoroughly
The
mastered infinitive
by
may
pupil. by
"
usually
"
the
sign
to before
it,but
it ; *'
sign
is generally omitted
let,make,
**Isaw him See
need,
do
see
; as,
he still ; '*
it.'* XVI.
(/) 266.
syntax of Rule
"
Exercises. and
I. Fill the
reasons
following Hanks
your selection
:
with suitable
"
give
to
for
a
I wish
go.
to be
(2) They
She For
"
expected
wanted
to
teacher.
to go
John do
and
with
her. for
to
his work
well
it is necessary
stay away
(5) (6) n)
We
He
supposed
is the do
man
to understand
we
it.
to be
an
thought
you. offer ?
you
expect
to
accept such
94
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
II
.
as
the
Write
fivecontaininginterrogative pronouns^
sentences
direct and
^
Write
an
in which
a
noun^
pronoun^ used
as
ticiple^ par-
of
256.
not
an
clause^ are
each
Rule
When
other
the word
subjectof
does participle
any
nominative
as a noun
absolute in
a
with participle
its
subject is
used
pendently. inde-
(a)
student
This will
rule find
is
not
to
be
found
in
any
other
grammar, in which
are
but
the
it verified
by
all correct
sentences
found
subject of
when the it
participle may
the
depend
a
upon
some
other
word;
not
"
by
Thus, participle.
(1)
The The
participle may
blushing
**We
saw
be also
subjectof
object of
verb finite
a
Alice as,
answered John
yes."
(2) (3) by
the
us
transitive
verb;
stealing
admired
The
complement
of
copulative verb;
as, "Go
as,
**
He
is
man
all." The
(4)
(6)
scientist
object of
tell her
preposition;
come
to
the
woman
standing
in
door,
In
a
and
to
in."
apposition;
very
as, "Showalter,
business man."
the
gentleman
"He
wrote
making
to
you
the the
offer,is
successful
Jordan,
of the
expedition."
sentences
267.
following
the
subjectsof
words. in
nouns
the In
ticiples parthe
depend
their
upon
any used
are
other
as
first
dependent
put in the
fifth
are
constructions, and
subjects
therefore and
possessivecase
the
subjectsin
the fourth
in
CLASSES
OP
PRONOUNS.
95
the with
nominative
their
absolute, because
used
subjectsare
quibbling
his left the been
(3)
(4) (5)
We Brown Our
were
not
surprised at
having
accepting
room. our
proposition.
had
to
coming in, we
leader
disabled,
undertaking
be
abandoned.
Objective by Enallage.
"
objectivewhen
should
an
be
in the
possessive;
but
this
be
encouraged, since
it is liable to
ambiguous
Point
out
sentence.
the
in meaning difference
between
the
first
four
and
The There No
the last
writer is
no
four.
a
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) 260.
^
being
harm heard
a
scholar
women
is not
doubted.
in
studying politics.
man
one
ever
of that
running
is not
for office.
being
writer^ is
no 8
politicianprevented
a
being
harm heard
a
scholar
in women'^s
ever
of that
man^s
Brown'^8
being
politicianprevented
a
The
A A A noun;
subjectof
as,
**
participlemay
having
in left us,
so
be
we
"
The
"
train Be
walked."
we
pronoun;
as,
as,
appearing
sincere,
him."
we
participle;
to
**
Speaking
ease." "To
public being
encouraged,
learned
speak
with
(4)
nothing (6)
An
infinitive; as,
work."
'*
whisper having
not
been
forbidden,
we
had
left but* to A
clause;
us
as,
That
he could
next
have
done
it Ainwcy*
having
been
established,let (a)
There
proceed
little
to the
proposition."
error
is but
to liability
in
using
either
nouns
or
nouns pro-
to this Bule.
IV.
"
The
of object
an
active transitive
verb
case. objective
96
GRAMMAR
t
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
rules
came
the
to
worlds which
grammar.
he
created.
learn
limb did
struck he
was
George
little
and
me.
call ?
a
there
Not
girlpeeling potatoes,
infinitives and
(a)
(6) (c)
only
and
transitive
No
active,govern
verb in the Indirect
; for
objects.
can
have
an can
object.
govern 166
an
No
object.
Resultant
see
(d) For
see
Article
a
; for the
Object
168.
Article
Objective
of
a
without
governing
may be
word
"
Article
The A A An
object
noun;
pronoun as,
transitive solved
verb the
"MoUie
as,
"
problem^ play;
**
"
They
as,
saw
"
me."*^ I like
to
infinitive phrase ;
the children^
ii
"He
wants
to go
to
with
participle^ or
forbade
as,
participial phrase ;
as,
He
prohibited whispering;''^
"They
A
onr
"
proceeding
believe
most
another
are
8"ep."
mistaken.^^
sentence;
rule
a noun
We
they
This is
frequently
; as, "He
when
saw
the
object
and the
of
"
a
"
tive transi-
verb called it
pronoun is
a
Edith and
/;
Mary
avoid
quire. re-
Henry
and
This than
very
gross
error, the
abilityto study
altogether will
compensate
for
careful
it will
262.
sentences:
Point
"
out
and
describe
the
in ohjects
the
following
(1)
Anna We We
saw
plucked
John
to
see
the
flower. prettiest
the nail. Anderson. but I like
(2)
(3)
better
driving Mary
went
(4) My (6) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) yourself (12)
He He Let
brother
likes to
study anything,
mountains
running
hills.
and
ing jump-
than
studying anything.
how to
knows
ordered
me
make
out
of mole
the horse
you
jto be
saddled.
give
offered
my
serve
pencil.
thee
seven
Jacob I I Bo
was was
said, I will
a
years
for Rachel.
lucrative
a car.
promised
not
let of
an
imperfect understanding
details. heroes.
master
We
called
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
97
263.
Fill
reasons
the
following blanks
your selections
with
:
"
suitable
pronouns^
giving
(1) (2) (3)
for
I found
assisting
in that ask will not invited he battle the hurt my had made
Success I shall
soldier.
I
.
question
Frank and and
when
see
brother
most
injured
he
had
can
the
greatest
reason
to love.
(7)
(8) (9) (10)
or
.
never
convince.
position, but
1 will honor.
he
does
not
want
either
John
(11) 264.
that
honor
Write
sentences
the illustrating
direct
object,or
the
the
accusative
;
object,or
the dative
tive objec-
the
a
objective ; and
objective
without 265.
governing word.
V.
"
Rule
A in
noun
or
pronoun
used
as
the
object
of
is preposition
ruins The is kindled of the
the
case. objective
Parthenon of the
stand stands
upon upon
men.
the the
Acropolis,
grave; the
in
the
cUy of
bums
temple
from
fame
ashes
fire that
of great
266. (1)
A A A An
The
noun
object of
; as,
"
preposition may
came
be
"
He
**
from
the
fleldy
this letter."
(2) (3)
(4) (6) (6) (7) (8)
in that
pronoun;
as, as,
Speak
**
to we."
me
participle ;
Oblige
by reading nothing
but
"She
did
cryJ*^
**I
am
about
to
AigrA."
here
as, to
as,
From
there
is ten
over
"From
hath
given
unto
man
he hath
from
(a)
great
This
to
rule
use
is
our
never
violated
in
the
use
of
noun,
but
it
requires
care
pronouns
according
to it.
98
GRAMMAE
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(")
*"
Nouns
of
time,
a
distance,
etc., are
The years lake
said is
a
to
be
in the
"
objective case
The
to
without
a
governing
;
" **
mile but
wide
rule is
foot long
nouns
**
The
is ten
old ; "
regard
mean
such
:
as
governed by prepositionsunexpressed.
is wide
"
sentences
The
lake
"
to the extent
of a
mile
"
**
The
long
to the
length o/
afoot
are
The
child for
These
prepositions
The
omitted
two
because
awkward
them.
some
expressions if expressed
noun,
to
; and
because
the
be
in the
objective case,
follows it when
be
governed
by
word.
(c)
inverted.
The
object
It the
of
preposition
the
the
sentence
is not
preposition
and as,
"
in
poetry;
when
as, "From
we we
peak
call
to
peak,
of."
among;" object ;
in prose His
wish did
to not
particular attention
relative that
that 1
came
the
conduct
precedes
with."
the
preposition that
governs
it ; as,
"
He
is
267.
sentences
Name
:
"
the
objects of
the
in prepositions
the
following
(1)
To
him
who
in the with
love her
of nature
holds she
Communion
A various
visible
forms,
the
speaks
of the State of South and other
*
language.
on
(2)
merits,
The
eulogium pronounced
the my the the honorable
Carolina, by
meets
gentleman,
concurrence.
"
revolutionary
Webster. of
hearty
Six
Daniel mouth
(3)
Into Rode
jaws
into
the
Hell,
Tennyson,
(4)
At
midnight
The Turk
guarded tent,
of the hour in
lay dreaming
When
suppliance bent,
"
Should
at his power.
(6) (6)
But A Run
now
sound wrathful
of
laughter
clamor
was
foes,
wild
to to
vanguard
rose.
Pray
That
gods
must
are now
to
intermit this
plague
"
needs
trees
are
light on
the and the
ingratitude.
fullest flowers
; the
(7)
the
The
foliageand
of the meadows and
"
woods
gay
with
laurel
are
by
clover
the
sweetbriar
; while
rose
enamelled
blossoms the
young among
the
plum begin
swell, and
cherry
to
glow
leaves.
Ii*ving.
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
99
268.
Fill the
following blanks
your selections:
and
. "
with
suitable pronouns^
ing giv-
reasons
for
sat
(1)
He
by
you with
to
(2)
(3) Mary (4) (6) (6) (8)
water.
did
came
give
Susan
it to ? and and
.
He
spoke
did
was
you
complain
? and
to ?
it from you
(7) Between
There
are
I do
,
not
care
what
he
,
says. drink
still
few,
who
like
and
nothing
but
He (9)*
sat
between neither
man
and
.
looks is the
brother, nor
about.
,
life has
are
joys
but
gone
(14)
bought
sat
it for Kate
and
.
and
noun
or
pronoun is in
used
same
as case
the
as
plement com-
of subject.
Exception. the
"
copulativeverb
the
its
When
the
subject of
copulativeparticipleis possessive,
complement (0)
This rule
is nominative. is
usually
with the
stated it its
as
to be
applicable only
case
to the
nominative is
an
case
; but
the
objective
from
case
when of the
the finite is
a
copula
verb
infinitive
different
that
; and
it
applies to
its
nominative the
absolute
when
the
copula
participle having
subject in
nominative
absolute.
(1)
In
the Nominative
That If I Who He
man were
"
is you
soldier. I would
try
to be
musician.
is he ? is not the
man
that you
thought
he
vras.
(2)
In
the
He We We K I
Objective:
thought
want
me
"
to be
her. become
our a
the
boy
to
preacher.
expect them
were
to be
companions.
to
you
I would
get him
be
musician.
100
In of
a
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
applying
^
to the
objective case by
of Rule II.
we
must
determine
**
the him
case
the
subject of
different
to be
a
infinitive
Thus,
in
I want
to be
scholar,^ scholar
from
being
want
the
objective ;
to agree
but
in
**
scholar,^ scholar
is in the nominative
case,
with
the
subject
of
to be, which
subject
of
the
finite verb.
(3)
In the
In
the Nominatiye
**
Absolute
him with **IZ""5 because
Case
Ae is
"
the sentence,
case same
I believe agree
scholar,^* scholar
of is. In the
is in
to
he, the
subject
a
sentence
meaning
he has because
not
thing,
been its
being
to
scholar, I
believe
him,''
the
copulative
is has
changed
it has of the
the
participlebeing
nominative the
; and
although
in case, of
changed
be is
no
form,
in the for
become
absolute
it is the
must
subject
participle. Scholar,
or an case.
complement
absolute
to
being,
since should
either
reason
nominative,
nominative
; and
there be
supposing
this
exception
the
rule, it
parsed
in the
nominative
absolute
270.
been the is
Eacplanation
'*
of
Exception.
in the
**
"
That
he is
has
never
questioned. complement
In
the this,
subject of the
the the
subordinate
case.
is scholar, both
nominative
finite verb
participle leaving
never
being, changing
scholar been
he
to
unchanged.
have,
of
^'His
scholar
has
questioned.'' His,
is scholar, the
subject
why
complement,
nominative has taken unless
(1) (2)
any
Scholar No
was
abridged.
abridgment general
rule
to
cause
change
in
place
in
process follow
of the
change (3)
its case,
it should
and
come be-
possessive when
It is not does it denote
the
subject becomes
it does
not
possessive.
have the
possessive,for
possessivesign, neither
in all such is
possession. complement
cases,
(4)
nominative.
(a)
The
complement
some
of
the
so
copulative used,
to
verb
is
always
noun,
or
an
adjective,or
The
expression
should be the
and
ment. comple-
pupil
and
same
careful
distinguish
The the
the
attributive
complement
refers "The
to the
man
objectivecomplement.
or
complement
is
a or a
person
mason
thing
"He
as
subject ;
me
He
is
;^^
expects
to
a
to
become
musician
but
the
objective complement
refers
different person
thing;
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
101
"John
killed
snake
;^*
"She
bought
Aowae
"
"Jones
sold
his
farm.^^ (")
followed Be careful
to
distinguish by
intransitive
verbs
that from
are
used
as
pure im-
copulas (c)
as, "He The
was
followed
attributive
complements, by
transitive
verbs
by objectivecomplements. passive
voice is often followed attributive
complements
appointed jt^d^e.'*
out
271. and
Point
the
complements in
are
the
following sentences^
and
cases
of
is but
was a
those that
a
nouns
pronJbuns
"
men
and
women
merely players.
(2) My
She He He To The Now
appointed
queen.
chairman.
farmer.
a
will become
better
man.
is that
planned
the murder.
myself again.
is
(9) Cheating
stealing.
to be
a
(10)
272.
He
appears
Canadian.
with
suitable pronouns^
giving reasons
for
your
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
It
was
not
; it
was
or
Was Was If I If it It
was
it it
were were
you
or
meant
that I would
,
? doctor.
I would
,
differently. thought
? it to be
I it
was
sought.
but
,
I knew do do It
was
she
you
men
think
say
me
to be ?
that you
am
(10)
(11) (12) (13)
said
to be
it ?
was.
do He He No It
you
man man
take
us
is the is the
matter
was
I I the that
to be
thought thought
for
you
to be.
to be
you.
(14)
(16) (16) (17) (18)
vanquished
came
be.
us.
not
I know Its
you
being
is
no
should doubt of
make its
no
difference.
.
There
being
102
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
273. the
same
Rule
case as
VII. the
noun
noun or
or
pronoun it
pronoun
in
274.
Apposition is the
use
of
substantive
same
necting element^ to
same
limit another
in the
and is
of
" "
the
meaning
see
as,
"
"Brown,
"
the
banker that
;^^ "It
she
pleasant
;
to
the stars
It is evident house."
is insane
In
her
brother
A
Absalom's
noun,
(a)
in
is
predicate
The
although meaning
is the
the
same
as
the
subject,is not
; as,
"
apposition.
a/arwicr."
copulative verb
is the
connecting explains
the
one
element
Harry
(b) (c)
come
The The
one
that
the
noun
usually
of the sun,
may ; as,
follows
explained,
comes."
"
before
Child
case
refulgent summer
a noun
Thomson. it,
us
A In
noun
any
have
'*
the
"
nominative
*'
Hope,
the
under
misfortune In
The
mountain,
Vesuvius^ poured
; as,
*'
forth
torrent
of lava.''
the us,
we
nominative believed it ;
absolute
"
"
Brown,
the
told
John,
you
Qi)
Hamlet
In
"
the
"
objective;
I sat by
as,
"We
saw
Forrest, the
great
tragedian, victory
at
in
Jones,
the
"
(4)
battle
In of
the possesEdve
; as,
Conqueror^
is much
the
Hastings
than is
decided
or
the
fate of
England."
in It
(e) Apposition,
but where
now,
'*
identification
language, belongs,
not
more
hensive compre-
usually supposed.
Where is cool.^^
to substantives
alone,
here
start
now.
phrases,
cool Where
to the
and with
clauses, here.
*'Come **Let
us
are.^^ it
we
are
is identical
it is
while
While
is
in
apposition
with
There
where with
occurred
is in
to
apposition
the convicfs lowest throw
depths of disgrace,
with
no
celV*
cell is in who
is
apposition
has
to
the
depths of disgrace.
the first stone."
"Let Who
perfect, who
is in
faults,
who is
faults
apposition explanatory
"
with
perfect,
etc.
(/)
The
word
a
as
frequently
introduces
an
term;
as,
"Electricity, as
as as a as
motive
force, promises
no
Shakespeare,
some
dramatic
artist, has
an
equal
parse
"
etc.
cases, in
regard
merely
expletive,and
it
seems noun
the
following
to
apposition with
cases as a
the
preceding
; but
preferable
that
consider
in such
follows.
CLASSES
OP
PRONOUNS.
103
(^)
it
The
word
an
and
is
frequently
term
used
'*
without We
conjunctive
in
force and
precedes
explanatory
such it in
cases
; as,
believe
as an
Christ
crucified.'*
term
In
consider with
and the
merely
one
expletive, and
with the
as
following (h)
The
apposition
not
preceding.
in
case one
appositive term
it need the
"
must
always
with **The
agree
that be
it
explains, but
from
agree
it in any
other
property,
how
may
seen
following examples:
Milman's thirst ?
'*
"
Kenite
"
tribe,the
can
descendants you,
a
But
soul,
fled."
as
"
and word
the wife
to me, term
"
**
of is frequently followed
"
by
meaning
The
the
same
preceding
"The
term
; as,
The
month
of
December;
"The
as
city of Boston;
meaning,
cases
month,
December;^''
must
or
"
in such
the A
following of
of the
"
be
parsed
what
case
object.
is often followed receivers
{))
pronoun as,
a
first
"
second But
person is that
by
f
"
the
I, John;
in the
to you,
noun
possessive
is limited
to ; as,
by another
noun
noun
in
with the
it, the
name
possessive sign
the
is put
the
"
immediately
me
of
object possessed
Bring
John
the
5ap"is"'" head."
noun me
be
in
apposition with
act
sentence
or
phrase;
I
not
am
as,
^^
He
promised
"
of
for which
very
ful." thank-
To
abruptly, an
term
could
explain, would
used
man, to
suspicion."
in the
distributive
a
singular is frequently
as,
explain,
unto
are
way,
comprehensive
love
of. in
one
plural ;
another,
with
"Go
ye,
every
as
his
not
city;"
"They
another." and
Such
or
sentences
the
last
One
the
nouns
they limit,are
cannot
times some-
as
apposition
is limited
they.
one
But
this
noun
that
by
that
sentence
case
is limited
by
"
another
one
is in person
objective case,
the other
sentence
meaning
There
the
a
being
Each
person^
in
of
apposition here,
The person of the
but
it is
"
apposition by
the
another
sentence.
sentence,
loves
They
is explained love,'*'*
^'''Each
one
the other
or
"
person,'*'*
are
(n)
In
cases
enumeration,
whole
; as,
parts specification,
The whole army
often
one
put
in
apposition
some
with
fled, some
is
way,
another."
(o)
common
proper noun;
noun
frequently
"
either
explains,
the
or
as, "The
or poet, Milton,^'*
"Milton,
mountain
the
or Vesuvius,^'* or me a
Vesuvius,
resultant Make
factitiveobjective is in
child
apposition
"
direct
appointed
chairman,'*'*
104
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
275.
Point
ovt
the
the
of
in appositives
never life, rear
the
followingsentences:"
star
sets.
to
the
tender the
thought.
act
the child
from
burning building, an
in the
man.
of heroism
recognition.
stood
an
(4)
There A
unsold and
captive
old
not
mart,
gray-haired
is my
majestic
:
(6)
Rome
This
answer
that
I love
Csesar
less,but
that
I love
more.
(6)
old any
friend
one
and should
benefactor.
(7)
his mind.
challenge
his
right had
never
crossed
(8)
I count That
a
this noble
thing
deed
a
to be
grandly true,
step toward
Grod.
is
(9)
True
wit
is like the
precious stone.
mine.
powers
"
Dug
Which To
from boasts
cut
as
Indian
two
as
in one,
well
Smjt,
; !
(10)
Caledonia
nurse
; stem
wild child
Meet
for
poetic
Laud
Land Land Can That
of brown of the of my
heath
shaggy
the mortal
wood
;
flood
hand
Ulial band
thy rugged
strand
"
W,
Scott.
276.
reasons
Justify or
:
"
condemn
the
(1)
(2)
but
to
We The
covenant,
not to
thee
and
Esau, the
he that
hunter, him
in tents. that
that
stayed by
debt the
at home
dwells of
(8)
God.
given
God
to
the
man
God, he
is led
spiritof
be
(4) paid.
He
deems
to be
the
creditor,he
is the who is
to whom
the
should
and
him in
crucified
alpha
and
believe
Christ, he
Him who
is the head of
(7)
277.
noun
Shepherd,
styled King
Rule
VIII.
"
noun
or
pronoun in the
limitinganother
case. possessive
CLASSES
OF
PRONOUNS.
105
278.
Express
manner.
the
relation Use
of
possession
the
to
in
the
most
or a
appropriate
either
possessive sign
phrase
best 279. neceBsary (1)
went
introduced
euphony
and
the
usage. Rewrite
:
"
the
any
change you
no ones
think
abilityever giftsfor
further
good.
a care are
mothers
tenderness
natures
mans
advantages.
Five
yearns interest
wages Moseses
unpaid.
be due.
as
law
as
much
Socrates^s
(6) Marcy's
John's It is not The Beed wife "
Secretary
of
War,
is
a
wife's
sister married
or
burglar.
died " this
business
any
body
else's.
(0)
(10)
Reed "
of the
captain
of the
morning.
Grammar.
Kellogg's
Grammars.
Grammar. Reed's
Kellogg's
Grammars.
Kellogg's
Kellogg's always
(Give
meanings.)
(11) Brown, 280. Rule
Smith and Jones's wife
are seen
together.
IX.
"
noun
or
pronoun
used
independently
and
absolute
case.
Exclamation,
Address, Pleonasm,
also in the nominative
tion, Inscrip-
(6)
but
The
subject of
participleis
Rule III.
absolute
case,
it is
explained
under
(c )
For
absolute Pleonasm
constructions, see
are
Article of
164.
(d) Exclamation,
emotion,
weakens but the This
Address, and
be
all indicative
as
strong
they
rule
"
should
sparingly employed,
but
excessive
use
of them
(c)
"
pronouns, /"
on
"
rarely ;
as,
**
Miserable
they!^'*
Thomson.
Cowper.
or
(/)
books
All
; all
names
inscribed
coins, monuments,
signs ;
headings, superscriptions,and
case
subscriptions,are
is put after tell whether
in
absolute
by inscription,
name
(g)
as, **I
as a
When
the
of Mr.
or
person
addressed
we
the
sentence,
to parse
appeal
to you,
Chairman,^^
in
a
cannot
it In
absolute declinable
by address, language,
apposition
noun as
with
one
the
preceding
above would
pronoun.
as
such
the
likelybe
106
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
in the
as
accusative vocative
in apposition (objective),
with
the
preceding
pronoun,
in the
(nominative absohite).
is used when what
some we
Pleonasm
or
object
wish
to
is of say
more
importance it;
as, "The
to
our
feeling than
was
about
hoy I
where
he
"
(i) The
that^s the In
infinitive
may
be
used
by pleonasm
under
; as, "To
he,
or
not
to
66,
question.*' parsing
to state
nouns
(j)
and
pronouns
the
rule
the
pupil
are
should used
be
required
their
constructions
or
definitely,whether
they
by
exclamation,
address, pleonasm,
inscription,
281.
noun
State
and
He He The
of
every
that that
hath,
is and
not
to
him
shall be be
given.
still. hast created
holy,
let him
holy
thou
North
the
South,
see
them.
beast.
I should Oh The.
I
like to
her
limping back,
of repose.
our woes.
poor
deep
Eden very
enchanted of law
prelude
bliss,the
that
twilight of
the
tear
"
Camphell.
(6)
moulds from
bids law
it trickle
its source.
a
preserves the
the
earth
sphere.
course.
"
guides
planets
in their
Bogers,
(7)
To
be
resigned
when
when
ills betide.
are
favors with
pleased Chloe,
is that
favors
part,
Whose
fragrance XIV.
"
Dr,
Cotton,
282.
Rule
pronoun
agrees
in person^ (a)
use
number^
require
will be
and
the
gender.
utmost to this
It will
diligence
rule, but
or
on
the
part
of
the if he
pupil
to
his pronouns
according
this he what I
am
must
do,
expects
to
speak
what
listened to,
write son,
Cool
As
to
is
thy brow,
bosom
my /
and
my
have spare
tried that
to press
Willis.
Woodman,
Touch In
not
tree.
;
single bough
me.
now.
youth
And
it sheltered
ril
protect it
CLASSES
OF
PEOKOUNS.
10*7
'Twas That
my
forefather's it
near
hand his
cot
placed
woodman,
axe
Then,
let it harm
stand;
it not.
"
Thy J. In (a)
be
a
shall
Morris,
"
Two
singular
he
antecedents
;
as
connected
**
by
he
or,
or a
nor,
must
When
shoots
partridge,
in gender,
pheasant,
pronoun pronoun
it
away/*
its
"
antecedent No
masculine
is to be
as,
boy
the
or
girlcould
of
do
his work
better.'' pronoun
or
(c)
young as, when
"
The child
it is often
an
preferable
sex
"
represent
name
of
sat
animal
whose
;
is not
definitelydistinguished ; sweetly
The it
child
by
its mother
'*
The
sings in
Masculine
the
or
night.''
feminine pronouns
{d )
represent the
names
of inanimate
objects personified.
To him who in the with love of nature holds she
Communion
A various
h"r
visible
forms,
speaks
language. conveying
third person, the idea of
(")
by
as,
a
"
collective
noun
unity
A
a
must
be
represented gender
ing conveywhose
;
in the
singular number,
and
neuter
noun
swept
everything
be
sex
in its way."
collective
the
idea
plurality must by
the
represented by
of the the
plural
pronoun,
gender
A
is determined
noun one
objects denoted.
of
collective
conveys whole
idea
unity when
the idea
it refers
to
the
objects as forming
it refers
to the
; and
it conveys
of plurality when
individuals
of the
group.
284.
reasons
Fill
:
"
the
blanks
with
suitable
pronouns^
giving
with choly melan-
(1) Many
regret.
man
looks
back
on
the
days
of
youth
to
(2)
hearers.
The
orator's
tongue
should
be
agreeable
the
ears
of
(3)
care
If
we
deprive
,
an
animal
of
instinct,
wishes
will
be
unable
to
take
of
(4)
this
If
any
member will
of
the
congregation
forward tasted
to
connect
with
church,
I like the
please come
for
while
as
the brethren
as
sing.
(5)
molasses,
good
honey.
108
The To
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE-
CO) (7)
flourish
earth
is my
a
mother,
and
I will recline
upon will
bosom.
persecute
truly religiousdenomination,
will have
to be to
only
make
government
cabinet cabinet
was
cause
change
wise their
orders.
seemed
was
divided
in
sentiments.
measures.
distinguished for
when
(11) Egypt
afraid of them.
glad
they
took
departure,
shows
for
was
every
flower,and
every
animal
the
wisdom
of
(13) Every
(14)
the class. If any
governor
and
magistrate
does
as
thinks
have
to
best.
to
boy
or
girlbe absent,
is able
to
will
go
the
foot
of
(15)
No
man
or
woman
get
rid
of
vices
without
struggle.
(16) Poverty
and
wealth
have
each
own
temptations.
285. (1)
classes.
a
Keview
Name the
of Pronouns.
three and What of Give What
uses
of
the
pronoun each.
and
the
three is the
corresponding
antecedent and of trate Illususe
(2)
?
Define
(3)
What be ?
pronoun the
(4)
?
antecedent pronouns.
(6)
What
Name
sub-classes
personal
several is
a
(6)
is the
of
use
(7) (8)
each
principles commonly
direct
violated pronoun ?
in the
interrogative
Illustrate. Define does
a a
(9)
kind
An of
interrogativepronoun
may be found?
(10)
(12)
How and
(11)
relative the
In what
or
sentence
conjunctive
relative from
an
pronoun. indirect
(13)
Illustrate.
(14)
Name
are
differ
? interrogative
(16)
tive of rela-
(16)
In what
personals
For what used
relatives of
(17)
each
In of
they
different.
(18)
and
objects
that, be
clauses.
(19) Name,
What of
a
define, and
is
kinds
of
relative the
(20)
use
relative relative
required
pronoun.
tions, construc-
(21) Explain
three
connecting
constructions
(22)
nominative
with
five
objective
of the third of
(a)
Personal
feminine
common
gender.
(6)
pronoun
gender,
Indirect restrictive Relative
(c)
Direct
what,
interrogative
clause, pronoun
(g)
who
Relative in
pronoun
that clause,
(h)
which
Relative in
explanatory
(i)
explanatory
clause.
CLASSES
OF
ADJECTIVES.
109
THE
ADJECTIVE.
We that
have
already found
to
that
some
objectsdiffer
in different
rose^ tree.
so
put them
classes We
same
give
names
; as, man^
observe
different for
us
the
it is often times
we
to
or
and
an a
also
that
many
point out
refer to
either
to
ing nam-
its arises
we
qualitiesor
refer An
to
applying objector
is
a
it.
Hence
another
Adjective, by which
may 287.
so
its
qualities.
,
Adjective
to
word
used
to limit
noun
or name
noun proone
to or point out or refer to an object^ of its qualities; as, ^'this book," ^'four boys," "aw large book," ^^lazyboy," sweet apples."
as
^^ ^^
apple,"
CLASSES 288.
OF
Since
limit adjectives
ways, of
as
illustrated
:
"
above, there
arise two
general
that
tives adjec-
289.
so
A
as
Descriptive Adjective is
to
one
limits
tive substan-
denote
290.
so as
Definitive
to
Adjective is
or
one
that limits
an
merely
point out
"aw
refer to
objectwithout
qiuzlity; as,
ox," "woman,"
"fiftygnns^'' "those
SUB-CIiASSES
OF
ADJECTIVBS.
291.
or Descriptive
:
"
qualifyingadjectiveshave
the
three
sub-classes
110
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
292.
(1) Common,
from
a
any
not
rived de-
proper
name;
"^oorf fruit,"
men,"
"amiable
'''sweet
oranges,"
293.
''cold
water,"
"honorable
position, dis-
"virtt^ow*
"Arabian
proper
"
name
; as,
G-recian
armies,"
from
Turkish
potism." des-
294.
derived
"
verb;
as,
"
hearts,"
"deadened spots,""defended rights," sensibility." have the or merely limiting adjectives' Definitive sub-classes:
"
(1) Articles,A
The is called
or
An
and
The.
(a)
the
article,and definite
and
"an
or
An
the
article. indefinite
(6)
as, "a
is used
"a
before
consonants,
"an
An ox."
before
vowels
man,"
cow,"
ape,"
297.
;
were
(2) Pronominals,
as,
"
those
that
;
may
be
were
used
not
tively substan;
Some
were
invited
others
but
all
welcome." (a)
(6)
It is better The in most and
cases some
to
supply
others
the limited
are
noun
in
parsing.
pronominal
following
usually
called
adjectives: 7%w,
that^ these, those; each, every, either, neither; much, some',all, such, own, any, none, one, both, other, another; certain, little; divers, else ; former,
last. latter,first,
are
(c)
Pronominals
divided
into
four
classes
"
what.
(3) Nnmerals,
as,
those
(a) Definite;
definite numerals
those
further orders
divided in
a
into:'
"
(1) Ordinals,
denoting
series;
REMARKS
ON
DEFINITE
ADJBCTIVBS.
Ill
(2) Cardinals,
two,
ten.
those
that
state
merely
tell how
the
number
of
objects;
as,
that
many
fold;
as,
twofold,
BEHABKS 299.
ON
DEFIITITIVE
I. ARTICLES. classed
ADJE0TI7E8.
(a)
they
as
Articles
so
are
sometimes
as
differ
little from
definitive
parsed
in
a
such.
(6)
few
either
singular
without
or
nouns
or
An, except
cases,
(c)
whole
we
The
an
we
wish
to
refer
to
class ; as,
to refer
as an a
Man
is mortal/'
any
one
indefinite
a
article is used
^^
when
so
wish
to indefinitely
of
man we
is not
strong
ox.**
a
And
the
definite
or more
article than
when
^*
of dishes.**
part of
one class,
; as,
300.
n.
PRONOMINALS.
(1)
DEMONSTRATIVES.
(a)
than hand
some
This
points
than better
out
an
object that
to ; as,
is
**
near
in time book
"
or
**
place, or
This This pen age
nearer
other
object
referred
This
;
" "
(in
my
is better
was
that than
out
(on
that
an
the
table
before
me)
(Homer's)."
in time
out
or
(6)
as
ITiat
points
object distant
to and
place, or
In many
not
another
object referred
and
pointed
and that
by
their
this.
nouns
languages
ber, num-
all the
adjectives are
case
inflected
; but
to agree
with
are
in person,
gender,
that
are
this
the
and inflected,
these
only
to
to denote
number.
this and
that,
out
more
These be used
one
should
be
used
were
point
one
than should
one
object when
used
to
this
out
if there
but that
; those
be
point
one.
than
object when
them. and latter
would the
use
be used
if there and
were
but
so
Let may
the
never
pupil thoroughly
misuse Former of two Both
understand
of these
those
that
he
(d)
second
are
used
to
denote
respectively
**
the
(6)
lift the
to
two
objects,either collectively,as,
**
Both
can
log,"
individually, as,
Both
boys
came."
112
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(/) Same
(g)
"Ton Yon
or
denotes
the may
object ;
any
as,
**
He
is the that
same
man."
; as,
yonder
"
distant
object
is in view
house,"
Fonder
(2)
DISTBIBUTITES.
(a)
of two other
Each
with
other the
applies to
other." than
two
one
and
objects ;
is for the
helped
Each
; as,
*^
individuallyApplicable to right."
denotes all of
a
more
Each
boldly
believed
(h) Every
her." Either
class
taken
individually ;
other of two
as,
^^
Every
man
(c)
will
is
applicable to
one
or
the
; as,
*"
Either
book
satisfyme."
Neither
means
(d)
neither
not
either;
as,
*^
The
man
and
spoke."
(3)
INDEFINITES.
(a)
to be
All
includes either
can
the
whole
class,and
**
may
denote as,
^^
the
men
taken
collectivelyor
individually ;
men are
together) they
must
lift the
log ;
"
All
mortal,"
of
is,individually portion
t?ie of
die. is
applicable
**
to
or
one
or
more
**
class,or
this
to
; as,
Any
or
man
men,"
not
**
Any
same
coffee."
as or
Another
other
means
the
not
same
as
man,"
one
OiAer
some
men."
or
of
class;
as,
**
certain
woman," colors,"
^^
Certain
women."
means
' '
* '
(e)
* *
Diocrs
different,various,
Divers
a
or
numerous;
as,
**
Divers
Divers
kinds,
places.
' '
(/) Enough
bread."
denotes
^^
Enough
men,"
chosen."
Enough
Few
denotes denotes
small
a
as,
Few
*'
were
Little
small
portion;
as,
little
sleep,"
^^
Little
**Zi"^e
sense."
a
(i) Many
Much No
denotes denotes
means
large number;
as,
^^
Many
^^
crimes."
large in quantity;
any, either
as,
Much
improvement."
; as,
"
not
of number
or
quantity
of
or
No
man,"
silver."
None
means
(I)
not
no
one one
or
not
any.
more
When than
or no
one
a a
number
is referred
a
**
to, it is better
use
to say
**
; when
are
one,
one
part of
quantity,
None
none;
as,
None
(of men)
here,
is
here,"
(oi
bread)
is left."
REMARKS
ON
DEFINITE
ADJECTIVES.
113
(m)
help
The
one
One
is
generally
**
used
in
connection parse
with such
a
another;
sentence
as
as,
"They
another.''*
It is dltficult to
one
it stands.
meaning (n)
Own
is,
Every
to
person
helps
another
more
person." emphatically;
than
two
is used
express
possession
as,
"My
ow/iland."
(o) Several
times."
denotes
any
small
number
more
; as,
"
Several
(i?) Some
"
denotes
number
or
"
Some
books,"
Some
wheat."
means
(q) Sundry
various;
sundry
times."
ni.
NUMERALS.
the
cardinal
adjective
answers
question,
How
many
f as, one^
adjective answers
be known
the
question,
; as,
Which
one
in the series?
may But
usually
an
by
in
its form
adjective is ordinal,regardless of
of
an
the the
position
tenth
object
series;
as,
"Read
ten,"
"Read
page."
the indefinite
(c)
See
numerals, they
are
many,
under
the
indefinite
pronominals, Classes of
where
commonly
classed.
302.
Adjectives with
of
Keference
to
the
Manner
of Modification. and into descriptive adjectives definitive the adjective is based itself, the idea it upon The same adjectivedoes not belong to both expresses. and yonder^ a defini' classes. Thus, strong is a descriptive, tive^ adjective. But the basis 304. on according to another classification, 303.
"
The
classification
of the
to
manner
one
same
belong
any 305.
It may
a
modify
same
substantive
It is then
caUed verb
a
direct
at
adjective. It may
time
copulative
and
the
predicate adjective. It
a
such
way
as
to express
modify its subject. It is then modify the direct object in may is the result of the a qualitythat
a
verb's action.
Then
it is
resultant
adjective.
114
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
306.
Direct
as,
Adjective i%
one
that "A
a modifiei
substantive
directly ;
(a) 307. and
"
"A
in any
beautifulchild,"
construction
may be
strong arm."
by
a
noun
modified
direct
adjective.
Predicate
Adjective is
^^
one
that
"The
beautiful^'^
His (a)
and
arm
Bear
that
the may
ject subsay
completes
predicate.
strong man,"
a
we
strong
is a^
predicate adjective.
308.
Adjective is
as
that
a
modifiesthe
result
direct
object in such
action
;
to
express the
^^
of
the verVs
"
as,
"
Fresh
air made
arm
child
made
the
man's
are an
strong.
often active
called verb
factitiveadjectives.
can
Since
only
take
direct
object,possive reference to
verbs
followed by
Since
a
resultant
adjectives,
a noun
(c) (d)
'*
resultant called
a an
adjective modifies
adverbial
with
verb,
it is sometimes
When
adjective.
a
verb
followed
by
"
resultant
adjective is changed
a
to
the
passive voice,
He
the
resultant
adjective becomes
painted Use
the
ceilingwas
painted
blue,^^
old, cold, long, followingadjectives: infirm,reckless, rich, rare, right, strong, mighty,faithless^
309. each
weak, strong,
"
(1)
Predicate, (3) As
Besultant,
COMPARISON
OF
ADJECTIVBS.
Most
are
in different still
more
degrees.
beautiful;
others, wiser
and
others, wisest.
the of
landscapes
beautiful; others,
This difference
others, most
beautiful.
in
degree
REMARKS
ON
DEFINITE
ADJECTIVES.
115
in
the
form
of
the
Comparison
is
variation
in the
form of
the
adjective
to express
degrees of quality different est; ; as, Ibng^longer^longmost more good^ better^ best; profitable^ profitable^ profitable.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
312. of the
313.
There
are
three
degrees formed
by
the
comparison
adjective.
The Positive is the
used simpleform of the adjective^ when an object is not compared with any other; as, Cold days, good deeds, practicallessons. 314. expresses when
two
more
The
a
Comparative
is the
form
of
the the
adjective that
higher or
objects are
lower
degree
than
as,
compared;
;
deeds,
practicallessons
or,
less
of
the
adjective that
any number
lowest
two
are
degree^used
when
as.
of objects more
best
than
compared;
or,
Coldest
deeds,
least cold
KINDS
OF
COMPARISON.
316.
There
are
two
kinds
most
of
comparison. Ascending
;
; ;
as, as,
valuable^ more
valuable^
valuable
and
Descending
METHODS
OF
COMPARISON.
317.
There
are
three
methods
of
comparison
"
(1) By different terminations ; as, loud, louder, loudest. (2) By different words ; as, bad, worse, worst. less, least; as, beautiful^ (3) By prefixes;more, most;
116
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
more
beautifulor
less
most beautiful^
beautifulor
are
compared
by changing
like is
the
termination
of the
; sweety
sweeter^ sweetest.
compared
consonant
monosyllables
to
as,
happy^
Jiappier, happiest,
er or
changed
words added
i, before
suffixing
(c)
could
than
two
of two
to the
not
easily be pronounced
by prefixing to the
or
est
or
compared
and
most more, most
positive more
as, less
less for
the
least
;
for
the
superlative ;
should
not
practicable, more
least
practicable
most,
doubtful,
least
doubtful,
be
doubtful.
from
parsing,
less and
separated
method
following
less
word.
(d) Descending
and least.
comparison
has
but
one
"
by prizing
(e)
form
In
poetry
monosyllables
a
are
^^
often
compared by
by prefixes;
words
as, "A
more
fair,
face
more
sweet.
(/)
The
compared
different
"
Positive.
Superlative.
Best. Worst. Most.
many.
Little,
lesser.
Least.
BEMABKS
OK
DEFINITE
ADJECTIVES.
117
exist
ordinarily admit Extreme, Fall, False, Filial, Fluid, Free, Godly, Golden,
of
These
include
Almighty, Certain, Chief, Circular, Conscious, Continual, Dead, Earthly, Empty, Everlasting, External, (1)
uncommon
Serene, Solid,
Sound,
Bight, Boyal,
Universal,
Void. it is not very
most most
While
the
to
find
such
rhetorical
fuller^ rounder^
nearer
certain,
most
extreme,
etc.
etc., meaning,
full,
them
round,
nearly certain,
(2)
or
In
parsing
be
such
words,
are
do
not
compare
unless
the
tive compara-
superlative forms
It will observed
(j)
and of
kinds
of
in
for every
cautious,
be
most
as
These
two
or
three, if the
as one
"
two
regarded
can
one,
superlatives
number of
are
the
that
be
by combining
it with
words,
the
degrees expressed
little
we
creased indefinitelyin-
; as, somewhat
cautious, a
exhaust of
a
cautious,
and
wncautious. left
a
And
after
all
combinations
cannot
there be
are
great many
as
degrees
have
quality that
great many
expressed, just
termination the
objects
not qualities
expressed (k)
what The
at all
by adjectives.
ish is sometimes
given
lower
to
some
forming adjectives,
the
is called
diminutive
degree,
than
positive and
yet
118
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
different
from
the
lower
comparative
or
the lower
bluish^greenish, 318. 1. 2. 3. 1.
Comparison. Degree.
6. 7.
Construction.
Rule.
Sub-class.
That old
man
was
sick. demon.,
and limits
"
man, pos.
R.
X. and limits
adj., des.,
X.
com.,
"
degree,
R.
com.,
"
sick,sicker,sickest,
"
pos.
degree,
and
(a)
may
have
the
oral
parsing
of
nouns
and
pronouns
given according
abridged
model.
319.
A.
SELECTIONS.
(1) (2)
silent weary
moon
ascends seeks
traveller
quiet
the and
7*est.
(3)
(4) (6) (6)
the
back
rumbling thunder.
broken cool. fires have almost
vows
unkept promises
breezes blow
there
are
annual,
autumnal,
destroyed
well-timbered
country.
are was as a
(7)
(8) (9)
valuable
as
Virgil.
little stream. sound
to the
sweetest
fringed
stood
trees
a
the
(10)
(11) (12)
B.
the grassy
are
tall
waving ash,
row.
very top.
There Who A
two
in the second
(1)
dangerous
not
thing ! spring.
breast. and and
Drink
deep,
or
taste
the
Pierian human
eternal
in the
thought
cold, gold.
(4)
The The
cold.
minstrel brilliant
a
infirm and
old. the
(5)
How Like
and
mirthful
out
light of
her
eye,
star
glancing
from
the blue
of the
sky
REMARKS
ON
DEFINITE
ADJECTIVES.
119
(6)
(7) (8) (10)
est fables
brighter suns
milder and
moons
dispense
serener
light, night.
imparadise
have steak I
none,
the
gold
the
cooked
rare.
the
fence
part,
wUd'
legends hopeful
win
incredible. And
(11)
mind
faithful heart
the better part.
Shall
and
keep
(12)
The Roae
sun
that
Brief
over
December
day
at
cheerless
hills of gray^
noon moon.
"
And,
A
sadder
Whittier,
320.
la. Kinds.
Outline of Adjectives.
1".
Descriptive
or
Qualifying
Good,
rushing.
IC. Common 2c. Proper: 3c. 26.
:
sour,
black. Svriss.
Australian,
Verbal
Participialor
or
JRunning, broken,
educated. An
ox.
Definitive
merely
Limiting adjectives:
Each
apple.
Six dollars.
Ic. Article. Id. 2d. Definite: Indefinite, The.
JTiat bam.
A, before An,
before
consonant.
a
vowel.
Id. 2d.
*, as.
Several, few,
many.
One, twenty,
one
hundred.
one
First, twentieth,
hundredth.
every,
either, neither.
Interrogative :
make?
reply
did
he
2ai
Property
Kinds.
or
Comparison
of
variation
in
form
to
express
different
degrees
lb.
quality.
120
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE,
Ascending. Descending.
That
Degrees.
:
Ic. Positive
expressed by
A
the
simple
form
of the
adjective; positive;
as,
Comparative
higher
or
lower
degree
than
more
the
as,
smaller,
less small;
Superlative :
least
The
highest
or
lowest
degree
; most
of
as,
good;
8".
Methods.
By By
different different
terminations words
more, ; as, most
; as,
By prefixes:
less honest
less,least
or
as, honest,
more
honest
or
; most
honest
least honest.
OP
ADJE0TIVE8.
Adjectiveslimit substantives.
All under liabilities to the
error
in the
:
use
of adjectives may
he
followingheads
Care
Choice, Number,
son, Compari-
should
he
taken
to
select
the
adjective
intended, (a) (b) alike; (c)
See
appropriatelyexpresses
book
for the
the
meaning
Dictionary
not
and
on
synonyms
adjectives,awfuly
both with
Good
for both
well;
alike.
an
"
less for
fewer;
or
same
or
the same,
an
use
adjective for
bad weather
;
adverb,
**
or
an so
adverb
for
an
tive adjec-
; as,
Extreme
She
looks
sweetly.'^'*
2. Number.
Never Do
not
use use
them these
for
or
tha^ before
such
nouns
etc.
(c)
After
not j six
numerals,
take the
the
words
thousand,
etc., need
plural form
dancers
;
four pair
head
of of
peaches
couple of
four
hundred
REMARKS
ON
DEFINITE
ADJECTIVES.
121
used
326.
when
.
3.
Comparison.
two
are
"
"
The
are
degree is comparative
;
only
there
two
"
objects
more
compared
two;
as,
the
superlative^
taller of sister
"
"
when the
"
than is
more
"He than
is the her
"
;
was
She the
beautiful
of the
Socrates
wisest
Athenians
She
is
the
loveliest of Rules.
"
women." I. The
326.
the
degree superlOitive
is
one
is used
when it is
objectto
which "Eve
it relates
was
compared;
327.
to which
as,
the
fairest of
II.
The
comparativedegree
included Eve
be
is used
object
it is
it relates is not
; as,
"
compared
(a)
woman; or,
was/airer
correct to
daughters."
fairer
the she
was
It would Eve
not
was
say, her
not
either, Eve
than first
any
pression ex-
of
was
daughters;
a
because
or
implies,either,that
than herself In
a
woman, she
was
that
fairer
; and
the of
second
one
of her
daughters.
it is is **She
(")
series
coordinate
to
more
generally
younger,
more
elegant
first;as,
sister.'^
beautiful,than comparatives
and
her
(c)
wiser,
(1)
Double
etc.
superlatives;
as,
more
unkindest,
and
(2) Comparative
extremest,
superlative forms
more
of
incomparable adjectives;
etc.
comes
as,
328.
4.
Position.
"
just
nouns.
beforethe
(1)
wind When
was
word
used
it limits^but
to
their
was
complete
the
The
way
long, the
infinitive
to be
cold.''^ the
*'
(2) phrase
eaten.''
^
When
; as,
adjective mother,
vain
is modified
prepositional or gold
"
His
of her
rank
"
Apples good
else
(3) (4)
stick
When When
the the
adjective modifies
pronoun
or
; as,
*'
Who
'*
came
"
adjective is resultant,
**
factitive ;
as,
They
made
the
straight,"
In poetry ; as, There but When is
are
(6) (a)
nouns,
He
thought
other
of his in
proud sister,
which
and
several
are noun
cases
adjectives
and
these the
a
the
principal ones. by
both
an
(p)
is limited
as
ordinal
come
cardinal
tive, adjec-
there
question
to which
should
first. Here
authorities
122
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
have
insist
not
agreed.
a
Shall
we
say,
the
we
upon
to
language,
be
we
are
pelled com-
choose
absurdities.
were we
It would second
absurd
to
speak
to
there
also have
three, and
to
to
it is absurd different
speak
but
at
of the
three
reference have
three
series.
Ordinarily, I think, a
present
either is the
critic would
seems
allow
either first.
expression,
But
times some-
best
to
put
the
ordinal
to the
we
preferable to
two
other
according
of
meaning
wish
to
intended refer
one
thus, if there
are
single columns
say
we
boys,
;
to the
leaders, we
column of the first two
should
the wish
two to
first boys
refer
to
if there
is
we
double say
boys,
and
the
couple,
should
boys.
nouns are
understood
; as,
**
Many
modified
sons] [perby
will
called,but
few
or
[persons]
infinitive
as.
chos,en."
or a
(d)
a
participial
certain.
as,
phrase,
the the
clause, may
is
be
predicate adjective;
is not
To
see
stars
delightful.
an
That
he
come
Sometimes
to
entire has
sentence not
come
attributively ;
hack any An
more,
Contrary
what
occurs,
he
(e)
must
one
adjective
be
sometimes
as an
seems or
modify
two must
wore as a
another be
adjective.
dress.
some as
It
as
then
parsed
adverb,
is red
the
parsed together by
iron
hot.
She
a
deep blue
modifies
noun no
modified
other
word
cheap goods.
Here,
modifies
goods
modified
by cheap. (g)
The
adjectives,like, nigh,
It is better, in such the
us.
near,
cases,
and
to
next
are
frequently
words is not words like
followed
by objectives. governing
lives
near
call
these
prepositions
me.
following
Some
nouns
or
pronouns
; as. She to
He
grammarians
the
prefer
adjectivesor
and
supply
preposition
to to govern
following objective.
Review
Show
of
we
Adjectives.
have of
why
general
classes
Define
Name and of
Name
illustrate the
sub-classes reference
of each
to
(5)
?
the
classes Define
adjectiveswith
illustrate ? may the each.
the is
of modification
(6)
how
and
(7)
What
comparison
be How do Name
we
(8) Why
? of the these
pared adjectivescom-
(9)
a
What
adjectives can
exist ?
compared
many
use
(10)
In
are
many
grees de-
quality
(11)
When
expressed by
the of
parative, comparison. com-
adjective itself ?
the
(12)
positivedegree,
two
superlative?
Three of
error
(13)
of
use
and
illustrate
kinds and
(14)
the chief forms
methods in the
comparison.
of the
(15)
Name
illustrate
adjective.
THE
VERB.
123
THE
VERB.
330*
1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 6.
snow
falls.
heat their have
boys
our
drums.
been
giftof
child
finished. prophecy ?
a
wish
the
to become
scholar.
lady speaking to
sentences
you
is Lolita.
In
these between
the and
are
italicized
words
express
substances have
Falls^ heat^
assert
or
been
affirmthe
it. All
to become
are
and
speakingcan
only assume
such
words
verbs.
332.
or assume
The
Verb
is the
as:
"
to
assert
relation;
plows;
wanted is Henry
ours.
Henry
Troy
; The
was;
to
The
house We
want
stands; They
the be house
to
want
Henry
The
to
plow;
plowing
on
They
Troy
be;
stand;
house
boy
time
being
will
soon
past ; The
standing
the hill is
In
the
first three
sentences state.
the
verbs
assert, but
in
the
last six
assume,
Here
be
taken
in
very
wide
sense,
so
as
to
interrogation and
The word
(c)
to this
verb, from
verbum,
it is the other
meaning
most
word, is applied
We
can
important.
"
say it
a
of the verb
sentence
be said of
no
part of speech
that without
cannot
exist, of
(d)
assert
Other
parts
speech
"
"
prepositions,
can
conjunctions,
;
conjunctive
the verb
can
adverbs, and
or assume
express
relation
only
(e) phrase;
The
as:
verb
"
always
single word,
but
is sometimes
verb
124
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
The The
fact
might
have
been
property has
of every
been
taken
(/)
The
predicate
sentence
can
must
verb
or
contain
one^
predicate.
OLASSinOATION
OF
VEBBS.
333. 334.
Verbs
are
bases.
"
Subjects.
By
study,
He
studies, They
study,
we
see
that
the
form
of
of
the
verbs
is modified
by
the
person
and
number
their The
finite verbs.
fore subjects. They are thereverbs have statement, finite that their form of is often jects. sub-
number^
means
only
and
determined
by
the
person
number
their
335.
She
to
But
wants
in the
me
following sentences.
She
wants
to
plow,
him
to
plow,
She
She
wants
them
plow;
She
saw me
plowing, that
She
saw
him
plowing.
saw
them
it will be the
same,
seen
the
form of the
verbs
regardless
and
number
have is
never
number^
that number
their
form
modified
by
the
and A
of their Verb is
subjects.
whose
Finite and
one
form
may
be
modifiedby
number
of its svijecU
is
one
whose
form
is
never
modified
by
the person
of its subject.
THE
VERB.
125
in
(a) Owing
even our
to the
slightinflection
for person and
found number
English, the
is,except
tense,
modification
case
:
"
of
finite verbs
in the llius
of the
verb
to
"e, confined
exclusively to
I torite, He I wrote. I am. I was. He He He
the
present
writes, They
wrote.
write
wrote,
is,
was.
are;
were.
(")
The
two
forms
of the
the
in-finite verb
illustrated above
are
tively respec-
the
participle,
has four infinitives and four
as participles;
:
"
(c) Every
to
verb
write,
to have
written,
to he
written^
to have
been been
written written.
writing,
Intransitive
having written,
have
being written,
infinitives class and
having
two
verbs
only
two
participles.
and
(d)
nouns
Some and
grammarians
adjectives,but
them
more as
of
a
note
infinitives
participleswith
of ship scholaruse
very
pronounced
the
preponderance
and any 626 that other in
regards
resemble verbs
forms closely
the
of
than
verb;
do
their of
they
is
they
part
speech
abundantly (e)
deferred
The
shown
in
discussion, Articles
of has
to 672.
thorough
the
discussion
infinitives and
his
participlesshould
of all the
be
till after
pupil
completed
study
parts of
speech. 338.
"
(2) According
sentences
the
to their
as
" ^
Action's
Relation
to
Objects.
In all such
The The
boy plows
field
was
field,
the
The
man ox was
bought
an
ox
plowed by that
boy, action
The
bought by
the
man
it will
be
seen
the
expressed by
an
each
verb
is
from
agent
to
an
object.
means
Such
to go
verbs
across.
are
said to be
because transitive,
transitive
339.
But
in such
The dew
sentences
as,
She walks
gracefully, of
an
while
not
each
verb
as
action
to
an
agent, it does
verbs
represent it
going
object. Such
126
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
are
said
across.
to be
because intransitive,
intransitive
means
not
to
go
340.
an
A
as
Transitive
Verb
is
one an
that
agent
341.
terminating upon
Intransitive Verb
as an
object.
one
An
is
not
represent
of
1b
agent
terminating upon
to
object.
verb does
as one
It
inexcusably
an
loose
define verb
a as
transitive
one
that
an
object, and
intransitive
cent
that verbs
not
take
of the
transitive voice
never
take
objects ;
verb
is, every
verb do
an
transitive
verb
no
in the verb
active
has
its
corresponding
an
in the passive We
voice
see
object, and
verbs
is transitive.
not
objects are
its action action intransitive Not
transitive. does.
transitive
always
be
object, but
Bven
an an
(")
that verb
a
terminates
; as,
*'
an
object
the action that
may
expressed by
sat
on a on
He
against
post," '*I
nates termi-
box.''
an
only
must
transitive the
express of
"
object ; of
He The
it must,
on
without
an
preposition, represent
the termination
the action
object;
splitthe post,
post
was
the
was
box. broken,
split,
transitive
are
(c)
used But he and
so
Verbs
as
commonly refer to
all
no
often as,
**
intransitive.
(1)
When
to not
definite object;
are
Henry
say she
studies, Mary
that if
must
7'eads.''^
here
must
grammarians
agreed.
if
Some reads
study something,
the verbs But the the
are
and
Mary
read there
that
therefore of
transitive,although
any in
object
mined deterit is to
expressed. by found,
agents They
and
parsing
part of
the
speech
used any
must
always
to
be
office it above
performs
sentences
particular sentence
are so as
in which refer of
in the
the verbs
to
our
the
only,
are
without
suggesting
intransitive.
to be
thought
need
not
objects.
be I saw," is
But
object
in
**
always
man
expressed
saw
transitive. but it is
He
is the its
has
no
object expressed,
In the
because transitive,
object, that,
does
; but
are
clearly implied.
both verbs
"
sentence,
''Dora
studies, but
to
Laura
not,"
in
are
agents
only
the both
over
sentence,
Dora
algebra, but
represents
the
does
transitive, because
to
of the the
tunes
"^"^
passing
is
the
definite
object, algebra.
as,
"
(2)
is
active
form
"
used
in
passive signification ;
is
The
instrument
easily ;
this sentence
equivalent
to
*'
The
instrument
easily tuned,
THE
VERB.
127
(d)
Verba
usually,
**
intxanaitive in
a
are
often
(1) When
dreamed It of
they have
a
objects similar
She sang the
as
to signification
**
themselves;
lived
a
dream."
to
as
song.'*
*'
That
man
righteous life."
to
seems
be the
almost above
universal
custom
among verbs
grammarians
that govern
speak
such such be
being
intransitive
a
objects," but
should action the
contradiction
of terms, and
is transitive
if it represents about
to
of the agent
terminating
It will
upon
never
object, no
found will be
matter
the
of
confusion.
the
object.
any When
be do
a so
necessary
depart
of "Paul used
in
and definition,
attempt
used marched love
to
productive
sense;
as
nothing
trots
a
(2)
"
in
causative
pony."
sense;
The
**
general
looked
his armies."
to
(3)
She
can
When look
;
an
poetic
as,
A
Eyes
eyes."
"
daggers."
intransitive verb
(e)
expresses
transitive
verb
expresses
state.
action
only
action, being, or
Sometimes
an
(J)
intransitive with
verb
a
in the
passive
"
form The
is made house
was
transitive
by being compounded
"
preposition, as,
"
We
were
laughed ai."
in in the (0."
never
The
property
had
been
taken
{g)
adverb
It may
as
be
allowable
few
cases
to
:
regard
*'
preposition or
never
an
active "He be
form tried
We
should
put off
is
duty."
stove."
this
should
done
not
equivalent to
of
singleword, marring
sentences
and the
could
be
separated
into different
parts
speech (h)
In
without such
meaning.
"
She
He
slept
himself
weary,"
be
seems
"They given
themselves italicized
to
very the
satisfactory
intransitive
dispositioncan
verb the
; but
following
words
as
it
preferable
parse
the
subject of
infinitive to be understood.
342. The
two
(3) According to
sentences,
He
their
Completeness of Predication.
"
steals, and
same
He
is
thief,
may
convey
meaning.
and
But
it will be
that
steals,which
in the
expresses is does
not
the
bute attri-
while
complete
that is of
pressed ex-
the
predicate,but by another
only
asserts
the
attribute
is
a
verb
com'
128
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
EKQLISH
SBNTBNGE.
and pletepredication^
because
it contains verb it
;
the
a
attribute verb of
it
asserts, it is called
an
attributive because
is is
complete in-
and predication^
an
only couples to
another
attribute
a
that
is
expressed by
is
word, it is
the attribute
called
343.
verb. copulative An
or
Attributive
assumes.
Verb
one
that expresses
Copulative Verb
is
one
or
assumes
an
expressed by
Uteral
some
other
of the
words.
is to
meaning
few
word
copula
couple
or
fasten
than
There
are
grammatical
and verbs
distinctions verbs.
.
more
perplexing
be mastered. of what what with
between AU
attributive active
copulative
are
It must
sense
(c)
in
one
predication.
an a
They
copulative
verbs
in
active
transitive
is
is
an
copulative verb
attributive
Distinguish
saw a a,
George
Bob The
is
a
was
a,
farmer,
George
Bob has verb
farmer;
horse. substantive pronoun,
good horse,
of
a
good
is
(d)
an
complement
some
copulative
so
always
be Let
a
oi
adjective, or
expression always
used,
or a
It may
noun,
clause.
(e)
the
two
The
are
predicate
includes
or
copula
;
a as
and
:
"
an
expressed together
Paul
separately
and do
preaches, grammarians
that
Paul
not
is
preacher.
the
or
Some
the
regard
a
copula
contains
as
part of
since it
verb
one,
of speech
verbs
predicate.
voice
was
(/)
"
Many
was
passive
*'
may
as
copulas
; as,
She
considered
elected
to
be
is the
only
to
copula,
assumes
it is often
an
it asserts
bute, attri-
attributive
merely
the
exist.
In
Whatever In
was,
is,
two
right,the
second
copulative.
:
the
following
no more.
sentences
verbs
no a
are
(1) Troy
not
but
is
(2)
How
What
to
more,
is, will
"
be.
{h)
and
distinguish
Copulative
Verb.
to
It is often
difficult,
sometimes
impossible, in
isolated
sentences,
THE
VERB.
129
predicate pitcher
^^That
voice
from
the
copulative verb
in such
^^
to
be
v^ith
as
* *
adjectiveor participle,
was
Fq^ example,
house
was we are
sentences,
The
hroken,^^
was
The
covered,^^
unable
The
field was
the
plowed,^^ meaning,
Each may
room
papered^^*
be
etc.,
to determine
and
mean
therefore
one or
cannot
tive posi-
concerning things,which
Thus,
was
their
disposition.
be made
the
other
of two
would
evident may
or
by
the connection
to
a
in which in
it is used. which
case
The
field was
is
a
plowed
is
refer it may
particular act,
assert
a
plowed
Every
passive verb,
was
simply
the
condition
of the
in field,
which
case
copulative, and
may of be the above may f
plowed
as
predicate adjective.
answer we
declarative
we can answer. was
sentence
regarded
be
the
to a must
question,
know the
to the
and
before
dispose
done the
sentences
Thus, they
by the
f
the
respective answers
voas
What done
was some
cat
What
was
done
with
the f
boards? If so,
with
plow
was
What
done
was
with
the paper
are some answer
broken,
covered,
act
plowed, place
sentences
and in
papered time, in
passive verbs,
manner, the
to
referring to by
the tfiot the
some
:
that
took
some
actor.
if the
not
are
intended
to
Why
f
did
Why
the
did he
prefer
Why
sleep in
she like
house
room
Why
he in
walk
was
through
is
a
field f
did
best f
then,
each,
subject
verb that broken is is
condition
expressed by
a
the
adjective
we
follows. that
If the
act
was
modified referred
by
phrase denoting
not
manner,
it is the
to, and
s
the condition.
was
Thus,
is
in
77^
a
child^s heart
by
A
its mother^
death,^^
without
broken
evidently
phrase
may
its construction
phrase expressing
been is of many
modify
and
copula
been
by
a s
predicateadjective. In
death,^* has
child's heart
has
clearly a copula,
Copulas.
other
"
broken pure
as
b,
predicate adjective,
is
some
(i)
verb
to
ClaaaeB
The
are
only
used
no seems
copula
impure
use
form In the
of the
be, but
is is
verbs
copulas.
to assert
She
is
happy,
purely copulative,having
In the
are
other
than
bute attri-
happy.
etc., the verbs
sentences,
"Ife
appear "J?e
use.
well,^'*
came
almost
seems
purely copulative,but
to be
we
hurrying,
between
^^
hurrying
two
almost
And
these
extremes
have
predication
apple
tastes
by copulas;
sweet,"
**
as,
^^They
look
tired,'' ^^He
"
^^The
attended,"
is
She
walks
queen,"
and
etc.
In each
of these in
struction. con-
examples
she has
complement
the last
partly adverbial
is shows her of
to be a
a
In
a
partly
and
that
walk
queen,
an
(j)
impure
**
double such
combination
**
pure be
copula
appear
in be
expressions
as,
She
seems
to
happy,"
They
good,"
130
(k)
that
man
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Uses
oi
the
To
Be.
"
It may
uses
"
be
as as
well
an a
to
note
in
passing
*^
the verb
was
to be has
distinct
;
one
auxiliary ;
as,
The
playing
or
with
children
are a
and
two
principal verb,
be determined may take its
either
attributive
copulative, which
of of home''^
are
explained
may word
(I) Thus,
many
The
phrase
the is the adverbial as, house verb
to
by
termining de-
single
same
place.
But
^'"He times
as
is without
as
is homeless.''^
are
phrases
that
in
construction
incorrectly
In this
tence sen-
regarded
such the be
means
predicate adjectives ;
attributive,and
in the the
as
*^IIe is be
is in the house.''''
an
is is
adverbial
element. that
cannot
ever Whenexist
in
phrases foUowmg
are
expi'essattributes
this
agents, they
determined
**
used
the
predicate adjectives,but
of the sentences. Is is copulative, and the
same
always
'*
from
form
Thus,
''''He is in health
Health
sentence
is in him.^"* of
is in
is the attribute.
^*
But
mean
the
''^
exactly
him.^^ verb
;
"
form,
be
"
=
^^
He
Texas,
does
not
Texas An
adverbial.
a
(m)
the
attributive
often
expanded
*'
copula
;
"
and
**
an
attributive
owns
**
complement
farm
"
=
giggles
She
;
"
giggler
your
He
=
"
He of
("the thy
of the farm
Pay
debts
"
Be
thou
the payer
debts."
345.
(4) According
verb that
are are
to
their
Form.
"
Certain
forms
or
parts of the
from these
called
Principal Parts,
parts
are
because
it is
other
:
"
obtained.
The
principal parts
346.
or
Present
Indicative found
the in
the
form
always
see^
plow^ am.
Past
347.
Indicative
the
form
as,
word
used
to represent
past time
348. Perfect time
indefinitely ;
Participle: the
other the
plowed^ was.
the Past verb that
presses ex-
form
of the
more
than definitely
Indicative, by
or
relating it
349. The
to
some
time, either
; as seen^
past, present,
ture, fu-
implied by
sentence
plowed^ been.
that some verbs forn;i examples show and perfect their past indicative participle by changing the ending of the present indicative to ed; as, plow^ plowed^ moved, moved; plowed; move, plant, planted, planted; above these
are
called
regular
verbs.
THE
VERB.
131
their called
360. and
The
verbs
that
do
not
form
are
past indicative
verbs. irregvlar Indicative Present
in perfectparticiple A
this way
one
351. and
Kegfular Verb
to ed.
is
that
forms
its Past
Indicative 352.
Irregular Verb
and Indicative
is
one
that does
not
form
its Past
Indicative
of the
353. 354.
as,
Present
Irregularverbs are of three kinds : Complete: those having a full set of principal parts ; lacking as, beware^ ought^quoth. Redundant those having :
;
Defective:
those
some
of
the
principal sufficiency
parts
366. of
more
than
principalparts
(a)
Some active
as,
grammarians
name,
active
to
and infinitive
to
the
present
participle as being.
of the before ed
see,
plow,
to
in
case
verb
be
dropped
is added
the
past indicative
and
called the
the
(d) Strong
stole, stolen ;
of participle
a
and
Weak
Verbs.
"
strong verb is
one
that
forms
; as,
its
perfect participleby varying the root vowel but not Commonly, always, sing, sang, sung.
strong
and verb ends in
en.
steal,
the
perfect
\t"
weak
verb
is
one or
that
t to the
forms
past indicative
indicative
;
as
present
abash, abashed
be observed
felt. feel,
of verbs that all into strong and into
(e)
weak
It will
corresponds closelybut
All
not
completely
weak,
but
irregularand
are
regular.
strong.
strong
verbs
are
irregular,but
are were
irregular verbs
verbs
are
Originally all
there has been
a
our
verbs
irregular in
to
conjugation
and Those called
most
t.
are
tendency
the
for them
form
by adding participle
have
to the
yielded
those
to
verbs;
that
tendency, including
of
our
132
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
IBBEGUUkB
YEBBS.
357.
most
The
shows
also
the what
principal parts
verbs
are
of
defective
and
what
Every student of English grammar, that speaks the English language, should one master verbs, for it is in the iise our irregular
358. arise
a
indeed
every
thoroughly
of these that
multitude
List of
of the
grossest
errors.
359.
In in the alike.
Irregnlar Verbs.
we are
using irregularverbs,
use
liable to
error
for the
most
part only
not
of
whose have be
past indicative
therefore learned been
and
perfect participleare
separate
that that the the from denotes
"
These
the
rest, that
form may
they
perfectly,
of the other.
regular
form
der un-
also be
used
instead
denotes of
late introduction. is
The The
;
supposed
form of
be
of verbs
the is
best
present
usage
placed
in
a
first.
applied
with the
certain way
freighted
with
spices and
mischief
;"
**thunforms.
der-strwcA;,"**sorrow-s"ricA;ew."
Memorize
only
unmarked
1.
Present, Past
The
Ind.
Two
Past
Forms
PreeefU.
Different.
Past Ind.
Perfect Part
was, arose.
awoke,
r.
awaked,
,
I awoke.*
(bring forth) ^
Bear borne.
/^^^""
I
beaten,
f^.j,
I^^j^
chosen.
.
chidden,
begotten, begot.
Beget,
cleaved, 'i
*
t begat,*
*My
tongue
^ I clave,
clave
to
the
roof
of
my
moxiih.**
"
Dickens.
IBBEGXTLAB
VEBBS.
133
Past Ind,
Present.
Past
f
Ind.
Perfect Part,
Present,
Perfect Part,
Cleave
clove,cleft, cleft,
cloven.
come.
Know,
Lade
knew, laded,
known.
\ clave, (^split),
Come,
Crov^r, '
Dare
"
laden,
r.
came,
'\
/
crov^red.
I crew,
leaped, 16apt.*
lain.
/dared.M
I durst,
J
^^^
\l6apt,*
{venture), (Dare
"
challenge, """"
Do, Draw,
Drinko ,
i^
'
{tt}
did,
"-^
done. drawn.
I proven.*
drew,
drank, i"".
""
,
rode,
rang, rose,
'
{ZTied.** {'^^^
rung, rung. risen.
drank.* driven.
Drive, Eat, Fall, Fly, Forbear, .orge, Forsake, Freeze, Freight, Get,
Give, Go,
drove,
ate,
Rise,
eaten.* fallen.
Rive, Run,
Saw,
rived,
ran,
riven, r.*
run.
run,*
flown. forborne.
sawed,
saw,
r "
sawn,
seen.
r.
See,
{J^^^*-' Seethe,
o
.1.
seethed,
' ^
seethed.
jj sodden.
I sod,
forsaken.
Shake,
frozen.
shaken.
freighted,
{^^^^
freighted. goti,
gave,
I fraught,
fgot,
I gotten.*
given.
gone. graven, grown.
r.
{**;^' ''^''"'"'"{sh^^'l
showed, r shrank,
'
went,
shown,
r.
Grave, Grow,
f
graved,
grew,
shrunk,
shrunken.*
",
"^
t shrunk,
Heave,
Hew,
heaved,
,
'
".
I hove,
hoven.*
hewn,
r.
Hide.
{Jif".
^
1
*
**
**
This
as
line he the
dared
came
not
cross." when
"
Macaulay.
are
Beholden
"
withholden.'
Come
winds
forests
rended,^*
W,
Scott,
134
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SEKTEKGE.
Past
Jnd.
(
Ptrftd
Part.
Present.
Smite,
Sow
smitten, Swear,
r.
smote.
I smit.
sown,
sowed,
Swell, Swim,
Speak,
Spit,
rspit,
spit, spitten.*
\ spat,*
f
Spring, Steal,
sprang,
^
f
I sprung,
sprung. stolen,
r.*
stole,
f
Stride,
I
strode, strid,
r
stridden,
strid.
waxed,
wore, wove,
f ""
waxed,
'
I waxen.
worn.
struck,
struck.
I stricken,
r.,*
'
woven, written.
r.*
strowed,
The
Pasi
Write, strown,
Past Perfect
abode,
r.
wrote, wrote,
-I
I writ,* y
Two
Jnd.
or Part.
the
Three
Present.
Forms
Pa^ Ind.
Alike.
Perfect Part.
r.*
burst, bought,
cast,
burst, r.*
beheld.
bought.
cast.
belaid, r. bent,
r. r.
bereft,
clung, clothed,
cost, crept,
cut,
clung. clotlied,
clad.
cost.
Beseech, Bestead,*
Bet,
besought.
bestead.*
Clothe,
Cost,
t clad,
bet,
r.
betided, bound,
bled,
betided,
betid.* bound. bled.
crept.
cut.
I betid,*
dug,
r.
blended,
blessed,
blended,
Dream,
blent.*
dreamed,
dreamed,
dreamt.
1 blent,*
f
I drgamt,
blessed,
Dress,
blest. bred.
I blest,
bred, brought,
built, r.,
dwelt,
fed, felt,
r.,
dwelt,
fed. felt.
r.
brought. built,r.
burnt.
fought, found.
fought
found.
IRREGULAK
VERBS.
135
Hang,
"
hanged, hanged
is not
to
suspend
seize
by the neck
*
with
as
intent
an
to
kill ; but
or as
the
a
distinction
noun.
always
observed.
to
Past
is used
^
adjective
Rap, stop.
rapt, rapt:
with
rapture.
to
caiue
to
136
PreMnt.
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTEKGE.
Fastlnd.
Perfect Part,
Preeent.
Poet
Ind,
Perfect
Part
Sting,
r
Stung,
stung.
'i
Wring,
Beware, Can,
Do Have
wrung,
r.,* wrung,
r.*
stunk,
Stink,
\ stank,* J
rsw^t,
r.,
stunk.
String,
Sweat,
could.
/
(aux'y) did.
,,"^
Iswet,
swept,
swung,
swept.
swung.
May,
Must,
might,
must.
taught.
told.
Ought,
Shall,
r.
.
thought.
thrust.
woke,
wed.*
Wed, Weep,
Wet, Win, Wind,
wedded,
wept, wet, r.,
won,
wedded,
wept.
wet,
won. r.
(aux'y),/
(Will^
would,
I wed,*
vsish,he- V willed,
willed.)
queatht) J
Wit,
r.
wound,
f
r.,
wound, worked,
Wot,*
worked, wrought,
Work,
I
Wis,* Weet,*^
}
"
wrought.
the From tences, sen(5) According to their Bank. I plow," I can plow," I will plow," I must that the action is expressed by the verb see plow," we used to are mu%t^ plow^ and that the verbs can, mH, cause the manner of the expression. Bemodify, in some way, they are used thus to aid other verbs, they are called either be used verbs that auodliary verbs; whUe may with or without called principalverbs. auxiliaries are 360.
"
"
"
"
361.
Auxiliary Principal
without
verbs
are
those
used
in
the
conjugation
used
of other verbs.
362. with (a) might; (6)
used all
men as
verbs
are
those
that
may
be
either
or
auxiliaries.
are
The can, Be
auxiliaries
be and
have
in all their
forms
could; must;
have
will, would;
shall, should.
and will
**
and
in all their
; as,
"
*'
are
principal verbs
were
I do the work,"
me
He
did
it,"
I would
honest,"
He
willed
his
property."
THE
VERB.
137
may
**
express
men was
"
The
are
building
broken.^^
the bam."
as,
**
The
bowl
were
"
as,
**They
**
talking'^ (past).
"They
do have "*I
are
tdlking*^ money."
not
see
(present). (6)
him."
They
toill talk
(future).
did "I tell me."
can
**
(4) Emphasis
Power
or
; as,
You as,
You
the could
ability;
**
assist
you."
(6) Completion;
him."
as,
I have
**
I had
not
heard
as,
or
**
You
may
come
possibility;
; as, "The
as,
before
night."
he
(0)
to
Beasonableness be there."
be
asked,
shall
how
pened hap-
is,it would
You
must
to ask.
(10)
Compulsion
shall
He
obey^
(11) Necessity ;
We
sufferthe
consequences."
the
(12) Duty;
as,
We as,
should
"
be
respectful to
pay do." of you the
or
aged."
(13) Willingness;
(14) -4dap"a"ton; (15)
?
"
I would wJM
you
if I could."
as, "This
Tendency;
This idea
bloom
"Do
youth
believe
will
fade away."
^^
(16) Interrogation;
you is
her?"
Shall
assist
expressed by
Promise,
position of the
auxiliary.
"I will have it"
(17) Determination,
"
Command;
sJialt not
as,
You
sJmU
have
your
money."
"
Thou
steaV^
USES
OF
THE
AUXHilABIES.
363.
(1)
Do
in the
present and
"
did in the do
past
the
are
used
for emphasis ; as, principally "I did give it to you." 364. (2) Can in the present the power or abilityof
act ; as, "I
can
You
have
money."
past
press ex-
could
in
to
the
agent
could
perform
past
"
the
"
fill my
position."
press ex-
365.
(3) Hay
present and
; as,
"
might
mat/
in the
or permission liberty
You
stay."
It
might
been,"
possihility ;
as,
"
as, "It be
a
might
have
expresses is
probability ;
before
"
She
may
to
sick."
(6) May
; aB,
placed
I go ?
the
subject
you
ask be
question
or
express
^^May
'^May
always
happy."
138
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(c) Can
book?"
incorrectly
children
used with
for
may;
as,
^''Can
use
your
play
me?"
866.
or
(4)
Hnst
necessity
"
moral;
"If
star
must
be above
to-night."
867.
no
his
premises, yoMmust
truth."
"
accept
his conclusion."
tell the
(6) Shall,should
words in the
will,would.
more
four
language guilty
a
perhaps, frequentlymisused
are,
There
than
would. of
Even
our
very
best
writers would
can
sometimes
using
is the
will
for sTtall^ or
that
for
should; but
for such these
to
carelessness
only excuse
either that
be
offered
blunder, and
the distinction it.
whoever
persistsin
he is
to
misusing
too
words
master
to
must
acknowledge
ignorant
or
that
ought
be
made,
368.
too
careless
"
observe the
Eules.
(1) Shall,in
and of
first person,
a
tells ; in the
or
second
third, it expresses
the
speaker.
the reward."
"I
shcillknow
"Thou shalt
presently."
not
shall have
nation
steal."
speaker; in and third, it only foretells. "I will pay you." second the will have will be pleased with pay." "You my
"
of
He
will When
use
come
to-morrow."
sense
(3)
would
the
demands for
we
such
change
for
in the will.
tense,
should
if
shall^and
could."
would "You
assist you
should
try
again."
(a)
the In
interrogative
or
sentences,
shall external
denotes
to the
that
the
act
is under
volition
control
of the
something
control
agent, and
loill
implies
thfttthe
act is under
of the
agent.
STtalllgo?
Will jou
Shall
Will
jon he
go?
Shall
he
go?
go?
go?
THE
VERB.
139
Will
can
never
in literally
the
for knows
no
one
can
be
supposed
very may which
common
to know
speaker^s will
forcible effect. the form The of
better
it.
But
by
and with
rhetorical
figure,will
is in
in the
first person
to
be
a
used
sentence
having
If the
to
question
a
realitya
without
very
tive posi-
declaration. intended
question
an
contains
negative particle it
but Will money
^'
is generally such
my
a
imply
a
^^
affirmative
answer.
answer;
negative
"
Thus,
demand my
I not
^^
demand
''^
; and
Will
I
^
tolerate
his slander.^
a
(6)
truth of the
is often
in the than
simply
"
to express
general
tense
more
emphatically
; as,
*"
it could vHll
expressed by
Flowers shall
the
present
verb When
happen."
leave the will
an or
(c)
\mt leave
the as,
is in the he
subjunctive mode,
before determination
or
nothing
shall
futurity;
before
shall
Monday;"
of is
**He
Monday"
sentences
expresses in which
we
speaker.
(d) Many
shall the
or
would
should
when idea
introduce will
adjective or
would. of idea
to express
'*
additional
expressed by
expresses
Thus, futurity
we
y
sentence,
also the
an
request,"
the
tional addi-
of the
when
introduce should
or
adjective changed
to
adverb
to express
speaker^s pleasure,
to
will
be "I
shall;
that
happy
grant your
be
request,"
grant your
to be
shall
gladly
grant your
it would
request."
*'I will
happy
to
request," implies
require an
speaker has
happy. said
371. these
General four
Snles.
"
All may
that be
been up
concerning
tvfo
auxiliaries
:
"
summed
in the
eral gen-
rules 372.
(1) Shall or should represents independent of the volition or control of hy the subjectof the verb.
373.
the what
act
or
state
as
is
represented
as
(2) of
Will
or
would
or
represents the
control
act
or
state
pendent indehe is
of
the
unless speaker^
also
hy represented
The
own
subjectof
accustom
the verb,
to
(a)
both his whether of the of
student
should and
himself
observing thoughtfully
purpose
as
language
act to be
that
of
determining
the the control
the
expressed
which from is
represented
the
tinder
speaker,
of that
represented by
subject of
verb,
or
something
different
either.-
140 (6)
The
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
following quotation
will of sfMill
is from
Richard
Grant
White
'*
The
cal radi-
of signification
; that
(Anglo-Saxon willan)
(Anglo-Saxon
"
is purpose,
mination intention,deter-
do
means,
I purpose
doing
do
I
as
am a
determined
man
do.
I sJiall do what
to
means sees
to do ; and
came
is I
am
supposed
about
or
to do
"
he
he
to
do,
/ shall
to mean,
doing
be, in fact,a
But
we so
announcement do means,
an
of future
less
remote.
you
mean
shall
to
radically,you obligation,
or
to do ; and
an
therefore,unless
on
impose
over
to
action
the
part of another
of the
we mere
person, future
whom
we
claim
control, shall^
person, is it is the volition future
in
speaking
other
voluntary
you
so.
action
of another
inappropriate
of the
; and
fore thereto do
or we or
say thus
or
person say,
own we
merely announcing
will ;
action, we
on our
shall, you,
on
he,
or
they
I.or
and,
in
declaring he,
purpose
part,
mean
the part of
another, obligation, or
say,
we
unavoidable
or
action, which
shalV^
to
will, you,
they
Examples.
shall do it. it. shall do it. it. it.
I shall do He You
(Mere futurity. )
(4)
(5) (6) 375. (1)
will do
will do
I will do
it.
Explain the
Will Will What you it be shall dark
following:
"
give thanks,
before I do ? Then To A leave Paradise child this
Kate,
reach
or
else shall I ?
tower
(2)
(3)
you
the
(4)
wilt
thou
not
be shalt
loath possess
paradise,
thee.
but
"
within I to
Milton,
(5)
This She
myself
of my
will take
;"
I will make
lady
of
own.
The To
stars
midnight
she
a
shall be her
dear
ear
her ; and
In many
shall lean
secret
place, wayward
sound
"
Where And
rivulets
dance of into
their
round.
beauty
ShaU
bom pass
murmuring
her face.
Wordsworth.
THE
VEBB.
141
(6)
fair ? believe
If she
then
I will die
she
shall
grieve.
"
Wither*
(7)
If she She
hate
me,
then
believe
shall
die ere
I will
"
grieve.
Jonson^s
Ben
Parody
on
the Aboioe,
Try each of the auxiliaries,do^ 6", Aave, way, can^ rrvuBt^mighty could, would, should, shall,will,in each of the
876.
following blanks,
the
and
observe
:
"
the
difference
thus
made
in
meaning
(1) (2) (3) (4)
You I believe He Do you
of the
sentence
room.
leave the
that she
pay
me.
study
say let
grammar. I alone.
that
us
accept it
Fill the
following
selection
blanks
:
"
with
shall
or
will,and
give
for
I I If you If you
It
your
be the be be
(1)1
(2)
loser in that
;
trade.
drowned
nobody
wrong.
help
me.
(3)
(4)
Ch\
punished
a me
if I do
mistreat mistreat
you
Qa;
probably
1 assist you
to-day.
I be
not
(7)
(8) (9) (10)
If you He
favor
not
obliged.
allow it. it ? I drink
do
it ; this
you If he he
have be
coffee,or
he ?
(11)
(12) 378.
in
time,
you
accept
the
position.
accompany
Fill
the
blanks following/
your selection.
to
with
should
or
would, and
give reoMonsfor
(1) (2)
I I I We
not
repeat it correctly.
if he do you if he
" r"
pay
not
to-day
she
demand such
a
it
(3)
(4)
thing.
us.
pleased, if
his
favor
(5) He
pay
debts,
142
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(6)
(7)
We He He
was was
do
unto
others he
as
we
have hurt
"
others
do
unto
us.
afraid afraid
that that
be
(8)
his father
commit
suicide.
PEOPEETIES 379.
OF
VERBS.
(A)
the
(1) (2)
the
Frost The
bitten
so
by
frost.
In stands
the the
(1)
verb
verb
bites is
for
are
doer
bitten
or
frosty subject, in (2), of the act or affent. But makes its subject,flowers^ represent
the act This distinction
or
used,
that
its
receiver of verbs
objectof
is called have
erty prop-
voice.
seen
380.
(-B) We
and that
to
now
that
every
sentence
a
expresses
thought
have relates
every the
thought
manner
refers to
in which This
reality.
the
We
note
sentence
the
thought
to the
reality.
its sentence
property of the
the tion rela-
verb, by which
of
381.
it enables
to express
the
fact
of
agreement
between
TJie mail
thought
arrives
and
on
reality; as,
train,
"
the morning
Indicative
mode.
382.
may
express
the
idea and
of power
as
between
thought
or
reality;as.
arrive
on
(can, must,
"
should)
the morning
Potential
383.
(3)
sentence
may
express
the
idea and
of mil
as
determining
Bring 384.
the
on
relatipn between
the
thought
"
reality; as.
the mail
morning may
train,
Imperative
mode.
(4)
or
sentence
express,
to
(a)
doubt
as
to
the
agreement^
thought
V
the
and
the disagreement^between
maU
arrives
on
the morning
train^
we
shall
go.
If
the mail
THE
VERB.
143
had mode.
arrived
on
the
morning
train^
we
should
have
gone.
"
Snbjtmotlve
885.
((7) Verbs
as,
I have
are
inflected
to
mark
differences
in
time;
I go,
gone;
I went,
I ?iad
gone;
I sMll
go, I sImU
have
gone.
This
386. person
property
is called vary of
tense.
(jD)
and
Verbs
their
to
the
number
their
subjects; as,
goes,
I go, he
they
go.
These
properties are
called
VOICE.
person
and
number.
887. the
Voice
is the
that
shows
whether
the
act.
svhject represents
are,
the
receiver
of
There 388.
therefore, two
Voice the doer
Active
is the voice
makes
wrote
subjectrepresent
Iliad." flowers."
389. "She "The
of
blames
me." rw"a."
grave
boy
Voice
Passive
its
was
subjectrepresent
written
the receiver
"
of by
the act;
The
"
Iliad Her
by
Homer." with
that
am
blamed me."
by
her."
grave
flowers
express
action
can
proi"erlyhe
verbs voice
an
said
to
have
(")
hut this
It is claimed
by
many
that
A
only
have if its
voice
position is
the verh
case
untenahle.
verh
act
is in the terminates
subject
or
represents
actor, vvhether
the
;
object
make
not. ;
a
if it does
voice. of
not, the
It is
verb
is intransitive voice
active
to illogical
distinction is
concerning
active become
^^
termination
the
act
upon
an
object, for
and the
that
provided (c)
The active
=
of verbs
into transitive
intransitive,
changed
in
to the
passive by making
Thus,
*'
object
studies many
in the
subject
studied
were won
the
passive.
Anna."
**Anna
won
algebra^''
battles
^^
=
Algebra
by
Napoleon
"Many
battles
by Napoleon."
144
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(d)
the the doer word
'When of that
the the
verb
act
active
that
represents
case, and
is
subject, and
receiver the
nominative
represents
; as,
^^
of the act
is its
object, and
the verb
act
is in the is in the
John that
struck
boy,^^
the the
But
when
the
word
represents
case, and
receiver word
of the
is its subject,
is in the is in the
nominative
that
act
preposition by
The
boy
the
was
by
John.^^ the
two
(e)
have
Transitive
have
voices,
verb the
can
while
.intransitive verbs
be
only
active.
intransitive
no
never
changed
made the
to
the
object in passive
form the of
active
to be
subject
passive.
The elements of the voice the verb
are
:
"
(/)
some
to
be,
hetoTQ of
a
perfect participle,
verb, the
we
transitive
to
use
It
not
is very know
was
convei^ent
the
passive
to
voice,
either
when
do The
actor,
or
when
wish
conceal
the
actor, as,
used
*'
crime The
committed.'*^ form
; as,
(h)
passive
active
of
"
intransitive The
verbs
is sometimes
are
by
The
enallage (i)
This ablest
for the
melancholy
used
**
days
come,^^ for
melancholy
The
"
days
active The of
have
corned is sometimes is
voice
by enallage
work
our
for
the
sive pas-
; as,
state-house
building.^'*
warranted
on
The
is
doing ^
best
vmters
form
expression
no
is now
by
the
very
and
seems
and critics,
to drive
amount
of protest
part of grammarians
sufficient
it out
of the
language.
EXEBC;[SES.
390.
each
verb.
preserve
at the
the
meaning of
th$
sentence.
astonished
nevTS.
bought
was
book.
written
by
Saze.
spend
river
your before
time I
saw
? you.
one.
to be
was as
loved
by
a
every lion.
to
killed if she
by
looks
seems
wanted
speak.
(10)
sad.
THE
VERB.
146
MODE.
891.
manner
Mode
is the
property
of the
to
verb
that denotes
the
in which
thoughtis
differ
as
related
the number
reality,
of their the
to
{a) Languages
that the Arabic but
to
a
to
modes.
It is said
has
seven, differ
as
Sanscrit number of
six, and
of
the
"
Anglo-Saxon
that
four.
the
modes the is
as
belong
particularlanguage
of
; but
a
the
number
modes,
number the
manner are
of classes of forms
a
words,
is
merely
; but
matter
of convenience.
as
expression.
of
There
might, therefore, be
as
many be
there
expression
would
this number
would
almost
nite, infi-
such
classification is
or a
be
worthless.
term.
(6)
of
an
Mode
grammatical
manner
It does
; it is the
not
mean
the
manner
action^
expresses
the
of
thought
manner
in which
the
verb
the relation
between
thought
MODES.
and
reality,
FINITE
.
392. may
All
the the
different relation
manners
in
which
finite verb
thought and realitymay modes be included under the four explained above, and Subjunctive. Indicative^Potential^ Imperative^
express between
"
393.
The
Indicative
is
the
mode
in
which
:
"
the
verb
presses ex-
agreement
He
came.
as of thoughtwith reality^
He mode
come.
Did in
he
come
f in
(a)
The
indicative
used
assertions, in denials,or
Potential
is the the
mode
that
expresses
the
idea and
of power
as reality^
determining
"
relation
between
it.
thought
can
do
it.
He
could
do
395. expresses
A
:
"
verb
in
the
potentialmode
go,''''
It may
*'
most
commonly
as,
'*
can
**
I could
"
go.^^
It
rain,^^
**
might
have
be done.^^ lY."
permission
as,
; as,
You
may
see
(4) Inclination;
as,
I would
like to
pay
him."
"You as,
^^
should
^^Yo\x
him." leave,'*^
(6) Necessity;
must
(7)
Wish
; "s,
May
jou
succeed,^''
146
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(a) Occasionally
consequence,
verb
in
this
mode
expresses
tendency,
used
tion, adapta-
contingence.
the
(") (c) by
the the
The
potential, like
it be done f'
indicative, may
the
be
interrogatively; always
is be known before
potential mode,
of the
unlike rather
subjunctive, may
an
verb,
or
by
auxiliary that
placed
verb.
(d)
can,
''
The
auxiliaries
that
are
the and
signs
of the
potential mode
are
may,
must,
Shall,
rather
the the
sense
of
must,
it expresses
; but
volition,
to
belong
potential mode
are
the
indicative
as
avoid
to
troublesome indicative
distinctions, they
mode."
"
always
considered
belonging
the
Kerl, of the
(e)
the he
Since
potential
that
mode
a
be
used
in the
tional condi-
sentences,
frequently happens
also the he
verb
have
sign
as,
of
subjunctive,
would
and
auxiliary denoting
improve/*
The Here
potential;
study
the is
study,
might
tense.
would governs
in
subjunctive mode,
second,
the
tense.
past
first sign
mode;
396.
The
as
:
"
that
expresses
the
idea and
of
will
determining
Leave
the
relation
between
thought
as reality,
us.
Do
stay with
us.
(a)
addresses
not
When
as,
an
the
speaker
the verb the prayer
an
addresses and
an
verb
expresses the
command;
lea^e
''Avaunt
quit my
When exhortation
speaker
^'
equal,
expresses
entreaty
addresses Give verb
us
; as, verb
Do
presses ex-
me."
When
ox
speaker
; as,
**
supplication
this
daily
the
(6)
The
subject
of
of
imperative
be
"
is
or
usually
pronoun thee." i7."
"
second
person third
understood
or a
; but
noun
of
"
person, call my
to our
pronoun
"*
the be
we
Buin
*^
seize So be
Somebody
toe
wife." theme.
"
Hallowed
' *
thy
name.^^
''
Proceed
then
Pass
then.
(c)
be
The
imperative
sentences
is used
; it is used
in
subordinate
only
in direct
God
said. Let
there
that expresses
as
X^)
doubt
as
to the
agreement,
(6) certainty
as :
"
to
the
disagreement,
between
thoughtand
reality ;
THE
VERB.
147
If he
If he
t8
honest,
he
will
please
he would
me.
Jiad been
honest,
mode
have
pleased
me.
(a) (")
be, the
Earlier of the away. the
The
subjunctive
is used
only
in
subjoined (subordinate)
will doubt continue
to
sentences.
The
source
subjunctive mode
of much
as
has
long been,
the
and
no
perplexity to
many But best other
English had,
verb
languages
and the
distinct
entirelypassed
Many
speakers
form is
longer distinguish
far from
Mode
never
subjunctive
that
indicative
by
of the verb.
seems
But, although
distinction
in form
obsolescent, it
ever
right to
meant
manner
say
subjunctive mode
will
means
be obsolete.
/orm
of
in any
lQ,nguage.
may be the
Mode indicated
manner
of expression.
of the
The their
expression
be
by
words, by
but is it
no
relative exists
position,or
and
must
by
words,
There
always
matical gram-
recognized by important
The
grammarian.
this, and
that
a
distinction mode is to
more
to
give
up the
subjunctive
that
our
give
no
up
mode
altogether, and
loss of of
to
is to
acknowledge
for the be almost
language
mode
has
granmiar.
distinct
seems
form
to
subjunctive
a
is but
on
another the
manifestation
our
what
part of
language
if it must the of
is gone,
;
English
must to
will
have
surpassed by
and determine grammar
none
for then
nature
student the
go back be
of the
the
exact
thought dignity
but of
expressed
be
will be
elevated
may
to the
logic. always,
knowii
tilL often
case
The
subjunctive
of these indicative
sentence
cases
mode
usually, though
not
by
lowed fol-
words,
if and
most
frequently, are
This is the of
a
by
doubt.
must
the
instead
of the
an
subjunctive.
admission
when
or
expresses
we
condition
cannot
be the
guided by
to cannot
determine
the
from
exact
thought
"
expressed. known,
in isolated
cannot
sentences
thought
then
be
parsed.
**
sentence,
If he
is
honest, he
expresses
to be
will pay
a
you,"
sentence
condition
; but
sentence,
If he
is liable
mistaken,"
an
is in the
subordinate
sentence
it expresses
(")
was
Were
wast.
and
wert
subjunctive
that is mode
from
and
This
only
distinction
always
observed. the
^^
(/) sign
The
*'
verb Were
in the
subjunctive
would
without
usual he
; as,
place, paid
get my
lessons."
Had
him."
148
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
IN-FINITE
MODES.
398. which
The
Infinitive and
asanmea
the
Partioipialare
in
the verb
being,or
form
of
the
retains
regardless of
Tense
is that
it denotes
of
relation,
has reference ; tense
not to
(a)
that of
While
mode
or
the
manner
of expression of
a
and
not
to
being
of
thought
real
or
relation, that
of the sion. expres-
thought
400.
Corresponding
are
to
the
three
arbitrarydivisions
Tenses
I shall
:
"
of
time, there
Present, 401.
the
three
Primary
; Future,
I write
; Past, I
vsrote
write.
Each
of these three
primary
tenses
has
:
"
perfect tense^
thus
making
Secondary
written have ; Past
Tenses Perfect, I
Present Future
Perfect, I
have
had
written
Perfect, I shall
written.
402. I
2%e. Present
is the tense
that denotes
present time;
denote
as,
plow.
403. The
Present
Perfect that
that may
any
period of past
present;
404.
as,
time
to^ and
ends
withy the
I h"ave
Past
plowed.
tense
The
is the
that
denotes
indefinitely any
the time
past time;
405. any The
as,
plowed.
Perfect is the tense that denotes
Past
more
of
past
event
before the
occurrence
of
he
some
other
past event;
as,
I had
plowed
406.
the The
planted it.
that denotes
is the tense
indefinitely any
future time;
I shall
plow.
THE
VERB.
149
that denotes
407.
The
Future
event
Perfect
more occurrence
is the tense
the time
as
of any
future
definitely by representing it
of
field when
some
other he
future event;
I shall have
plowed
FORMS
the
plants it.
OF
THE
TENSES.
408.
The
to
;
Present denote
Tense habitual
has
three
forms:
or
(1)
The
simple
at
form
times that The
as,
action,
The
what
is true
to
all
as,
I write. is
now
(2)
to
progressiveform
on;
a
denote
the
action
going
express
as,
am
writing. (3)
more
emphaticform
I do write.
thing with
emphasis
(a)
(6) single
The
progressive form
act.
always
distinguishes a
instead up of
to
continuous
from
an
instantaneous The
present
tense
; as,
**
used
the the
past
man
to
denote knocks
past action
him
(walked)
the the
and
(knocked)
their
down." the
is called
historical
orator
present
to
It is used animation
to
frequently by
historian, the
tense
poet, and
give
description.
present
is often used
j as,
**
(c) The
future will
instead When
of the he hasBxi
future
when
the he
of
as
present
opportunity
what
speak
The
(d)
true
present
tense
is used
to
general regard
not
truths
to
or
is
at all times.
This
statement
is true
principal
hold. of any but
"
sitions, propo*'
but earth is
a
in subordinate and
**
propositions
The
sum
always
The
is
sphere," ^two
that the the
sum
of
the
three
angles
j
triangle
Columbus
equal
believed
to
right angles,"
earth of
is
a
are
correct
sentences
^^
sphere,"
three
to
and of than
Some
old
mathematician
to two
proved
that
the
angles
more
any
triangle is equal
all the
right angles,"
the
most
cannot
claim the
our
be
elegant examples
that claim
to
of
syntax, notwithstanding
warrant
sanction writers
a
of and
nearly
grammarians
use
of
nearly English.
nor
all
speakers
a
faultless neither
Such
sentence
can
expresses
logical contradiction,
a
and that
usage
grammarians
in had
to
long
after
preserve its
form
of has the
expression
once
implies inconsistency
out.
thought,
no
absurdity
it is not
been
pointed
of the the earth
Columbus
sentence
belief,or
such years he
was a
at
least
intention
above
express hundred
belief,about
after his death
what
the
shape of
was
would its
be
four
at
; his
belief
concerning
shape
the
time
believing, and
that
is
just what
150
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
the
sentence
ought
about
to
expresa
as a
*^That
the
earth
is
sphere*^
would much would very
ever a
has
not
always
been truth
*^
been
regarded
*'
nothing
was
have
said
just as
no one
general
say,
to Aristotle
was
";
and
ever
Aristotle for
believed the
most
the
earth
to
is flat.*' what
*^
It is indeed truths
are
difficult,
truths. soul
is
even
learned,
would would souls of have
know
us us
general
that the that
Most
grammarians
but became because the than and
; but
say, say,
Plato
**
believed believed
tense
immortal/'
of
one men case
they
the the is
a
have
Plato
the
souls in the
case
The
; the
present
is used other
belief
now
past tense
could the be
tense to
in the
more
because absurd
belief such
given
for
up.
What
ridiculously
a
standard the
to
common
determining
schools standard all
of able have
verb
to
Our
rectly cor-
boys
ought they
had
be
speak
according
of
such
would that
to be
familiar know
the
thought through
and in what
times,
they might
and that could
theories have
endured
masters
ones
been
abandoned, they
they
be
theology
in such
and
metaphysics
before subordinate
they might
determine Such
distinguish general
upon
matters
from the
contingent truths,
verb
the
tense
for
must
be
determined of
wholly by grammatical By
follow the
a
by
a a
perfect knowledge
unless above the the could verb be
everything.
cannot
law
of
sequence
of
tenses
past in the
principal sentence,
All such
as
subordinate
sentence
the in is
to
correctly expressed by
sentence,
that of because the verb. finite
'*
using
of
present
present
subordinate
upon of is
a
the
time
dependent
the time
verb, and
the
finite
Columbus it
was
be
a as
sphere**
*^
good
believed
sentence,
that the
and earth
expresses
a
precisely
Columbus
sphere.**
409.
The
Present
to
Perfect any
Tense
has two of
;
forms
(1)
The
simple form
up
denote
period
past time
as,
"
extending
written.^^ of I have
to, and
The
(2)
been
I have
the
continuation
to ; as,
"
the act
through
^^
period of
has
time
referred
writing.
The
to
410.
Past
Tense
three
forms
(1)
The
simple
wrote,'^ of
to
an
form
indefinitely any past time; as, "I continuation form to denote (2) The progressive action through any past period not extending up
denote
the
THE
VERB.
151 The
present;
denote
411.
as,
"I
was
writing,'^ (3)
as,
"
emphatic form
forms
:
to
emphasis ;
The
Past
I did
write.^^ has
act two
was
Perfect
Tense
(1)
The
in
a
that the simple form to denote period of past time that extended other some specifiedpast time letter before
to
completed
ended written I had
up
;
to, and
"
with,
the
as,
he
called the of
for
it."
(2)
as,
"
The
form progressive
the abovethe been
denote
that
action
continued
;
through
I had
period
before The
to
past time
called Tense for has
writing
The
he
Future
it."
two
forms
(1)
simple
event;
denote future
form
the time of any future indefinitely shall write,^^ form to (2) The progressive as, "I of the act through some the continuation period of time; as, "I shall he writing.'*^ denote (a)
It must be remembered denote time that time very the
past
tense
and but
**
future, when
be followed
not
by adverbs,
that denote
indefinitely ; definitely ;
as,
by
*'
the
yesterday.'''*
He
come
to-morrow.^^
413.
The
Future
Perfect
Tense
an
has
act
two
forms be
(1)
ends
The in
a
simpleform to denote that period of future time that future other specified some
the letter (a)
used Here
will up
as,
"
completed
extends time
;
to, and
with,
beforehe
calU^ which
with
tense, refers
to future
time, by being
in connection
(2)
continue
as,
"
The
of future he
I shall have
writing an
IN EACH OF
hour
when
comes."
SIGNS
OF
THE
TENSES
THE
MODES,
ACTIVE
VOICE.
414.
Indicative
Present Past
: :
Mode
has
six tenses
verb verb
"
Simple form
indicative
of the of the
; I write, ; I wrote.
Past
152
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Future Present
Shall
or
will before
the simple
or
form
perfect: Have,
hath, has,
hast
before
perfect
I
participle ; I have
Past had
toritten.
or
perfect
Had
hadst
before
the
perfect participle;
before the
toritten.
(6)
Future
perfect :
Shall
have,
have
or
will
have,
perfect
participle ; I shall
written,
415.
The (1)
Potential
Present may
:
Mode
can,
has
or
four
must
tenses
before
"
May,
the
simple form ;
before the
write,
Past:
or
should
simple
before
form;
Present the Past
perfect: May
have,
can
have,
have
or
must
have
perfect participle :
before the
I may could
written.
have, would
I
have,
have
or
should written.
have
perfect participle ;
might
416.
The
Snbjimctive Mode
or
most
commonly
it may the
same
has be
as
the in
Present^
any
Past^
and
Past
Perfect;
The
but
used
of the
signs are
in the
Indicative
417.
The (1)
Imperative
Present:
Mode
has
one
tense
"
Write,
418.
Infinitive Mode
Present Present have
:
has
the
two
tenses
"
To
before To
simple form;
before the
To
write,
Perfect:
written.
have
perfectparticiple; To
The
Present Present
ParticipialMode
:
has
in
two
tenses
"
The
form
that
ends
ing
Perfect :
Having
before
the
420.
Change
each
of
the above
verbs
to
the
passive voice^
preservingits
tense.
THE
VERB.
153
PEBSON
AND
NUMBER.
Person
and
Nnmber
are
the
properties according to
to
the of
verb the
changes
its form
as,
suit
the
person
and
subject;
number
"I
write.^*
"He
writes.^^
They
(a)
lorite.''
and
Person
belong only
their form
to
Infinitives and
number of their
change verbs,
for the
whose
or
subject is usually
unipersonal
this is not Such and
a
the
as,
pronoun
it, are
times some-
impersonal
verbs;
verbs
It
freezes.''^But
best of different the
the
grammarians.
persons modification
numbers. of
rule,
English
verbs
for
person
and
is confined
to the
present
tense.
422. of
Style is sometimes
There
are
named
as
one
of the of
properties
verb:
"
verbs.
four
stylesor
forms
the
am
loving.
did love.
variation
that
verb and
undergo
The
indicate
voice^ mode^
of
tense^ person^
number^ and
424.
its
principal parts,
a
Conjngatlon
;
verb
is the
naming
in form
a
of
its
principal parts
its different and number
;
its
through
denote its
single person
to
used chiefly
complete variation
persons, the
terms
through
These
all
tenses^
to
and
numiers.
most
the
by
Move best
grammarians,
with the able
care
but the
Let Be
we
the
class
study
on
inflection
verbs
and may
given
become
following pages.
to
know,
from
the
of any
and
number.
154
GRAMMAR
OF
THK
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
425.
A.
THE
VERB
"BE."
Pbincipal
Parts.
Pteaent^ Be
; Past
Indicative^ Was
Perfect Participle^Been.
INFI^ECTION.
OEDINARY
AND
SOLEMN
STYLES.
INDICATIVE
PBESENT
MODE.
TENSE.
Singular.
Ordinary
1.
Plural,
Style,
Solemn
Style.
1. We
are. or
am. are. or
2. 3.
You
Thou it is.
art
2.
You
ye
are.
He, she,
3.
They
are.
PAST
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
were.
or
You
Thou it
was.
wast.i
2. You 3.
ye
were.
3.
He, she,
Thfey
were.
PRESENT
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We have
or
You
have
2. You 3.
3.
He, she, or
They
have
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We had
or
You
Thou been.
hadst
been.
2.
You
3.
He, she,
it had
3.
They
had
Be
in the
present and
Wert
in the
past
are
old
forms,
not
used
except in
the
Scriptures.
THK
VBEB.
155
FUTURE
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style.
1. We shall be.
or
You
will be.
or
wllt.be.
2. 8.
You
ye
will be.
3.
He, she,
They
will be.
FUTURE
PERFECT
T"K8E"
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We shall have
or
been. beea
2. You 3.
He, she,
it will have
been.
They
will have
POTENTIAL
PRESENT
MODE.
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We may
qt
I may You
2. 3.
Thou be.
mayst
be.
2.
You
He, she,
it may
3. They
may
PAST
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
might
might
or
be.
You
might
or
mightst
be.
2.
You
ye
might
be.
be.
3.
He, she,
might
be.
3.
They
might
PRESENT
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style.
1. We mayst
have
may
or
have
or
been.
2. You 3.
He, she,
it may
have
been.
They
may
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Style.
1.
might
have
We
might
have
been.
You
might
or
have it
migrhtsthave been.
been.
2.
Youorye
3.
He, she,
might
have
3. They
might
156
6BAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
"
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRBSENT
MODE.
TENSE.
Plural
Solemn
Style.
1. If
we
be.
or
If thou it be.
be.
'
2.
If you
ye be.
he, she,
3. If
they
be.
PAST
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style.
1. If
we were. or
If you
If thou it
were.
wert.
2. If you 3. If
ye
were.
3. If
he, she,
they
were.
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. If
we
had
or
2'. If you
3. If
If thou been.
hadst
been.
2. 3.
If you If
he, she,
it had
they
had
IMPEBATIVE
MODE. Plural. 2.
Singular.
2.
Be,
or
do
thou
be.
Be,
or
do
ye
or
you
be.
INFINITIVE
MODE.
Present^ To
be.
Perfect, to
have
been,
PABTICIPIAL
MODE.
Present, Being.
the may
tenses
been.
Remarks. Indicative We
"
(a) By
Potential
using
Modes three
no
tenses
or
of
the
and above
conditional
subjunctive. only
in
give (6)
only
be
the has
usually given.
is
The
verb
emphatic
the
Imperative.
THE
VERB.
157
426.
B.
THE
REGULAR "MOVE."
Principal
TRANSITIVE
VERB
Parts.
;
Present,
Move
; Past
Indicative, Moved
Perfect Participle^Moved.
INFLECTION.
OBDINAET
AND
SOLEMN
STYLES.
ACTIVE
INDICATIVE
VOICE.
MODE.
PRB8BKT
TBN8B.
Plural,
Solemn
Style,
1. We
move. or
2. You 3.
Thou it moves.
movest.
or
2. You 3.
ye
move.
He, she, or
He, she,
it moveth.
They
move.
PAST
TBNSB.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
moved.
or
Thou it moved.
movedst.
2. You 3.
ye moved.
He, she,
They
moved.
PRBBBNT
PBBFBCT
TBNSB.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We have
or
I have You
moved.
ye have moved.
2. 3.
have
Thou
hast moved.
2. You 3.
moved.
He, she, or
They have
PAST
PBRFBCT
TBNSB.
Singular,
Ordinary Style.
1. I had 2. You 3. moved. had moved.
or
Plural.
Solemn
Style,
'
1. We 2. You 3.
had
or
moved.
ye had moved.
Thou moved.
hadst
moved.
moved.
He, she,
it had
They
had
158
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
FUTUSB
TBN8B.
Plural,
Solemn
Style,
1. We shall
or move.
will
Thou
move.
wilt
move.
2.
You
ye
will move.
move.
He, she,
it will
3.
They
will
FUTURE
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style,
1. We 2. You shall have
or
moved. moved.
Thou wilt have moved.
moved. moved
You
will have
ye
will have
3.
He, she,
or
it will have
moved.
3.
They
will have
moved.
POTENTIAL
MODE.
PRESENT
TENSE.
Singular,
Ordinary Style.
1. I may
2.
move.
Plural,
Solemn
Style.
1. We may
or move.
You
may
move. or
Thou
move.
mayst
move.
2. 3.
You
ye
may
move.
move.
3.
He, she,
it may
They
may
PAST
TENSE.
Singular,
Ordinary
1.
Plural.
Style.
move.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
might
might
or
move.
2. You 3.
might
or
move.
Thou
move.
mightst
move.
2. 3.
You
ye
might
move.
move.
He, she,
it
might
They
might
PRESENT
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style,
1. We may
^^
moved.
^^"
moved. have
have^im^^*^'
moved. 3.
^^^
moved
He, she,
it may
They
may
moved.
THE
VERB.
159
PAST
PBRFBCT
TBNBB.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We 2. You mightest
have moyed.
might
have
moved. moved.
Thoa
might
or
have
moved. have
2. You
might
have
ye
might
have
moved.
3.
He, she, or
it
might
have
moved.
3.
They might
moved.
SUBJUNCTIVE
PBESENr TENSE.
MODE.
Singular.
Ordinary
1. If I
move. move.
Plural. Solemn
Style.
Style.
1. If
we move. or
2. If you
If thou it
move.
move.
2. If you 3. If
ye move.
3. If he, she, or
they
move.
PAST
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. If
we
moved.
or
If thou it moved.
moved.
2. If you 3. If
ye
moved.
he, she,
they
moved.
PAST
PBRFEOT
TENSE.
Singular.
Plural. Solemn
Ordinary Style.
1. If I had 2. If you moved. had moved.
or
Style.
1. If
we
had
or
moved.
ye had moved. moved.
If thou
hadst
moved.
2. If you 3. If
3. If he, she,
it had
moved.
they
had
IMPERATIVE
PRESENT
MODE.
TENSE.
Singular.
2.
Plural.
move.
Move,
or
do
thou
2. Move,
or
do
ye
or
you
move
INFINITIVE
MODE. Present
Present, To
move.
Perfect, To
MODE.
have
moved.
PARTICIPIAL
Present, Moving.
Present
Perfect, Having
moved.
160
OBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENGB.
PASSIVE
INDICATIVE
VOICE.
MODE.
PRESENT
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
are or are
moved.
are
moved. ye
are
2. You 3.
moved.
Thou
art moved.
2.
You
moved.
He, she, or
it is moved.
3.
They
moved.
PAST
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style.
1. We
were or
moved.
were
moved. ye
were
2. You 3.
moved.
or
Thou
wart
moved.
2. You 3.
moved.
He, she,
it
was
moved.
They
were
moved.
PBESENT
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We 2. You have
or
been ye have
moved.
Thou hast been moved.
3.
He, she, or
it has
been
moved.
or
3.
it hath been
They
have
been
moved.
He, she,
moved.
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1, We 2. You had
or
moved. mdved.
Thou hadst been moved.
been ye had
moved.
been
been
moved.
3.
He, she, or
it had
been
moved.
3.
They
had
been
moved.
FUTURE
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We 2. You 3. shall be moved.
or
ye
will be moved.
moved.
He, she, or
moved.
They
will be
THB
VERB.
161
TBKSB.
FDtURB
PERFECt
Flurdl.
Solemn
moved. moved.
wilt have
Style.
1. 2.
been
been been
We You
shall have
or
been
moved. been
You
will have
have ye v^rill
moved,
Thoa
moved.
3.
He, she,
moved.
or
it will have
been
8.
They
will have
been
moved.
POTENTIAL
PRESENT
MODE.
TENSE.
Singular.
Ordinary
1.
Plural.
Style.
be moved. be
Solemn
Style.
1. 2. We You may
or
I may
be ye
moved. be
2. You
may
moved.
Thoa
may
be
moved.
mayest be moved.
3.
He, she, or
it may
be
moved.
3. They
may
moved.
PAST
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
2.
might
be
moved. be moved.
Thoa
might
or
be
moved. be
You
might
or
You
ye
might
be
moved.
3.
He, she,
it
might
They
might
moved.
PRESENT
PERFECT
TENSE.
PluraL
Style.
1. 2.
hav"e been
We You
moved.
may
or
have ye
been have
moved.
been moved
may
have
3.
He, she,
moved.
or
it may
have
3.
They
may
been
moved.
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural. Solemn
Style.
1. We 2. You
have been
might
have
been
moved. moved.
mightst have
mi^it have
or
been
have
2. You
might
or
have
beeu
Thoa
ye
might
have
moved.'
3.
He, she,
moved.
it
might
been
3.
They
might
been
moved.
162
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
SUBJUNCTIVE
SUBJUlfCTIYE
MODE.
FOBH.
The of the
sabjunctive
best writers
form
of
the and
Mode the
is
obsolescent, many
form.
rejectingit
indicative
PRESENT
TENSE.
Plurai.
Solemn
Style.
1. If
we
be
or
moved. ye
be
If thou
be moved.
2. If you 3. If
moved.
he, she,
it be
moved.
they
be
moved.
PAST
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style.
1. If
we
moved. moved.
If thou
wert
were
or
moved. ye
were
2. If you 3. If
2. If you
moved.
moved.
he, she, or
it
were
moved.
3.
If they
were
moved.
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Singular.
Ordinary
1.
Plural.
Style.
been had moved. been
Solemn
Style,
1. If
we
If I had
had
or
been
ye
2. If you
moved.
If thou hadst been
2. If you
moved.
had
3. If
he, she, or
it had
been
moved.
3.
If
they
had
been
moved.
IMPERATIVE
PRESENT^
MODE.
TENSE.
Singular.
2. Be
Plural, moved. 2. Be
moved,
or
be thou
moved,
or
be ye
or
you
moved
INFINITIVE
MODE.
Present, To
be moved.
Present
Perfect, To
have
been
moved.
PARTICIPIAL
MODE.
Present
Perfect, Having
been
moved.
THE
VERB.
168
PKOOKESSIVE
STTIiE.
ACTIVE
INDICATIVE
PRB8BXT
VOIOE.
MODE.
TBNSB.
Plur"U.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
axe
or are
moving.
are
moving.
ye
are
2. Tou 8.
moving.
it is
Thou
art
moTlng.
2. Tou 3.
moving.
He, she, or
moving.
They
moving.
PAST
TBNSB.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We
were or
moving.
were or
moving.
ye
were
You
moving.
it
was
Thou
wert
moTlng.
2.
You
moving.
3.
He, she,
moving.
3.
They
were
moving.
PRBSENT
FBRFECT
TEXSB.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We 2. You have
or
moving. moving.
Thou hast been
been ye have
moving.
been
have
been
moving
moylng. 3.
been
8.
He, she, or
it has
been
moving.
or
They
have
been
moving.
He, she,
It hath
moylng.
PAST
PERFECT
TBNSB.
PlurcU.
Solemn
Style.
1. We 2. You
hadst been
moving. moving.
Thou
had
or
'been ye had
moving.
been
been
moving.
moving. 3.
3.
He, she, or
it had
been
moving.
They
had
been
moving.
FUTURE
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style.
1. We 2. You shall be
or
moving.
movmg.
Thou wilt be
moving. moving.
will be
ye
will be
moving. 3.
3.
He, she,
or
it will be
moving.
They
will be
moving.
164
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
FDTUBB
PERFECT
TENSE.
Singular,
Ordinary
1. 2. I shall
Plural, Solemn
Style,
have been been
Style,
1. We 2. You
been
moving. moving.
Thoa wilt have
shall have
or
been
moving.
been
You
will have
ye
will have
moving.
3.
He, she,
or
it will have
been
3.
They
moving.
moving.
POTENTIAL MODE.
PRESENT
TENSE.
Plural.
Style,
1. We 2. You may
or
moving.
be
be ye
moving.
be
moving.
Thou
may be
moving.
mayst
.
be moving.
3.
He, she,
or
it may
be
moving.
3.
They
may
moving.
FAST
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn
Style,
1. We 2. You
might
be
moving,
be
might
or
be
moving.
be
2. You
might
or
moving.
Thou
ye
might
be
moving.
mlghtst be moving. 3.
3.
He, she,
it
might
be
moving.
They
might
moving.
PRESENT
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Style,
1. We 2.
have
moving.
may
or
have ye may
been have
moving.
been
moving.^
Thou
You
been
moving. moving.
mayst
3.
have
been
moving. 3. They
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Solemn been
Style,
1. We
2.
nave
might
have
moving. moving.
Th""i. uiightst
might
or
have
been have
moving.
been
You
might
or
have
been
You
been
ye might
moving
moving.
moving
3.
He, she,
it mignt
nave
been
moving.
3.
They might
have
been
THE
VERB.
1G5
SUBJUNCTIVE
FBESENT
M0DE.1
TENSE.
Plural,
Solemn
Style,
1. If
we
moving.
be
be
or
moving.
ye be
If you
moving.
or
If thou
be
moving.
2.
If you
moving.
3. If he,
she,
it be
moving.
3. If
they
be
moving.
PAST
TBKSB.
Singular.
Ordinary
1. If I
2.
were were
Plural,
Style.
moving.
Solemn
Style,
1. 2.
wert
If
we
were or
moving.
ye
were
If you
moving.
If thou
If you
moving.
moTlng. 3. If
3. If
he, she,
or
it
were
moving.
they
were
moving.
PAST
PERFECT
TENSE.
Plural.
Style,
1. If
we
moving. moving.
If thou hadst been
had
or
been ye had
moving.
been
2. If you moring. 3. If
moving.
3. If he, she,
or
it had
been
moving.
they
had
been
moving.
IMPERATIVE
MODE.
PRESENT
TENSE.
Singular.
2. Be
Plural.
thou be
moving,
or
do
moving.
2. Be
moving,
or
do
ye
or
you
be
moving.
INFINITIVE
MODE.
Present, To
be
moving.
Perfect^ To
have
been
moving.
PARTICIPIAL
MODE.
moving.
1 save
verb
space
in
mode
may
to
have the
any
of
the
six
are
tenses, but
named
to
given
subjunctive
here,
present^ pasty
past perfect.
166
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
EMPHATIO
STTLB.
ACTIVE
INDICATIVE
VOICE.
MODE.
PRESENT
TENSE.
Singular.
Ordinary
1. I do 2. You do
Plural.
Style,
Solemn
Style.
1. We do
or move.
move.
move. move.
Thou
dost
move.
2. You 3.
ye
do
move.
They
do
move.
He, she,
or
It doth
move.
PAST
TENSE.
Singular.
Ordinary
1. I did 2. You 3.
Plurca.
Style.
move.
Solemn
Style.
1. We did
or move.
did
move.
Thou it did
move.
didst
move.
2.
You
ye
did
move.
move.
He, she, or
3.
They
did
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT
MODE.
TENSE.
Singular. Ordinary
1. If I do 2. If you
Plural
Solemn
Style.
move.
Style.
1. If
we
do
or
move.
do
move.
If thou
move,
dost
move.
or
2. If you
it doth
ye
do
move.
8. If he,she,or
it does
he, she,
move.
8.
if
they
do
move.
PAST
TENSE.
Singular. Ordinary
1. If I did 2. If you 8. If
Plural. Solemn
Style.
move.
Style.
1. If
we
did
or
move.
did
move.
If thou
didst
move.
2. If you
ye
did
move.
he, she,or
it did move.
3. If they did
move.
IMPERATIVE
PRESENT
MODE.
TENSE.
Singular.
Do thou
move.
Plural. 2. Do ye
move.
THE
VERB,
^
167
^427. (1)
Model
for
Parsing Verbs.
Species.
(2) Classes,
(a)
transitive
or
or
copulative; ("?) regular or irregular. give principal parts.) (If irregular, (a) voice, (6) mode, (jcf) tense, (d) person
and number. with
(agreement
of verb
subject).
stated in of
(a)
teacher
cannot
veiy the
conveniently
and of the
be
the the
parsing, but
and
may class.
be
made
clear See
by
questions
outline
explanations
(6)
complete
verb.
428.
Parsing.
The I
am
hunter sick.
They
He
Killed,
its
v.,
was
will have
been
invited. honest.
agree with
considered
subj. huntery R.
Am,
v.,
am,
was,
been,
"
to ind.,pres., 1st,sing.,
agree
with
subj. 7, R.
been with
v.,
XV.
v.,
Will
have
invited, its
ind., fut.
per.,
subj. they, R.
considered,
trans., cop.,
R. XV.
reg.,
429.
When
each
A.
complete parsing of all finite verbs. change active verbs to passive^and expand possible^ attributive. attributive verb into a copula and an
Write
Plato
reasons
well. three
sides.
has may
were
sold
come
If I Get
you
try that.
wisdom.
of the way.
says that the
pudding
tastes
sour.
168
GBAMMAB
OF
TH"
""(QLISH
BENTENGS.
(":
it.
(lo:
(11 (12 (14
boy.
rocK.
ship
The
city surrendered
smells
sweet.
to the
enemy.
(13: The
The He He Must I
can
general surrendered
rose
the fork
(16:
(16: (17 (18: (i" (20 (21 (22 (23:
is
talking
come.
nonsense.
may
I bear
all this?
a
write
should
were
letter.
You If I
study.
you, I would me, him
try
to
do
better.
Though
If he If he
he
slay hurt,
him.
is here, ask
was
in. himself.
he
kept
he
it to
(24
(26: (26 (27
assist you,
I would
willingly.
study,
dollar. but now, is
no
might improve.
Troy
He What
was,
is
no
more.
is poor
was
and more,
will and of
always
what
(30
(31 (32 (33 (34: (35 (36: (37 (38 (39 (40
Bryant
The The Thou The When The
is the
was
author covered is
Thanatopsis.
with flowers.
place
didst hunters
State-house
create
building.
this wondrous
world.
bad
killed
bear.
this grammar, down the I will visit you. old
I have
storm
completed
have write
to to
may
broken
apple
tree.
If you Shall
should
we
her, it might
and
appear
that I had
requested it.
submit I
were
chains him.
slavery ?
I would He How
was
with
bom
(4i:
B.
do you
wash be
(1 (2:
Go,
Green You The The
your their
face, and
graves.
(3: (4:
(6: (": (7 (8)
ought lady
task is
was
to go.
accomplished.
not
accomplished
my when
in
a was
day.
broken.
ran
I could
not
go
was
because broken
buggy
my
My
To And
buggy
the
next
horse
away.
thy steps,
for
as
from
hence
THE
V"KB.
169
I hear
and
understand and
not,
so
see
Beneath,
naught discern.
"
Gary^a
Banters
Irifemo^
24.
(9)
Pass For
we so
then,
Heaven's wish
pleasure
the noble Caesar
a
is.
"
canto
21.
(10) (11)
If you
to know
truth, speak
Brutus
was
truth.
The
^
Hath If it And
told you
were
that
was
ambitious
so, it
grievous fault.
CsBsar answered it..
"
grievously
mountains Marathon
hath look
Shakespeare.
(12)
The
on
Marathon,
on
And And
looks
an
the
sea
musing standing
not
there that
on
hour
alone, might
still be free ;
I dreamed For
Greece
the Persian's
grave,
"
I could
deem
myself
slave.
Byron.
430.
la.
Outline
of Verbs.
Classes.
Ih.
According
In-finite.
to their
relation
to
subjects.
Ic. Finite.
2c.
Infinitive.
IFor
see
discussion Index.
and
outline
of
the
in-finite verbs,
/ Participle.
to
According
their action's
relation to objects.
Transitive.
Intransitive.
to
According
Attributive.
Copulative.
to
According
their form.
Ic. 2c.
According
their rank.
Principal. Auxiliary
i
Those
used
in the
conjugation
of
other
verbs.
Parts.
16.
Principal.
Present
Ic.
Indicative.
170
GRAMMAR
OF
THS
ENGLISH
SENTENCB.
Past
indicative.
Perfect
participle.
Auxiliary.
Voice. Active. Passive.
3a.
Properties.
Ic. 2c.
16.
26.
Subjunctive.
In^itive. j
Participial.J
,^
Discussion
of the
In-finite Verbs."
Imperative. Primary.
Present. Past. Future.
Tense.
Ic.
Secondary.
Present Past
perfect. perfect.
perfect.
Future
Person. Number.
STITTAX
431.
OP
Rule and
"
XV. number.
"
"
verb finite
subjectin
person
Example.
plow.''
two
**
He
more
plows.''
"
They
plow."
verb
as,
having
and I
or
subjects
connected
by and,
connected the
must
'be
"He
are
brothers."
or
**
verb
following
be mistaken."
two as,
more
singular subjects
or
by lawyer by
or,
or
nor,
must
was
singular ;
He
she
goes."
**
Either
the
doctor
(c)
nor,
women
verb be
following plural;
mistaken."
cannot as,
two
"
or
more or
connected **The
men
or,
or
or
must
were
We
wrong."
the
(d)
or
verb
have
two
or or
or nor.
more
nominatives When
two
or
in differing
more
in person
and
in
a
joined by
sentence
a
of such vdth
tives stand
nearest to
before
one
verb,
with
the each
verb
agrees
it,and
verb
is understood
of the
others.
THB
VERB.
171
(1)
or
Put
the
to the
verb;
verb,
the
as,
**
Either
the
teacher
his
pupils were
Let and the the
blame.
'^
(2) order,
am
be
next
to
the
thiiyl person
; as,
**
next
in
person
or
farthest she
from
You, he, or I
better in
mistaken.*'
cases can
You the
is mistaken.*'
it is
always
its
too
**
such if it
**
to rewrite
sentence,
giving
the
or
each
nominative
own
verb,
; as, taken, mis-
be
done
without
was
making
to
sentence
sound
toere."
formal You
are
Either
or
blame,
his
pupils
(e)
and
An
appositive modifying
not
the the
subject expresses
verb
; as,
**
the subordinate
idea,
does
form
of
I,your
master, command
you;" (/)
idea of
or, A
master,
for
I,
its
commands
you."
a
verb
having
must
subject
as, other
collective sxmj
not
noun,
was
conveying
with this
the
unity ^
he is
be
singular;
the up for of its
**The
divided.**
^*This
jury
'*The
days
guilty,but
is made
jury
does
agree
one.'*
regiment
A verb of
two
thousand
a
**
(g)
idea "The
having
subject
as,
conveying
are
the
happy.*'
and ing." talkin dress
regiment
but
laughing
club
do
not
Your
club
wear
blue
uniforms,
to
uniform.**
(1)
and
It is
matter
of
importance by
the
pupil
that noun,
he
"
be
able of
to
tinguish dis-
ideas
conveyed
the
collective
that
unity,
(2)
noun
It is many the
impossible
of
to
determine
of
whether
the it
collective in
expresses
unity
or
that
plurality, since
the the collective untwisted
as a
depends,
took has of
most
instances, upon
of
to
a
the In
particular conception
the
speaker
noun
the
collection
objects.
rope
a
plural
We
sense,
or
been
compared
to
having
its strands
threads say,
or
in the
singular,
when
to
the
same
in
twisted
state.
may
the term
denotes
or are
separation, distribution,
state, the verb
should
diversity, in regard
place,
time, action,
"
be plural ; otherwise
"
Say,
"
The
public
My
family
are
in the country
in
the
country"
of boats
(the
were
same
place). agreed."
up the
"The number
committee
not
"Congress
river shows this the The
adjourned."
have The
passed
spring, and
distinction pronoun
; as,
"
last example
(h)
a
whether
always subject
"The
have
(one
or
mistaken."
to
adjunct,
to
the say,
must
not
be
allowed
affect the
not
deriva-
172
Uon show of
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
.
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
such
to
words
be
a
are
uncertain
^*
'^
The
ezamination
of his
friends
him Be
bankrupt."
use
(j)
careful to
of the verb
there. Do
when
not
the sentence
'*
is
introduced
by such words
hence,
wa$
or
say,
Hence
jariees
etc
There
differences
between
them,*'
Review
Define
a
of Verbs.
verb. Illustrate.
(2)
?
to
How
do and
verbSi
resemble
prep^
adverbs,
relative
pronouns?
can
by
verb
phrase (6)
Illustrate.
every and
(4)
What
you
with
reference bases.
predicate.
illustrate
:
different
Define
in-finite verbs;
;
(b) 4
is
these
verb does
is
one
that
requires
an an
object;
Is
an a
intransitive verb
that
not
require
on
always
What
transitive
if its action
a
Illustrate.
(9)
may
complete
classes
of
and
illustrate the
copulas. (12)
each for
a
principal
weak the
parts of verbs?
verbs.
Illustrate. Name
ten
strong and
(13)
irregular verbs
of
often
misused, give
in
a
principal parts
auxiliaries also
an
sentence.
using
the
(15)
When
Illustrate
correct to
incorrect
of each. illustrate
(16)
each.
is
a
properties belong
is
a
(17) Define
? Illustrate. Tell how Can
and
(18)
be
verb voice
in the ?
active
(19)
an
When verb
verb
in the
passive
to the
Illustrate.
(20)
?
active
an
may
changed
be
passive voice.
?
Illustrate.
(21)
tive intransi-
verb
Why
Illustrate.
(22) Name,
use
of the
(24)
mode define
about
the
(25)
of the each
general
and
(26)
the
each
primary regular
What is
tenses
an
each
secondary
active number inflection
tenses
; illustrate
with
irregularverb, ip, by
person
and the
the
passive
voice. What
(27)
meant
and
of ?
verb?
(28)
is meant
by conjugation, synopsis,
433. that
ment
Supply
their
suitable in
verbs
in the
following blanks.
so
Scr
are
the
present tense,
be noted
:
"
subjects may
173
THE VBBB.
(1)
(2)
he
or
to
blame.
mistaken.
(3)
(4) (6) (6)
pupils
best very of the vowels
to
blame.
?
.
the
bad. ?
each
(7)
(8) (9)
following
nor
advantages.
brother received very
boy
his
industrious.
?
pensions
(10) (11)
Everybody
I knew that you
to
me.
my
father's
friend.
434.
two
or
Write
more
five
subjects
sentences
in
which
the
verbs
have
each
joined
by
in
an9. which
435.
more
Write
five
sentences
each
or
verb
follows
two
or
singular
436.
subjects five
or
joined
by
each
or
nor.
Write
two
sentences,
containing differing
but in
one
verb, following
and
more
nominatives,
number,
joined
437.
by
or
or
nor.
Write
two
or
five
more
sentences,
each
containing differing
but in
one
verb, following
and
nominatives,
person,
joined
438.
by
or
or
nor.
Write
band
sentences
in
which
the
collective
nouns,
are
school,
used
assembly,
as
(o/
musicians'),
verbs. in which
crowd,
pair, family,
subjects
439. Write verbs.
of singular
sentences
they
are
used
as
subjects
of
plural
174
GRAMMAR
OF
THB
ENGLISH
8EKTENCS.
THE
ADVERB.
440.
1. 2. 8. 4.
John He He I
am
writes is
correctly.
artist.
an
In
(1)
an an
writes
expresses
attribute, and
In
correctly
attribute attribute
of of
well.
the ideas
an
(4) am expressed by
sentences
In
the
connection
not
tween be-
and artist^
of
the connection.
such
are
as
the
words
four
above
adverbs.
an
An
Adverb
is the
or
attribute 443.
of an
An
attribute is
a
word
that
usually modifies a
verb^
of
or adjective^
adverb. adverb is to
444. this
As
suggests, the
use principal
part of
:
"
speech
modify
the
verb
but
it may
modify
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Moses?'* A
An An
verb
; as, *"He
talks
*^
adjective
adverb
; ajs,
*'
She
lazy.'' enough^
Has the Lord
; as,
He
works
;
prepositional
the The but
phrase
adverb adverbs the truth
spoken
only by
"Did he
(a)
come?" entire
Sometimes
"
is
independently;
no are are
as, said
Fc"."
often
to to
modify
entire be
two
propositions ;
To
is, that
"Did he and
they
equivalent
there may
propositions.
affirmative
answers are
the
question,
"ITe did
answers:
come,^^
Sometimes
both* but it is
given
to
one answer
question;
for Yes
as, "Fes,
come;^^
no are
simply repeating
adverbs used
the
emphasis.
responsive
independently.
is of affirmation ; no,
of negation.
THE
ADVERB,
176
word
(6)
will he
The
come
adverb
frequently modifies
?
*' "*
understood
sometime
as,
**
When verb
again
Sometime,^*
Here,
modifies
the
will come^
understood.
OF
ADVERBS
AS
TO
USE.
singleuse
446.
rmdifying use.
is
one
"
Simple Adverb
in
given above, have but a They are simple adverbs. having only a modifying use.
it and fell,"
are
"
447.
But
was
The
tree
He
came
when
he
\i^nted," where
their And
"
when
adverbs^ because
the
they
and
has which
limit time.
verbs in it
so
as
to express to
ideas of
place
addition
this
to
another,
the
use
joins
limits.
a
its clause
clause it has
That
is, in addition
use.
conjunctive
is
one
Such
words
therefore 448. in
a
called
A
conjunctive adverbs.
that
modifiessome
some
word
subordinate
sentence.
it joins to
SUB-CI^ASSES
OF
SIMPLE
ADVERBS.
449.
Every simple
Most adverbs
adverb
are
is either
responsiveor
:
"
rogative. inter-
responsive;as
rapidly.
there*
He He He
walks stands
came
recently.
as
450. when
A used
few
to
"
adverbs, such
ask
or
why.,
imply questions,
? ? I know I know I know how where when he
interrogative
adverbs;
as:
does
he walk he
walks.
he
does did
stand ?
stands.
came.
he come
he
"451. when
In
the
three
sentences
to
are
the
ask
direct
questions,and
;
therefore
to the
interrogative adverbs
in the
three
they right,
176
GBAHMAB
OF
THB
ISNOLISH
SEKTBNGE.
are
therefore
called
indirect
direct
interrogative
sentence ;
adverb
as
:
-^
may
be
used
in either
cipal prin-
Bubordinate did he
When The
sentence.
come
When adverb
do
you is
think
he found
came
?
a
indirect
intexrogative
always
in
aabordinate
(b)
Tbe
clanse
in which It may
a
an
indirect
:
"
interrogative adverb
'*:Where is he f is the
as, The
is found
is
be verb
finite of
a
; as,
question.*'
^^
(2) Complement
finite
copula;
"*
question is,
ishefi^ Where about Where
Where
(3)
In
apposition
of
a
; as, The
question,
verb
as, ; as,
;
'^
Where
"
'
transitive
as,
ask,
of
of
a
an
preposition;
infinitive
We We
talked believe
(6) Subject
been
**
answered." of
to
an
copula;
as,
**We
thought
the
be,
make A
is hef*^
mistake
of clause
ever
calling indirect
needs
a no
interrogative
No
connectives.
substantive
or
conne"tioe.
interrogativeword,
direct
is indirect,
connective.
GI"ASSB8
OF
OONJUNGTIYB
AJ)Y"BBS.
452. clause
Ordinarily a conjunctiveadverb
to
a
joins
:
"
an
adverbial
as
I direct.
happy
he.
as
king.
tall
as
These
we
may
a
call
Sometimes
to
a
conjunctive adverb
as :
"
adjective
substantive;
is the
a
This It
was
place
when
where aU
the
were
accident
serious.
occurred.
time
455.
.
Such,
words
;
have
the
are
same
connective called
force
as
relative
pronouns
they
therefore
Selative
Conjunctive Adverbs.
THE
ADVERB.
177
prepositional
at which
(a)
phrases
you which which
are
conjunctive
^*
is
usually equivalent
wanted you
a" as
^'
= ^^
to
two
; as,
Come
are
Come
at tJietime
**
left it"=** I
" = ''
"
good
She
good
to the
degree
to
am
good."
to
as.
In
one
sentences
the
is
equivalent by
one
but
phrase,
house
the
force
of the adverbs
the
first
Relative
**
conjunctive
where
also
" =
but it
phrase (h)
The
; as,
The
\t occurred
*'
The
in which
very
profitableexercise They
adverb.
a
to
have
the them
class into
exact
sentences
phrases.
to
may
thus
see
clearly the
conjunctive
say that
(c)
conjunctive adverb
sentence to the
we
connects
two
sentences.
part
a
of
the prinr-
should
say
conjunctive
a
word
sentence.
It always subordinate
modifies
word
in
sentence, and
the entire
sentence
modifies some
principal.
Tou
Thus
in,
eat
where
you
work,
work,
and the entire
where where
is the you
conjunctive
limits the
; it limits
clause,
work,
should
eat.
456.
uses
of
?
"
where Direct
in
"
Wliere is Paul
where
Paul
is,
"
Interrogative
Adverb. I
am
happy
where
Paul
is,
"
Ordinary Conjxmcis,
"
place where
Paul
Belative
Con-
jnnctive Adverb.
457. Memember:
"
(1)
The
direct
directlyasks
a
question
a
subordinate
indirect
sentence.
(2)
The
a
interrogative adverb
and is
question
always
in
substantive
clause.
178
GRAMMAB
OP
THE
ENOLISH
SENTENCE.
(8)
The
some
always
limits it
in
an
adverbial
clause, which
joinsto (4)
The
some
relative word
a
always
limits it
adjectiveclause,
in
which
joins to
458. wTien I Mark
am on
substantive
the
the my
ambiguity
feet," and
in such the
sentences
as,
"
I know
sponding corre-
of disposition
when
to
eg,ch signification.
OF
ADVEBBS
AS
TO
HDANINa. idea
of time; how
expressingthe
;
as
:
"
of time, either
when, how
long, or
often
Ever, never,
everlastingly,evermore, whenever,
and as,
then, meanwhile,
meantime,
when,
anew,
now,
nowadays,
anciently, as
to-morrow,
not
soon ere
as,
hereafter, soon,
long, by
by,
instantly,momentarily, 460.
as
:
"
directly,forthwith,
yet,
anon.
Adverbs
of
of place;
Here,
where,
somewhere,
anywhere,
hence,
where, no-
wherever, wheresoever, herein, therein, hereabouts, whereabouts, hereby, thereby, aground, down,
on
thereabouts,
where, else-
high, whence,
off, afar, aboiit, beneath, above, before, behind, under, without, whither, hither, up, aground, nigh. 461. Adverbs
:
"
within,
backwards,
forwards, hitherwards,
of manner;
those
answering
or
asking
the
how question,
anyhow,
somehow,
at
length.
THE
ADVEBB.
179
lengthwise, suitably, considerably, happily, extensively, together, separately, accordingly, creditably,necessarily,really,certainly, foot by foot,
so
so,
degree
to what
those
extent
suggestingthe
:
"
idea
of how
mnoh, how
Much,
little, or
most,
more,
too,
mostly,
entirely,actually, in
general, totally,highly,
immensely, painlessly, infinitely,clear, nearly, well-nigh, partly, partially, intense y, exclusively, scantily, precisely, enough,
somewhat, sufficiently,
at
even,
ever
so,
just
as,
all,simply, brightly,particularly,especially,in
furthermore.
purpose,
or
reason
those answering
why: question^
of doubt
as
"
465.
Adverbs
of affirmation
or
negation
aye, nay.
"
(a)
to
The
name
classification cannot
all the different
be ideas
complete,
that may
because be
it would
be
In
parsing, the
named
must
pupil
; but
should, if possible,refer
finds
new are one
classes
if he
a
that
cannot
be referred
to any
classes, he
make
class to
suit it.
as
(6)
manner,
Adverbs but
answers
of doubt
this is
to
a a
usually given
classification.
subdivisions No
one
of adverbs adverbs
of of
wrong
of these of
an
doubt
manner
action.
If the
question.
word named
How
did
go?
be
were
asked, it could
that
not
be
answered
must
by the
perhaps. according
Adverbs
It must
to the
kept in mind
the
adverb
always
than
be
idea
(c)
manner
that
denote
are
**
the
of
in
i
an
action^ sentence,
called
modal he
Thus
the but
Truly
Such
came,"
may,
truly does
for
refer be
to
the
coming
to the saying.
adverbs
convenience,
parsed
180
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
as
modifying (d)
An
the
in
the
sentence
in which
they
are
found,
but
in
realitythey modify
adverb All Adverbs others
are
verb
to
say,
understood.
a
ask
question
as
is called
an
interrogative
verb
to
adverb.
be
regarded
in
responcdve.
with the express
(e)
time
often
used
connection
more
definitely ;
A combination
(/)
an
used and
as
single adverb
may
so
be
so,
parsed
again
at
as
adverbial
at
phrase
and
not
by
night, by
and
again,
and
random,
in vain, at least,on
last, out
the be the
out, through
does
through,
have
^^
no
But
when should
combination
the force of
singleadverb,
and there^ therefore introduce
He
signed
;
it then
expresses
there of adverbs
place
are as
they
cannot to
parsed together.
sentence.
{g)
should
used
merely
**
They
have
no
then
be force you
parsed
in
see
introductory
;
expletives.
There
were
They
did
modifying
did ''''Why, of it?"
the
sentence
as,
fiftymen
what
present."
you think
Jones, yesterday?"
^^Well!
COMPARISON.
466.
Adverbs,
; as,
like
have adjectives,
;
one
property,
"
parison com-
best well^better^
brightly^
and
more
most brightly^
brightly.
as
The the
kinds, methods,
degrees are
(a) apply
to
the
rule for
same
those
of
and
adjective.
of
The the
the
comparative
and
superlative
adverbs.
adjectives will
comparative
superlative of
467. 1. 2. Work We
Parsing of Adverbs.
Species.
Classes.
3. 4.
Comparison.
5. 6.
Construction.
Rule.
Degree.
the
sun
while diligently
walked
shines. the
to the kennel
where
"
puppies were
playing.
adv., of manner more diligently, Diligently^ diligently, most diligently, pos. degree, and limits work^ R. XI. While^ adv., conj.,of time ; it limits shines and joinsits
"
clause, while
and
the
sun
it limits
were
were
joins
its XI.
clause, where
the
puppies
playing, playing, to
kennel, R.
THE
ADVERB.
181
(a)
clause should
The
pupil
adverb
noun a
should is
or
always
name
the When
phrase
a
or
phrases
but
to which
the its
conjuuctive
to
a
equivalent.
pronoun
conjunctive
to
adverb
one
joins
it is"
equivalent
phrase,
and
be
called
relative
468.
Parse
nouns^
orally
by abridged
A.
model.
Write
the
parsing of
over
the adverb.
(1) (2)
sang wind
sweetly.
moaned
see
mournfully
you
her
grave.
(8) (6)
(6)
shall I lived
were
again
Sometime.
(4) They
We Do She
very
happily.
? Yes.
agreeably disappointed.
expect them
to-morrow
her
you is
(7)
(8) (10)
B.
continually changing
be
true.
mind.
It cannot
(9) Perhaps
Doubtless Time When How We How How How How is
(1) (2)
flying.
house you be
covered
?
To-morrow.
(8)
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
lecture
we
Never.
believe. ?
!
she
can
play play
?
she
we
act
Wisely.
asunder.
is Ruth? burst
Sick.
their bonds
were
there
fightingbravely.
the way.
stands and
as
day
silent do
was so
the
sad
news.
(14) Thoughts
The Be stick it
ever
often
a
lie too
deep
weak is
for tears.
to bear
trifie too
well
his
weight.
humble,
we see
there
no
place
like home.
Never
shall
again.
the boat arrives.
(18)
(19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (26)
my
friend where
lilies grow
ground
is moist. calls.
patriot answers
I go ye the
came
whenever
cannot
come.
his country
Whither Ere He
day
dawns
he
will die.
before
}(""" P"P"""""'-)
," .^ .^-
It is uncertain Newton
bom. falls.
discovered
why
an
apple
182
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(26) Logic
(27) (28) (29)
Make As
As
we
teaches
how
we
think.
bud we
hay
is the you
while
so so
the shall
labor
boy
(30)
(31) (32)
have how
your do ?
task, then
you
may
rest.
Brown,
you you
season see
where when
sits ?
came
(33)
(34)
hear
? open
we
wheti
buds shall
is three
spring.
meet
(35)
answered
question, when
the you witches. guess when
agam,
was
asked
and
by
Can
(36) 469.
la.
I disturb
you
Oatline
of Adverbs.
2b. As
to
Division. As
to
use.
meaning.
lb.
Ic.
2c.
Ic.
Id.
Degree.
Doubt.
2d. 2c.
Independent. Ordinary.
Belative.
Conjunctive.
Affirmation.
Id. 2d.
Negation.
:
Comparison
(See Adjective.)
OP
Adverbs
usually
limit
always,
an
adverb
limits
prepositionalphrase,
'^I will do it
sometimes
it may
independently.
an
(b)
more."
negatives
have word
not
make had
no an
affirmative; to-day."
as,
not
no
bread
(c)
or or an
following
as we
intransitive
to
verb
to
should
condition
be
an
adjective
the agent
j
adverb, according
manner
wish
refer
the
of
the
to to
of
expressed by
man, in I say, which
to
the **He
verb. looks
Thus, if I wish
strange
to
refer wish
;^^
'*He time
but
if I
the
manner
he my
looked, I say,
condition
at
looked of my
strangely
arrival
me." **I
And arrived
to
refer
the
I say,
aa/c,"
not
safely.
THE
ADVERB.
183
(d)
sake wall" of
In the
poetry
metre
an
adjective is
**
often
used
instead
sweet
of from
an
adverb
her
nest
for
on
the the
; as,
The
swallow
sings
471.
All
liabilities to
to
error
:
in the
use
be may-
reduced 472.
three
heads
use
Choice, Form,
adverb that
(1) Always
expresses,
use
the
expresses^
most
nearly
the
meaning
the adverb
intended.
(2) Always
that the adds
most
form of
positionin
to the
correctness^
clearness,and
eleganceof
expression.
Discuss
Do She All How There
^ot
473. (1) (2) (8) (4) (6) (7) (9) (10) (11) (12) rapping (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (20) (21)
Indianola.
the
so
following sentences:
fast ; you than
were
"
walk
will he
not
soon
become
weary.
supposed.
invited.
neighbors
be
cannot
that
is
willing to
southern
undertake
it.
(6) Th^
San
Jacinto you
are
flows
through
not, you
the
part of Texas.
the debt.
Whether
will have
to pay
(8) Speak
She He
Two
slow
and very
behaved
was
running
rapidly, but
to
suddenly stopped.
alike.
young
the
am
only
well.
a
(13) Suddenly
at my
tapping,
as
some
one
gently rapping,
chamber
boy lady
fox is
acted
dresses
an
remarkably
artful clever. wrong
was
elegant.
animal.
is
exceeding
exceeding
been further
I you
a
have
on
this
subject.
(19) Nothing
Come We
the
matter.
quick
remained
walk week
too at
slow.
Galveston,
he.
and
proceeded
thence
to
No We Such
one
is nobler back
were
or
loftier than
cave.
went
to the
cloaks
in fashion
about
since.
now
(25)
I received
the
with gift
but pleasure,
gladlier resignit
184
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(26)
you
If
you
have
only
at
learned
to
spend
money
extravagantly
at
lege, col-
may Com
stay
should lost
home. be
(27)
generally
$1000
planted by
in
April.
he will
never
(28)
chance.
Having
once
speculation,
have
another
(29) (30)
That
was
remarkably
considered the
fine
speech. proposed,
which
we
Having
We The At I do
not
measures
he
failed of
of
success.
(81)
(32) (33)
those
things
smell the house
frequently sweetly.
mountains in
are
repent
afterward.
flowers this
went
place by
the
considerably
high
and
steep.
(34)
buggy.
474.
Beview
of
(1) (3)
an
(2)
what of
an
adverb
to
may
use.
Name,
:
adverbs
as
interrogative,
adverb.
indirect
interrogative,
In what and kind
ordinary
of the
a
conjunctive,
is each of
relative
?
conjunctive, (6)
State How used of ?
(5)
the
sentence
definitely
may the
modifying containing
\xihen,
connective
use
(7)
be classes of
clause with
an
indirect
interrogative
and chief illustrate in
Illustrate
to
(8)
Name,
What
are
define,
the
adverbs
?
as
meaning.
(9)
errors
use
adverbs
THE
PREPOSITION.
"
185
THE
PREPOSITION.
475.
He He
spoke to
came
the
hoys.
He We
spoke to
came
with
with
476. express
In
each
sentence
are
two
italicized
ideas
that
related, and
the
governs words
are
of
follows it.
Such
called
prepositions.
called
without
and
governs
substantive
object.
(a)
The italicized pronouns in the of
two sentences to
the
right
show
more
governing
is the
power
prepositions.
that
only
the
part of speech
expresses pronouns,
relation
by
of
Besides
preposition,
express govern
relative without
conjunctive
it ; but
and
conjunctions
the
relation
a
affirming
preposition can
I. CI.ASSES
substantive.
OF
PBEFOSITIONS.
478. into
:
"
are Prepositions
(1) Simple.
above, from
"
Single prepositions
"
by, for,
etc. as,
(2) Compomid.
under,
"
Consisting of Any
combination
to the extent
two
prepositions;
from
etc.
(8) Complex.
a
used
as
of, etc.
H.
TBBMS
OF
REI.ATION.
479.
Since
two
relation
words
terms terms
and
relation
implies
of the relation
are
anteoedent.
by
which
the
the
preposition,and
is the
to
preposition joinsthe
substantive.
186
GRAMMAR
OP
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
The
A A An
noun:
objectis always
"*
substantive.
It may
be
"
We
: :
**
went
to the sat
n'ver."
pronoun adverb
He
by
and
me."
In such
now
: : ;
*' "
then, tillnow^
p.
144.)
(4) (6)
An An A A
adjective
infinitive
high,
did
never
''
nothing
thinks
cry.'' [to']
to
(6)
(7)
"
participle
clause of
:
"
of going
We
been
talking about
upon how since
who
prizeV
on
The
labor and
much before
there is
was a
it.'''
"
Reason We
jurymen
"
=
sailor.''
"
**
started him
**
the he
not
sun was
"
We
=
started
'*
before
We his been
supported
election."
seen
elected"
seen
We
supported
"
= "
after
not
=
been "We
"
since shall
fie arrived
since
his
arrival."
wait
comes" comes"
*'
We He
He
**
Christmas."
day dawns"
"She
ere
(o) by
The
followed
them
as
subordinate
clauses, are
adverbs
prepositions ; they
:
"
parse
conjunctive following
into
are
prepositions
be
the
considerations
clearly establish
one
following
that is
of these
words
can
always
clause
a
abridged
the
substantive of the
or
certainly the
word
object
to
of this The be
word, leaving
introduced
meaning
cannot
"
original sentence
any other
unimpaired.
ever
"
by
'
when, where,
be shall
so
known
conjunctive
dinner which
adverb
=
abridged.
after
as
"
Thus,
"
We and
after
is over"
means
We
start
same
dinner the
latter sentence,
precisely the
"TTe
former, after
shall
start
universally conceded
is over" italicized is not group the
to
be
preposition. But,
to
means
We
when for
dinner
shall and
start
when
dinner,"
not
one a
nothing
Second,
to
is therefore of any
sentence.
dispose
a
"
of
these the
words
as
conjunctive adverb
one
gives
For
its sentence in
meaning
man
exactly
made
opposite
his
to
of the
intended.
a junctive con-
example, is, he
died
(tfterhe made
so as
will," if after i8
the idea There is but
adverb,
That
event
modify
will
express
of time.
one
made
after. After
what?
other
mentioned
that
is,his death.
words
No,
clauses.
prepositionsgoverning
seems
the
following
why
not
f
a
(6)
in;-^
object
of
sometimes preposition
to
be
phrase,
as
THE
PREPOSITION.
187
has
lived
since above
before the
war,
came spirit
the clouds.
,
stream
runs
under
the rocks.
convenient
call since
before,from
above, from
the
under,
combinations,
compound
prepositions,
governing
following 481.
substantives.
The
antecedent It may
"The
*'
of
a
"
preposition
is the
word
the
phrase
(1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (6) 482. in the
List.
"
limits.
verb:
noun:
be:
iies
on
A A A An
An
book
saw
'"
the
table."
We
:
the be
city in flames."
unto
pronoun
Woe
"
you
to
adjective
adverb
"
All
reverence
hoary
for
with my
age." purpose."
I have
:
read
the for
book
An
interjection The
^^Alas
maiden,
judge." used
are
prepositionsmost following
"
commonly
given
according to,
around beside
or
across,
or
after,against,
as
along, amid,
amongst,
round,
to,
at,
during, except,
out
for,
until,
on,
towards, under,
either
with, within,
Most
of the
comic. A is We
now
(b)
noun
rarely used
went
a
as
preposition except
all the other
before
participial
; as.
fishing.
as
is used
nearly
much
as
prepositionstogether.
Parsing of Prepositions.
parse it
a
preposition
it shows
is to state
the
part of speech
antecedent
to
belongs, and
which
name
the
object and
to
the
It is
generallyvery
answer
object
of but
antecedent;
the
both.
to
(1)
find
Put the
the
interrogativewhat
then
object;
(2) put
preposition interrogative
188
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
what
"
before
the
phrase to
find antecedent.
For
that they dashed rapid torrent Frantically, the torrent. Through (1) Through what? Dashed through the through the torrent? 485. Kodel. 1. He
came
example : through."
(2) What
torrent.
Preposition.
from
the
2.
Relation.
3.
Rule.
city.
shows
From^ prep.,
came,
A.
and
the* relation
between
cityand
R. (1)
He
XIII.
went
with
us.
(2)
(3) (5) point
B. of
It fell Put it
through
on
the
air to the
or
ground. pocket
shelter. the
the
table until
night
from
moves
St. Louis, in
plains, to
in
(6) Light
all directions
emission. sable
(1) Night,
In
goddess
her
ebon
throne. Young,
rayless majesty,
leaden
came
now a
stretches
forth
"
Her
sceptre o'er
but
slumbermg world.
holds she
(2)
All To
Mary.
in the with love of nature
(3)
him
who
her
"
visible
forms,
speaks
language.
mouth he
Bryant.
the Six Hundred.
Into
of hell rode
came.
changed
after he
since
saw
you.
I shall go She
leaves.
come. ere
will wait
(9^ They
will leave
must
you
are
aware.
(10)
You
stay until
the
train
of the State of the character (11) The eulogium pronounced on Carolina, by the honorable gentleman, for her revolutionary and
merits, meets
C.
my
hearty
to
concurrence.
"
Webster,
(1)
From
peak
the
unto
peak,
the
"
rattlingcrags among,
Byron,
live thunder.
day
19. from with
uttereth
speech,
and
night
unto
night
of
showeth
Psalm
came
passed
the
company
many
eminent
cities.
THE
PBEPOSrriON.
189
mind,
"
(4)
Ah
can
tell the
triumphs by
taste
of the
By
illumined,
choice
and
refined.
the
Sogers.
(5) (6)
(7) Helena,
Or
plant, so grateful to
not
Which He
in I know the
what
ChurchilL
plains to
of
search
for
was
gold.
banished to St
battle
Waterloo,
Ocean.
Napoleon
Atlantic
(8) (9)
bog
or
rare.
"
feet,pursues
his way.
Milton.
At
midnight,
The Turk
guarded tent.
of the hour in
lay dreaming
When
suppliance bent.
and
"
Should In The
at his power.
camp
court, he bore
Halleck.
(10) 486.
la.
He
from
ruins.
Outline
Kinds.
of
Prepositions,
Terms
16.
Adjective. SYNTAX
OP
487. its
Rule
"
objectto
(a)
When but
the
a
of
object of
an
preposition is adjective:
*^It
usually
around,
becomes and
an
adverbj
sometimes
down
again." (6)
iron
J
the may
plains
have
same
ftcZow?."
preposition
antecedents;
as,
^*
They wash,
*'A
sleep in the
may the may
antecedent
have
prepositions ; as,
the
ment govern-
of
people, by
preposition
people,
have and
for
people."
as,
"
One all
several
objects;
positive law
fraud, falsehood,
violenceJ*^
190
GRAMMAR
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(e)
and
One
object may
the
He halV
several
prepositions;
and voted
as,
**
He
ran
across
"
voted
for^
the
Better,
approved of
for it."
48d. Use
may I. IV. Choice.
Prepositions. All
"
error
in the
use
of prepositions
Omission.
be reduced II.
to
"
Position.
III.
Insertion
or
Sepetition.
I.
CHOICE.
489.
expresses should itself.
Great
care
should
be taken
always
to
select doubtful
the
preposition that
the ary dictionthe
precisely the
be consulted
intended.
In
cases,
and
preposition
Exercises
The He The
to he corrected
was
and
with
then
a
parsed :
"
sultry evening
died with
a
followed
rain.
fever
(means
Senate
both
died).
House of
(4) Congress (5) Of what (6) Religion (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Charles The He
and
?
Representative^.
with each
happiness
in
consist
Christianity may
you
differ
widely
other,
I differ from
opinion.
in the creek.
were
dropped
out
his dollar
barbarous.
of
fine
morning.
between his son,
I have He
been
to New
Orleans.
(12)
divided
his estate
daughter,
and
nephew.
H.
POSITION.
491.
(1)
As
Phrases
should
be
so
placed
in
the
sentence
as
to
make
it
(2)
its
name
preposition
should
generally
be
placed
before
object. and
with
a
Exercises
We We These
saw a man a
to he corrected
then
Roman
parsed :
nose.
"
digging
lecture
were on
well
heard
verses
teaching geography by
to
a
at
written
young
man
long
since
^is grave
Wanted. mind.
"
for
amusement.
man
(4)
turn
A. yoxxng
take
care
of
horses
of
religious
of
THE
PREPOSITION.
191
(5) (6)
He Whom
went
to
see
his friends
on
horseback.
did
he
give
it to ?
II.
INSERTION
AND
OMISSION.
493.
proper
(1) Prepositions
connection of the should
should different
not
not
be
so
as
to
destroy
the
the
parts
omitted
sentence.
be
required by
sense.
to he corrected
to remonstrate.
and
then
parsed :
"
in vain
to your
use
brother
me
to
whom
was
indebted.
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
is it to
not
could
shedding
other say. have side
tears.
the
Rocky
from
Mountains.
I admit
(7) Many
(9)
He
was
deserted
(8) California
is not
noted which
gold
right in
is the
that
blame
as
him.
as
(10) Ignorance
mother
of fear
well
admii-ation.
IT.
REPETITION.
495.
one
(1)
or
preposition having
several
objects object
must
be
used
before
only,
each, of them.
each renders the sentence
(2)
To
sometimes
forcible.
496. (1)
fortune.
to he corrected
of
and
then
and of
parsed:
honesty.
he luck
"
sagacity, experience,
economy, and
(2) By industry, by
by good
accumulated
497. (1)
a
Beview
Define the How
of
Prepositions.
(2)
verb How ? does
a
preposition.
is it unlike
a
preposition
other
verb
? you
?
(3)
name?
(4)
What
relation from
can
(5.)What
and of
a
distinguishes
the classes be ?
the of What
preposition
the
(6)
Name
illustrate
prepositions. (7)
may may
;
one
the
object
preposition
the have
one
Illustrate. One
(8)
Name
prepositions
that
govern
(9)
have
preposition
have
may
several
antecedents have
antecedent
several
prepositions ;
several illustrate
preposition may
errors common
several
objects ;
object may
prepositions.
the
Illustrate
with
originalsentences.
use
in the
of
prepositions.
192
GBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
8ENTEK0E.
THE
CONJUNCTION.
498. 2. 3. 4. We He
1. Men should
and be
be industrious. children
to say
and
with
horses.
endeavored rain
are
and
something.
The
descended weak
came
9JiSithe
5.
6.
Words The In
children each
to
see
us.
499.
two
sentence
above
ideas
seen
that
the that
italicized word
two
parts express
black Such words
are^related,and
relation and
the the
in
type expresses
are
this
joins
parts.
A
conjunctions.
500. is to
Conjunction is the part of speechwhose only office Or, a Conjunction is the part of speech express relation.
is only office In the
to connect sentences
whose
601.
connect
on
coordinate
parts; in the
last
part
the
the
or right explains,
is subordinate
left.
(a)
and
use
The
conjunction
adverbs has
is not
are no
the
only
comMctive.
Relative
have also
a
pronouns
conjunctive
; the
connectives, but
they
in the
a
modifying
conjunction
indicates
modifying
that
force
sentence.
(")
it other.
The
conjunction,
the
preposition, is
the
relation
word, because
bear
to
always
parts connected
each
(c)
the expresses it is
an
The
verb unlike
also both
is
relation
word
; it is
always
the finite
connective.
not
But
verb,
the but
preposition
and
a
conjunction, verb,
or
only
it if
the
relation
or a
affirms it if it is
assumes
infinitive The
participle.
is like
assume
(d) being
conjunction
to
the the
preposition
relation
over
and
unlike
the the
verb
in
unable in
affirm
no
or
; but
it is unlike
sition prepo-
having
governing power
substantives. of
a
(c)
From
"
all these
conjunction
to express
will
cleariy
appear,
t^at part
of speech
is only office
relation.
THE
CONJUNCTION.
198
502.
A
Two
conjunction may
independent
hearts
are
join :
"
(1)
and
Bentencea;
as,
**
Young
heads
are
giddy ^ happy,
young
warm,''''
(2)
because
dependent
sentences;
drunkard
**
as,
**The
child
is
not
father
words;
is
and and
(3)
as,
Mary
**
(4)
we
phrases;
**
as,
The
to
boy
learn
out
use
of
can
torn-fieldJ*^
leam.^^
We
should
try
all
remember
(5)
succeed
A U
subordinate
we
sentence
and
part of
principal;
as,
**
We
try,
''^
OF
OONJIIirOTIOirS. be
most
Conjunctions
two
may
"
conveniently classified
meaning.
either coordinate
or
different As
to
bases,
use
and
are
1186;
conjunctions
Conjunction is
one
that
joins elements
joins a
siibordi-
having the
506.
note
grammatical
to
construction.
one
Subordinate
some
Cdnjimction is
that
sentence
(a)
instance
The
one
thing of importance
the conjunction
to
determine
in
every
whether A
is codrdinate may
subordinate,
(6)
two
co5rdinate
; as, to
**
conjunction
We
saw
**
join
and but
two
words,
**
two went
phrases,
or
sentences
Samuel
Peter,^''
She
to Fhilar-
delphia and
Brooklyn,''^
**
Mary
rode
Philip
a
VHilked.''^
sentence
(c)
Apart
subordinate
subordinate because
to
of the
**
principal ;
He
was
to
the
front
to
he
**
wanted
was so
to Jiear.''^
knew
not
what
say.*^
She
slow
that
we
missed
507. 508.
As
to
meaning, conjunctionsare
"
Copulative,denoting addition;
"John will
or
as,
and^ also^likewise.
him."
work
and
I shall
help
509.
Adversative,
Disjunctive,denoting opposition ;
as,
hut^ nevertheless^whereas.
**We
went
but
they
did
not
go."
194
6BAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
510.
in
pairs;
,
as,
.
.
both
. . .
and^
either
or^
^^
neither
. .
.
nor,
and
whether
its mother
were
or.
Both
the
child
there."
611.
to
denote
one
of
two
tives; alterna-
"George 512.
or
his
brother
will
Causal,
**
one
introducing a
because
one
causal
because^
since^ for.
He
came
he
wanted
to
a
see
me."
613.
as,
Conditional,
**
iwtrodu-dng
him
some
conditional
clause;
if.
I shall pay
if
he
insists
upon
it."
are
(a) And,
as
other any
conjunctions
power
often
; as,
"
used And he
merely
it came did it."
as
without
connecting
Such
to
to
^^
That shall
it is doubted." man?"
.**I believe
words
that be
profit a for
should
parsed
Rule be
or
XVIII.
Or,
as
if it is
thought they
neither
and
some
and
may
sometimes
sentence
parsed
joining what
preceding
such
are
word. words
as as
(6)
. . .
For
convenience,
. . .
correlative
either
or,
nor,
both
and,
words
commonly
but and,
parsed
correlative
but
in
reality the
no
both,
the
are
having by
the
force
in the
or,
sentence
parts that
joined
following
nor,
and
clauses
that
express
cause,
*^
conclusion,
of me,
"
effect
I
am
are
sometimes and he
called
illative heart."
conjunctions
"
; as,
Learn am."
for
was
meek
lowly
was or
in
I think,
therefore I
in
He
honest, hence
trusted."
(d)
the
two
In
studying
teaching
subordinate
the
conjunction, keep
are
:
mind
that f
(1) What
does
it connect
(2)
Is it codrdinate
514. 1. 2.
Parsing of Conjunctions.
Species.
Class.
3. 4.
'
Sub-class. Construction.
CoObdinatb.
are
6.
Rule.
(1) Oxygen
and
hydrogen
gases. and
{Words.)
to
a
(2)
He
strove
with
noble
end.
(JPhrases.)
THE
CONJUNCTION.
195
pluck
the flowers.
(3)
You
may
walk
into
the
garden
but you
must
not
(Sentences,)
(4)
Plato
was
both
philosopher
and
poet.
(Correlative.)
Subordinate.
(5)
His
friends he
trusted
him
because
he
was
honorable.
tries he
always
fails.
conj., cop.
; it connects
the
two
nouns,
oxygen
and
gen, hydro-
cop.
; it connects
the
two
phrases,
noble
end, R. XII.
connects not
(3) But,
walk into
the
two
sentences, you
XII.
may
the
and
are
you
must
pluck
(4)
Or
Both the
and
noun
introduces, and
poet, R. XII.
and
connects,
two
phrases,
philosopher
words
and
better.
and
.
Both and
a
are
correlative cop.
both
is
an
expletive
two
noun
ducing, intro-
is
co"r.
a
conjunction connecting
XII. and Article 613
; it connects
the
phrases
orable, hon-
philosopher
to
and
poet, R.
(6).
the
(5) Because,
the
conj.,subor., causal
R. XII.
clause, he clause, he
was
verb, trusted,
it connects
the
tries,to
(a) (6)
as
Some
prefer, and
and call
with
reason,
a
to
consider
such
sentences
as
the
last compound,
In
although
the
coordinate connected
are
conjunction.
to be
parsing, require
above. That
parts
classified definitely
etc.
is done
is,say they
nouns,
phrases, verbs,
515.
A.
Selections
and
for
Rome he
Parsing.
were
rival powers.
at home.
but
remained
or
all must
work
starve.
me.
if
he
both
and the
our
money.
street
of the
must
yard
either
he
or
rushed.
return
hasten
me,
march
by night
(8) Though
B.
he
slay
us
him.
(1) (2)
And That
now
let
were was
proceed.
mistaken is evident. wise. the open
you
(3) (4)
Aristides Not
both
just and
fears
day.
.
196
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
BNGUSH
SBNTENCE.
(6) Scrooge
over.
"
went
to
bed
again,
afid
thought it
over
and
over
and
Dickens. work
storms
(6)
Men
must
and
be
women
must
weep,
Though
hidden
and
waters
deep.
"
Kingaley.
(7)
For Than
none
made
sweeter
melody boy.
green
"
did
blind
was as
Wordsworth,
or
(8) Whether
(9)
Men
must
thing
taught
valuable
if
hut
you
taught
that
not. iron.
a
less useful
me
o"
he (/*
believed
thief.
tired.
to
(13) Johnson
(14)
(16) 616.
la. I believe He
was
went
Congress,
he knew
while
his
children
went
to the
tentiary peni-
and
to the
gallows.
is truthful.
not
him, because
silent, for of
to
he
what
to say.
Ontline
aa
Conjunctions,
that
ClaBsea 16.
Use.
:
Co'drdinate
One
joins elements
having
the
same
granmiat-
ical construction.
25. Subordinate
:
One
that
to
some
part of
principal sentence.
2a. ClasaeB lb. 26. 36. 46.
as
to
meaning. Denoting
:
Copulative:
Adversative Correlative: Alternative
as,
"
addition
.(and, also,likewise).
and
. . .
Denoting
Used in
to
pairs (both
assert
one or
or.
: or
Used James
the
other
of
two
alternatives ;
John One he
:
will
go."
a
56.
Causal:
because
introducing
went." One
causal
clause;
as, **I
shall
not
go,
66.
Conditional
came
introducing
learn."
conditional
clause ;
as,'
**
He
that he
might
OF
OOKJUirOTIOlSrS.
connect
Conjunctions
words^ phrases^
sentences.
A
Two TiKTO
coordinate
independent dependent
conjunction may
aentencea
:
connect
went
"
as, ^^John
*^
and
Mary
came.^^
me
aentencea
; as,
I shall go
if he invites
and
after """."
THE
CONJUNCTION.
197
Two
prepositional
takes
phraaea
; as,
'^
Up
the mountain
and
through
to
infinitive
phraaea
; as,
**
He
tries to be
honest, and
be
industrious.''^ Two
participial phraaea
into
nouna
; as,
**
saw
him
standing
on
the bank
looking (6)
T'wo and Two
^*
the
water.
or
"
'^'^
either and
with
or
without
modifiers
; as,
"
He
/ went."
(7) (8)
verba,
He
with
a
without and
^^
He
\oent
and
turned?'* re-
bought
book
; as,
**
read
man
through.^^
and
Two Two
adjeotiLvea
adverba
The
is wise
great.^"*
the
(9)
; as,
Slowly
and
silentlycame
night."
519.
sentence
A
to
subordinate
some
part
to
the
principal.
It
may
join its
sentence
**
; as,
He
learns as,
beoanae conduct
h^ studies
was
^^ diligently.
adjective;
adverb
^^His
such
that
he
was
missed.''^ dis-
(3)
(a)
An
; as,
^*
He
was
so
slow
that
they
the
all
left^I'm." hy
It has
heen
stated
by
some
authors of the
same
that
parts connected
coordinate
conjunctions
and
must
he
to
class ; hut
speakers
or an
follow.
; as, out
same
prepositional phrase
cannot
joined
The if
some one
to
an
adjective
adverh and
**I
hut
think rule
somewhat
constrained
must
of place.'*'* The
grammatical
must
should
parts part
connected is
an
be in the
construction be
a an
adjective,the
used
as an
other
part
and he
either
adjective,or
the of the have
expression
a
adjective;
part must
if
one
part is
as
noun,
object
same
of
certain
verh, the
verbs
other
used
the
object
verh.
same
Generally,
mode
and The
joined by
co5rdinate
connectives
should
the
tense.
(")
conjunction although
it modifies
; but
is sometimes
said be
to
join a
^
to participle
the
must ellipsis
always
supplied
the
as,
*'The
although
that is not
[he was]
connective
piece
perfectly."
(c)
**
The
word
it introduces
substantive
as,
appositive
**
element;
Astronomers
suns,
are
is the
"
belief
* *
of
astronomers."
believe
are
suns.
The
astronomer^s
are suns
suns."
The
stars
is held
by
astronomers."
198
The
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(d)
conjunction
it
in the
tJian sometimes
follows
the words
sentence
else,other, and
to
an
rather, but
an
subordinate
as,
adjective
than I
or
degree;
**He
is
better
am."
*^He
(e)
words,
as,
subordinate both Do be
sentence,
in the say,
limiting
is old
two ;
they
comparative degree
**He
as
^*He than
is older L"
and
I.**
not
and
wiser
(/)
tiou
It is claimed
by good grammarians
sentences.
that
the
coordinate
conjunct
tives alternato
always
The as,
**
joins two
word A
or
(g)
;
an
has
or
two
uses
(1)
rules
To in
or
come
between
"
two
king
term
queen
;
always
**
England
supreme
(2)
precede always
explanatory
in
as,
sovereign,
in the the
governor,
rules
England.**
When is
a
(h)
Mary, (Q
Or
series
of
words before
same
construction
**
is
used,
the
placed only
and and
a
last ; as,
We
saw
John, James,
collective
Peter.**
conjunction
as, "Paul them
m^y Peter
give
to
the
parts
signification ;
it may
(together) weigh
the have
as some
pounds.**
and Peter
give
distributive
sentences sentence.
signification;as,
two
(each) weigh
Each is
a
coal.**
As
the
disposition.
to
partial compound
with and
a
Or,
prefer
call it,a
simple 0)
sentence
compound
should
nor
subject. always
and or; the introduce as,
Neither
either
parts that
he
nor nor
are
nected con-
by
were
the
corresponding
**
''^Neither
his friends
present.**
**
It neither
improves
understanding,
nor
delightsthe
be,
"
heart.**
He
neither
improves
nor
his farm
his
mind,**
of
should
are
He
improves
too
his mind.**
; but
Many
the
feood writers
entirely
must not
careless
correlatives
student writers
composition
must
remember attributed
whatever
excellence
such
possess
be
their
carelessness.
520.
Parse
all the
conjunctions. changes
because the
"
Rewrite
incorrect
tences, sen-
maMn^
(1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (6) (7)
That
we
the necessary
this summer,
he
desires
it.
us
fully
imderstand
subject, let
him.
nor
consider
the
following propositions.
Neither Our John Tones He is
flatterynor Baptist
threats
could be
move
judgments
the
are
should came,
neither
hasty
unjust.
nor
eating neither
from old
as
bread and
drinking
wine.
different,both
not
so
emphasis
his brother.
pauses.
but taller,
THE
CONJUNCTION.
199
(8)
Webster.
He
was
as
eloquent,
and
perhaps
even
more
eloquent
than
It We This
is
as
good,
and consistent is
or
better, ought
to
than do
mine.
may, is
good
with
to
others.
neither wise
logic,
he
can
nor
history. something
or more.
There I do
not
no
one
so
but he is
learn
(13)
(14) (16) (16)
know
in be
Boston,
New
York.
Read He If No The
I
distinctly,
is
you
may
understood.
poor.
honest,
are
judgment
he will fact
is
you
one
(17) (18)
(19) (20) (21)
will
great
inventor.
yard
have
street.
might
I
am
company,
but
they
have
gone.
go
were
unless
invited. shall he
Though
he
dead,
yet
live.
521.
Beview
of
Conjunctions.
Illustrate.
(1)
words each. words illustrate
?
Define
conjunction.
name? does the
(2)
showing
differ
What the
can
you How
Illustrate, conjunction
may of
a
(3)
from
(4)
the
What
two
parts classes
connect.
conjunction
as
join
to
(6)
Name,
define,
and what
conjunctions (7)
Discuss
use.
(6)
Illustrate
parts
each
may
(a)
What ? do
Correlative
conjunctions,
of
most
(6)
Introductory
in the
conjunctions. study
of the
(8) conjunction
yOu
consider
portance im-
200
GBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
THE
INTERJECTION.
^^
0, pshaw^ he is
words
too
emotional, but
alas^ I
am
like
The that
italicized
come
above
ideas.
express
isolated
are
feelings
tions. interjec-
in
between
They
called
523.
an
An
Interjectionis
an
exclamatory word
comes
used
to
press ex-
isolated
feelingthat
in
between
thoughtsor
ideas.
(a)
The
word
interjectionmeans thoughts
sentences
no
thrown
or
between. the
That word
is,the
that
tion emo-
is thrown it is thrown
in between in between
ideas, and
expresses
or
parts of sentences.
and
no name
classes
properties.
its part of
To
parse
an
simply interjection,
speech, referrmg
Rule
XVII.
OF An
"
depend
to the
word.
classified into
according
:
"
express,
(1) Joy
eigh, hey,
: :
io.
(2) (3)
(5)
Sorrow Wonder
indeed.
(4) Wish,
Praise
earnest,
:
address
(generallyfollowed
by
noun).
what.
whew,
fear
: :
(8) Contempt
Aversion
(10) Expulsion
Desire
begone, avaunt,
for attention
boy, ahoy.
THE
INTERJECTION.
201
(12)
ah,
aha,
huzza,
hey,
te-hee-he. all-hail
heyday,
hurrah.
(13)
(14)
ha^Jia-ha,
:
he-he-he, hail,
:
welcome, ho,
(16) (16)
(17) (18) (19) (20) good by, (21) (22) (a)
Do
not
Call
Call
for for
la,
law,
look, ^st,
aw,
see,
mum.
beheld,
hark.
hy:8h,
:
whist, hah,
what.
Dread,
or
oh,
Languor,
Desire for
or
weariness
heigh-ho,
avast,
heigh-ho-hum.
whoa. of
stop
caused
hold,
soft,
the
by
thought
parting:
farewell^
adieu,
day,
that that
good
follows
night.
a
discovery: interrogation
in the absence
to
oho,
:
aha,
ehfhaf
ay
ay.
prompts
hey
use
interjections
course
of
too
corresponding
emotions.
the
of
thought
be
frequently
interrupted
by
emotions*
202
6BAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE;.
IXFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
In
other
places it
has
been
teach
the
subject of
neglect
them of the guage. lan-
teach
some
applicationto
lessons that in it will be the
give
technical clear
most
I shall
try
present,
is with
young
teachers, what
regarded
as
perhaps
; that
subjectconnected Participles.
Orammar,
to
this branch
is, Infini-
Difficult is no. is
so
Study.
other
"
I think branch
perhaps
it is safe the
common as
say
schools well
as
which
much
teacher
the idea
or
the
pupils.
one
Many
may still be
me,
one
"
teachers hold
to have
that indeed
in grammar
no
almost
any
ion, opin-
book it ;
thing
fuses con-
another the
book
will
contradict
never
this, of
knows
course,
class and
the teacher
a
what
a
to do."
sad
a one
state
of
if it is affairs,
extent
reality,
another.
sure
that
to
very
great
and
it is. book
It is true
one
book
will say
thing
that
another the
a
It is true,
pupils,and, pity
cases
though
teacher
it
also
not
in what
majority of
to do.
the
himself
"
does
know
But
remains
or
Is this the ?
of subject, is
a
books,
as
of the
teachers
I hold
grammar
science
INFINITIVES
AND
PAETICIPLBS.
203
exact
as
any
taught in
;
our
schools, with
that in almost
the
and
if the
to
his fact
business, he may
that the books
what
do,
regardless of
may
are
Well, how
to all that
me
he
know
in the
superintendent.
that
Let
tell
structed con-
you.
First,let it be understood
language
is not
on according to anybody's text-book grammar. should On the contrary, everybody's text-book on grammar have been constructed according to the language. This is The earth was in all science. true not formed according to anybody's text-book on geology, but all the text-books
"
on
geology
have
as
been any
one one
written that
to
explain
the
of the
earth,
suppose
are
examines says
one
it may
Now,
know
geology
to
thing
and the
another,
to
the
to
pupils
do ?
be
;
confused
on
teacher
are
what earth
No
the
contrary, they
from
on
go to the
itself and
find for
themselves different
its construction.
Suppose they
of both which is their
the statements
books
geology,
It is not
right,the
to
answer
text-books?
necessary method
of
teaching grammar
The
tific scienquestion. Now, this same a subject may be applied in investigating in any other branch. as as successfully
must
teacher, however,
and literature
be
familiar sufiiciently
to
language
what
in
;
general
know
what text-books
is not with
good
is to
usage
then, if he finds
use
reference
to the
of any
he
has
to do
step to
which that
one
the
blackboard
of
sentence
see
speech
class the
for themselves
text-books the
with
language.
text-books which is
Suppose
have
it You
text-books the
all the
and
sure
language another,
right ?
may
it is the
language.
But
204
GBAHMAB
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
do
not
understand with
the
me
to
say
that
the teacher
should be
on a
text-book.
one
foolish
for any
that
text-book
have likely
better
what
understanding of
I
mean
it than
but the
is
this, that
the
by
statements
of
and what
text-book
the
usages
soon
of
be
our
best
to
writers
speakers, the
text-book that
is is
teacher
most
will
able
determine
the
nearly in
one
accordance
with
language, and
Teachers
a
the
that he should
may
not
adopt
on
be
most
aware
of the
fact, but
it is
fact
that
upon This other is true
books
on
geology
rather in
have
been
books
geology
on
than
upon
with
text-books
is it true nine
with
text-books of
one-hundredths
grammars the ideal for
them
than
on
other
But that
rather text-book
this
subject-matterthe English sentence, as in literature. So spoken and written by great masters of words is concerned, the Engfar as construction or use lish
has
its
language
is very
now
pretty
well
settled,and
in
our
there
is
no
necessityfor
Nor
on
much
disagreement
for the
or
text-books.
is there the
need
for confusion
part of the
of the
teacher,
keep
the
in
by referring to usage in the ence, language, always remembering that, when there is a differthe best text-book must give up in favor of language. to the investigation let us apply this scientific method Now
statement
of infinitives 528. A
and
participles.
of Other
"
Knowledge
Languages
Let Some
me
not
Necessary
another and
to
an
Understanding of English.
statement
make
inary prelimteachers
just here.
text-books
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
205
are
responsible for
understand
pupil to
must
understand used
could in be
misunderstanding, that for. the he English infinitives and participles and also the infinitives as participles
the the
Greek,
absurd.
so
the
etc.
more
have
see
it before
us,
that any
also he
it
is,and
at it
look
may
what
it
is,and
know
of
that it will be
those
what
from
it
nature
languages
which
much
some
which
Even
English words have been taken, and after of our English syntax has been modelled. of the new text-books on just now grammar
use
appearing
of
away
the
Latin
names
cases,
verbs,
;
etc.
are
The
as
teacher
throw times
books
be
a
they
on
much
behind that
would
treatise
anthropology
the
names
giving
footed
to
an
them
ancestors.
This in
foreign languages
artifice
on
classifymen by fourformerly applied to our practice of continuallyreferring teaching English is in most cases
teacher
or
would
the
part of the
writer
to
conceal
his
ignorance of English itself. Suppose tliat the foreign language agrees in its syntax with the English, we must the understand the note English syntax before we can
agreement
throw
on
;
our on
and
after
we
understand
back
it, what
English
the other
to go
to the
lightwill it foreignlanguage?
English syntax differs from the foreign; then, again, a knowledge of the foreign will throw no light on the syntax of the English. So that the thing for the teacher of English to learn is that he is teaching English,not Latin, Greek, German, or French, or anything else.
529. What Part of
Suppose,
hand, the
Speech.
"
Let
and
us
determine
to what
infiuitive
the
they be
made
to constitute
are
206
GBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
follow
our
scientific
method,
and Let
we us
their scientist
part of speech.
not
the upon
method
an
the
would
was
that he do ? he
is
animal
must
with.
he
class
must
Evidently he must class it with some already familiar with, or else he must for it. If it differs materiallyfrom
do the
to
animals
a new
others, he
he the the
latter
if not, the
former.
he he
Now, knows;
decides
class it with
which
the
animals
question arises,Into
class that it most 530. The
class shall
put it ?
do the
nearly
reserniles.
"
Scientific Method.
We
must
same
with
themselves
animal
could
; some
to
class
wolf, others
what is to be
fox, and
done ?
still others
Now let it
Bring
every
in
the
to
testify.Suppose
characteristic
suppose
that
it be found
essential
and
phase
of
its nature
with
bears, and
that, notwithstanding
in ?
this, a committee
it a calling
of scientists
;
high
to do
authority persistin
I think all sensible
wolf
what
the
"
are
we
people
631.
would
take
The Final
to
Test.
condition
with
respect
have
infinitives that
and have
participles. Most
been
grammarians,
those especially
considered
high authority,
not
declared
that
infinitives and
claimed
are participles
that What
they
should
be
test ?
that Be
part of speech.
that
we
sure a
understand
of the verh^and
make
careful examination
in the
note
language of the
English speakers
to
and verbs
whether
them.
they are
found
Now
agree
with
'
to
from differ
532.
Finite Verb"
dp not
always
Assert"
let
us
pro-
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
207
ceed
to make
the
ever
comparison.
been
One
of the
that and
or
has
verbs participles
urged against callinginfinitives that they only ansume is, action, being,
office of is not verbs well
to
state, while
it is the may
assert;
but
this
objectionwe
it is true that
easilysee
finite verbs
infinitives and
is true
also
that
When he
w
you
a
will talk
it
"
over
; peen
"I
do not
believe that
verbs in the
thief."
It may
easily be
come
that
the
subordinate
sentences,
assume;
and there
is^do
never
not
make
been would
assertions^they only
a
yet
or
has
grammarian
that
that
are
any
none
other of
reason
our
deny
they
can
In
subordinate
said
as
sentences
the
finite verbs
still
we
all
to
assert^
they only
assume;
verbs.
"
533.
"
They
Attributive
and
lative. Copu-
It is easy
commonly attributed to verbs apply as well to infinitives and either participles. First, we say that all verbs are in* the sentence, "The attributive or copulative^ man as,
farms^'' we
it does
attribute
"
say
not
the
finite
verb any
farms
other and
man
is attributive
to
cause bethe
require
of its
word
express
it asserts is
are a
subject;
"
in the is
sentences,
we
The
man
farmer," and
The
well,"
In
say their
the verbs
copulative because
words
we
subjectsother
reference
man
that may
express
see
the
sentences to
the
distinction
"
infinitives.
to
a
For is
instance, in
We
We in the
"
want
to
man
farm^'*
to
farm
attributive, and
"
We
man
the
he
farmer," and
are
want
he
well," the
from these
infinitives sentences,
the finite
copula, may
208
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
predicateadjective.
534. Transitiye
are
Show
that
have participles
the
same
uses.
and
IntranBitive.
or
"
We
say
that
all finite
verbs
either "John
transitive
intransitive* "The it
a
Thus, in the
sentences,
the
plows
is
as
the
field," and
boy rwns^''
the
;
verb
of is
plow
a
transitive, because
represents
receiver action of
action
rwM
doer
terminating
because the
:
"
upon
and
as
intransitive
it
represents the
The John
same
doer. We
want
to
is true
the
to
the
boy
is
to
as
run.'''' To parse
the
object;
I have the
and
to
run
clearlyintransitive.
one
yet been
to any
able
learn, no
has
attributed and
classes. Copulativeand
other
Attributive^ Transitive
verbs.
"
transiti In-
Show run.^^
with the
that
participles may
Begular and
be used
to
and plow'*''
same
to
535.
Irregular.-^_ The
is true
Irregular. Every regular verb, like to plow^ and plow^ has its infinitive and its participle, sponding plowing; also every irregularverb like see has its correinfinitive and participle, to see^ and seeing.
classes,Begular and
636.
May
express
Action, Being,
and
or
State.
"
We
milst
serve, ob-
too, that
infinitives
finite
verb, may action, as, to run^ running ; being, as, express to 6e, being^or state, as, to standi standing; although as
can
only
assume^
not
assert, this
May
be modified
by Adverbial
and
Elements.
"
It may finite
"
be
infinitives
verbs,
may
to
by
adverbial
the
sun
as,
when
is hot,^^
from
638.
Voice.
"
find
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
209
the
also
that
infinitives and
and
same
erties, propto
voiee^ mode^
finite verbs. killed say in
a
always given
sentences,
"
For
take illustration,
"A
the
John We
snake," and
the verbs
sentence
snake
was
killed
by
John."
that
one
have
the the
verb
doer^ and
reason, sentences
we
in
other say
the
receiver.
may have
want
that
:
"
the
following
snake,"
"The
voice
the
We
want
to
to kill the
and
"We
snake
is my
a
be killed
by
"
John."
brother," and
The
snake
being
copperhead."
clear,also, that infinitives and Indeed,
no
539.
Mode.
"
It is
have
mode.
other be
verbs
seen
"
can
undisputed
sentences
claim
:
"
to
mode,
"
as
may
from
"
"I The
to
may
go"
of other
mode
the
(indicative), (imperative), I go "If I may (potential), go" (subjunctive). the finite verb go depends upon its relation
in
a
Go
words
sentence
but
as
the
to
infinitive and
mode. As
leave
us
we
in doubt
their
them,
know
that
their
peculiarmanner
by asserting. Thus, in and "The "I the sentences, the man to go^'^ want man having gone we did not see him," to go and having gone without in the senat once, show tence, consideringother words that they assume the action. have 540. Tense. Now, do infinitives and participles ? tense First, let us find out why finite verbs have tense. because Finite verbs have tense they can be used so as to mark But different periods of time. infinitives and participles
of
"
can
mark
"
different
the
man now
periods of
to be ;
time.
Thus, in the
I believe
sentence,
that the the
I believe
man man
is honest
to have
and
sentence,
"
thought is,that
he
210
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
was
honest
some
can
time
in
two
the
past.
called
So
that
these words
distinct
periods in
Present
they,
therefore, have
Perfect.
541. Time
tenses
Present
"
A with
very the
important
tenses
and
very
practicalquestion
and
of
pressed ex-
infinitives
is participles
"
What
is the time
The by each of the tenses ? only statement is commonly found in the grammars the time is,that by infinitives and participles depends upon sentence." expressed by the finite verb in the same
"
that
pressed ex-
that
In
statement
is not
always
the
true.
The
often in the
expressed by
no
the
infinitive and
to that
seen
participle
finite verb
"
reference
whatever
may
of the the
sentence,
to be to be to be
as
be
from
following:
once
done, done,
congressman.
done, is
congressman. be
a
mUn
will
congressman.
In
the
to
next
place,the
any infinitive
statement
even
is not when
nite defisufficiently
give
information and
it is true.
When
upon
to
time
of the
participledoes depend
The
time
of the without
finite
exception.
of
the
present
and present participle is present infinitive Thus that of the finite verb. :
"
with
referenceto
He He He He He He
came comes
(past)
to the
front
to hear to
will
came comes
hear
speaker.
front
to hear
(future)the speaker.
(past).
will
(future)stumbling (future).
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
211
From infinitive
the sentences
and
given
above
we
see
that
the
present
to be
express is also
past time^
seen
that their
present with
"
reference
to
that
of
finite verb."
Second.
that
The
sentence.
For
He He He
been have
will believe
to have
The
same
may
observed
to be
of
participles:
"
Having
Having Having
recites it
It will be
seen
that
the
perfectinfinitive
either
^'
participle,
the
express says,
present^past, ov future
time
time, but
of the 542. that when
as
the
rule
The
expressed by
perfectinfinitive
The
and
is previous perfectparticiple
to that
finite verb."
Subject of
and
an
Infinitive.
"
I have
as
already sho^yn
verbs, may,
infinitives
finite
V I want
him
"
to
learn
the
me
to
now
believe
Aim."
to
Having
that that
seen
him
have
we
came
home."
wish
explain
us
they
subjects also.
must
Grammarians
because it of it
some
all tell
We ;
have
jects, sub-
cannot
assert
a
without
us,
asserting
we
actor
but,
to
as
convince
find
assuming it of for saying that So we have the same actor. some reason infinitives and participles have subjects. It is true must that some grammarians deny that infinitives have subjects.
assume
equally difiicult
without
212
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
For
not
instance, in such
seijtences
as,
"
For
him
to act
so
is
called is not
a
him
the
object
of
the
tence, senno
for. preposition
for
more
"
for
preposition in
of relation. that in the
this
it has
antecedent is the
so
term
It is
word
sentence,
Both
use
That
is not
honorable."
no
ar^
other
introduce
their
sentences.
But is
a
suppose
those
that
/or
preposition,and
sentence
say
is
read, "To
is not is to
we
honorable do the
must
Who
acting?
say,
"
express
so
all of
our
thought
has any
For
act
is not him
be
as
able honor-
for him."
Now,
if certainly,
this
last
grammatical construction,
infinitive
to act.
it must
of the
"
In
such
sentences
"
We
a
believe
him
to be
truthful," and
be
We
to
be
liar," him
the
should
parsed
as
the
subject of
with
to
the
object of always
some
the
transitive
verb
should
Now
be
parsed
have him
to
in accordance
meaning.
that the
authorities, in
not
a
trying
show for
infinitive that
if
we
does
subject,say,
we truthful,
stance, in-
believe
so
be
fore there-
believe
of But the
him;
to
it is in accordance
with
the of
meaning
believe.
sentence
parse
a
him
as
the
object
that
seems
is too
to next
narrow
be
consistent
"
it will
not
do
in the
sentence,
to parse
We him
believe
as
liar;^^for
the
object
to
of believe
one
gives
;
meaning
two
one
contrary
are
the
intended
sentences
grammaticallyalike.
parsing
o" the the other. of
should of
be
the
subject
the
not infinitive,
object
believe.
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
213
543.
Jn what
is the
case
Case?
"
Another
question
the
What from
of
the
subjectof
of
all the is
be the
that the case foregoingsentences it is true that the same objective ; but subject both of a finite verb and also it
When
finite
is,its
case
is
always
determined When
by
the
verb, and
is therefore
nominative.
it is the
subject of an infinitive only, it is always objective. So the fdllowing is the rule that determines the case of the
subject
does
case,
of
an
infinitive upon
Wh^n
other
the word
subjectof
it is in
an
not
depend
any
the
infinitive objective
544.
-is the
Now, it is instructive to ask also. Why Why? in the objective case? Some subjectof an infinitive
"
grammarians,
and
who
admit
that in
the
infinitive has
subject,
objective case, still insist because it is the subject of the that it is of the influence of a preceding infinitive,but because is incorrect. transitive verb. This, also, I hope to show
Take, for instance, the
him
to be
case
a
that
the
the
sentence
given above,
word
to
"
We
not
believe
liar."
upon
Now,
the
if the
him
does is will
infinitive
6e, and
case
depend governed by
remain the
infinitive
same.
imdergoes,
But let
us
the
infinitive the
a
believe he is
same,
and Here
will he and
read, "We
him
liar."
same
words the
stand
preceding transitive verb believe^for this verb has not been changed. The* the change therefore must depend upon change in case in the sentence when that is made we change the ; that is, infinitive to a finite verb, the objectivehim changes to the he. So we the subject of an nominative infinitive is see preciselythe
relation
214
GRAMMAB
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
in the
objectivecase,
a
for the
same
reason case
that
;
the
subject
it is the
of
finite verb
that
of
case,
an
beeause
mbject of
the In
objective case,
and
because
it is the
a
finite verb of
an so
the the
subject
language
infinitive
is in
because objective,
545. that
True in
is
"
constructed. We
must not
Other
Languages.
a
suppose
to
construction
common
peculiar
and much
the
English language
noticeable,
Latin
on
it is
just as
of their
so
more
account
extended and
inflection, in
and
Greek, and
it is
understood
disposed of
accusative"
by grammarians of those languages. infinitive is in "The subject of an and Q-reenougKs (objective). Allen " 240 (/). "The subject of the infinitive mood
"
the
Latin
Grammar,
is
put
in
the
accusative."
"
Andrew
and
Stoddard's
Latin
Chrammar,
"239.
"
The
subject of
andras
"
"
an
infinitive
'
is in the say
; as,
men
apelthei, They
s
Goodwin^
mood in
Greek
a
Grammar.
clause Greek
"
The in
infinitive the
;
dependent
Bullion's he says, the case." is
has
its subject
accusative."
in Art.
same
"
Grammar.
the the
Art. of
an
729
and
730
When
infinitive
is the
in
with
same
subjectof
verb, it is put
"The
"
the
subject of
the
the
infinitive
Crosby'sGreek
"
Grammar.
has
a
subjectof its own, it is in tive the accusative. When, however, the subject of the infinifrom different the is not principal subject of the Greek Grammar. sentence, it is not expressed." Kuhner^s
When infinitive
"
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
215
subject of an infinitive is governed The subject is in of an infinitive by the rule given above. the objective when it is not dependent upon another word. case Examples of infinitives haviug subjectsdifferent from
So
we see
that
the
those
of the
finite verb
We She He Whom believe
wants
"
him them
to be
mistaken.
to leave.
is the do
man
whom
want
you
thought
your
to be
me.
you
to have
? library
Examples
those
of
infinitives
:
"
whose
subjectsare
mistaken.
the
same
as
intend
to
to be
She
He Who
leave. who
was
is the
wants
man
thought
to
be L
to
have
your
library ? be
:
"
subjectof
noun
an
**
infinitive may
want
; as,
We
**
Paul
want
to
sing for
to
us." us."
to be
pronoun
; as,
We
him
sing for
me
participle
clause I know
thinks
*^
cheating
thinks I say
beating me."
to
Another A that
infinitive
; as,
**
He
to cheat
to be
rob." it to be
He
thinks
that
nothing
about
evi*
nothing."
a
646.
The
Subject of
have
some
Participle.
"
The
noun
like participle,
or
the
that
infinitive, may
subjecta
pronoun
or a
depends
or
upon
word
in the upon
sentence, any
other
:
"
noun
pronoun Thus
that
does
not
a
depend
word.
the
The The
subjectof
of of
a a
participle may
; as,
^*
be also
blushing
**
(1)
(2)
subject
object
Alice
; as,
answered John
yes." stealing
verb
We
saw
watermelons."
(.3)The
admired
complement
of
copulative
*^
verb;
as,
**He
was
man
by everybody."
The
(4)
the
object
of
preposition
^*
; as,
Speak
to the
girl standing by
board, the black-
stove."
(5)
charge
In is
a
apposition
very
as
Johnson,
**
the
wrote
gentleman
to
writing
the
on
fine penman."
He
Jordan,
scientist
having
of the
expedition."
216
In
GKAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
the
preceding
and
sentences
the
words
Alice^ John^
man,
ffirlf gentleman^
subjects of participles,
words,
are
being
is the
also
dependent
words and
other
governed hy
those other
John
etc.
participles. Thus Alice it is the subjectof answered. nominative case, because it is the object of saw^ is objective case, because by
So
we
the
may any
say
that
when
word
not
the in
subjectof
participle
case
depends
the
not
upon
other
is
governed by
that other
word^
the other
word
"
quibbling
at his
with
him. your
not
surprised
come
accepting
proposition.
the
having
leader
in, we
been
conversed
with
him.
(5)
having
we killed,
abandoned
expedition.
first three
of these
sentences,
it will be
observed,
'
used in dependent constructions. are nouns as participles Thus, leavingis the subjectof the verb surprised^ is is the object of the verb understand^ accepting quibbling And the objectof the preposition it will be observed at. is in the possessive also that the subjectof each participle But in the last two sentences, the participles, case. having with any and come having been killed^have no connection and the subjects. except their subjects, part of the sentence
Brown
we
and
sum a
leader^ are
this all up
the in
nominative the
not
absolute
:
case.
So the
may
following rule
When
depend upon any other word in the sentence^ it is in the possessivecase nominative or when the participle is used as a noun in absolute : possessive a dependent construction^and absolute when the participle, with its subject, is used independently. together
subjectof
does participle (a)
the This rule is not
found,
so
far
as
know,
in any
other
book,
are
but
student
will find
it verified
by
all correct
sentences
in which
found
subjects of participles.
INFINITIVES
AND
PABTICIPLES.
217
647. We
Case
seen
of
the that
Complement
the
of
an
Infinitive
a
Copula."
is
have
infinitive
has
which subject,
objectivecase, and that it may, like finite let us Now inquire verbs, be copulative or attributive. itive. of the complement of the copulativeinfinwhat is the case be a "We In the sentence, thought John would farmer is the complement of the copulativeverb farmer^'' let us abridge Now would case. be,and is in the nominative
commonly
in the the subordinate and Now what it will
sentence
into We
one
whose
verb
is
a
an
tive, infiniJ*^
read,
case
"
thought
of the
word
John
to be
farmer
not
of farmer?
does
us
tell
;
us, neither
the be
form
to
tell
its
case
but
both in
seen
be
objectiveby supplying
we
nouns pro-
stead.
"
Then We
should
have
sentence
"
She thought him to be A^r." thought them to be tA"." "They thought hsr to be we." that the complement of an infinitive So we see copulai% in the its subject as case same generallyobjective. When, ; that is, its complement however, the subjectof the infinitive is nominative I was is also nominative thought to be "Ae," ; as, have So we the following rule for the complenot her. ment like the
following :
"
copulativeverbs
same case
The
as
complement of
copula-is but
is in the
its
subject. There
exception
548. have
to this rule.
Case of the
Complement
of
CopulativeParticiple.
"
previously referred to Rule VI, in which stated that the complement of a copulativeverb is its subject. We have stated also that as same case
We
it is in the
to this
yule
there
is
one
exception.
rule
to
Here
we
must
notice which
the the
a
that
the
the
in participle,
appear.
In
sentence,
"He
being
the
asked
his
ticiple, par-
nominative
same
case,
and
scholar,the
would be
complement,
is in the
The
form
the
218
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
same
for the
since
no
nominative
reason
as
for for
the
nominative
absolute,
be
an
and
appears
supposing
this to
exception to be parsed as
Ai",the
the
a noun
**
general rule
in the JK"
stated
nominative
But
in the sentence,
being a scholar has been questioned," the participle is clearly in the being^
the
complement,
This
So
in
the
ception ex-
but rule be
in the nominative.
is the
the
in
full,would
549. Donble
"
rule, stated
Nature
Infinitives
seems
and
Participles
"
Their
Construction. that
now
So
all this it
we
ought
but verbal
to agree
we
infinitives
are participles
verbs;
to
must nature
understand
are
in
addition also
as
their
they
used So
in
sentences
nouns^ nature.
and adjectives^ We
must
as
adverbs. understand
they
that
an
have
double
or
not
infinitive
same
participleis used
time. It
to
an
all
these
the the
an
always performs
that, it has
or adjective^
of office
force adverb. that
verb; and
of
one
then, in addition
the
also
or
other,
"I used
noun^
the is
sentence,
a
like education."
as
We the
see
noun,
the
object of
"I
same
transitive
to to
like; and
in the
to read
following sentence,
stands in the it is said
some one
like
relation
the
use or
verb
noun.
like^so
But and
to have
construction
Why
For
not
simply
reason,
call
noun,
be
done in the
it?
this
to the
verb and
the
noun
does, yet
to
as
it also
an
retains
nature, take
to
an
may
be
made
govern in
^^
object,and
"I be shown
or use
adverbial
element,
the
sentence,
like
read when
it
to
historyin
the
retains
the morning,
has the
It may
also that of
"
infinitive
construction
as
an
adverb
came
its verbal
nature,
in the
sentence,
He
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
219
leam.^^ purpose of
not
reason
an
The of his
infinitive
to
learn
in
this sentence
has
one
tells the
coming,
of
and
therefore But
some
the
adverb
an
purpose.
will For
Why
same
call it
adverb, and
be done
with its
it ?
govern
as
it retains be
"
verbal
an
nature
may
modified
came
by
to
adverbial
grammar
element,
without
or
in
sentence,
^^
He
same
learn also
much
study. participlewhen
sentences:
This it
is true
of
an
infinitive in
ease
is
used
to
as
an
adjective,as
work the with message
most to
the is is
use
"The
"
time
"
do
your
the
present
The
lady sending
that the the
noun
you the
Martha." of
an
Here
it is clear
infinitive
has
we
adjectivemodifying
that it is
a
time; but
the
know
also the
verb
because
it takes
ease.
adverbial
has
element the
with most
of is
to
sending
an
lady;
and
but
seen
the
you.
general
statement
may
An
or infinitive participlehas
the used
construction
;
of
used;
noun,
when
an
it is
used
as
nouns
are as
the
construction
of
the
when adjective,
it is used
adjectivesare
is used 550. infinitive it is used the
as
construction used.
a
of
an
adverb, when
above
a
it
adverbs
are
Construction
or as
of
Noun.
"
We
said of
that
an
particlehas the
nouns
uses are
noun,
now
when recall
:
used.
nouns.
pupil must
may be
different
a
of
used
The
boy is pleasant." TJie We agreeabl subjectof an thought John to be disThe complement of a finite John copula; as, The complement of an is 2k farmer. infinitive copula; as The "We to be a farmer ^ object of a thought John The preposition;as, "I like all the boys but Henry. I like the boy. In apposiobjectof a transitive verb ;
subjectof
verb; as, finite infinitive ; as,
'^^
"
"
''^
"
"
220
GRAMMAR
OP
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
tion;
Now
as
as,
"Henry,
the"
man
that
came
with
you,
is my
brother."
infinitives- and
be
seen
participles may
have
the
same
uses,
may
with
The
"
those
following
sentences
subject of
grammar
finite verb
is
; as,
"
To
study grammar
is
pleasant."
Studying
The be
pleasant."
as,
once
**
subject of
an
infinitive ;
**We
We
once
thought
studying
to
study grammar
to
to
disagreeable."
complement
"
thought
as, **To
grammar
be
disagreeable."
The it.
"
of
finitecopula;
is
an
study
grammar
is to learn
Studying
to be
grammar
learning
it."
"
it.
'
'
The grammar
complement
of
infinitive copula;
We know
as,
"We
know grammar
to
study
to be
to understand
studying
to
understanding
2%e **We The "We In like
it."
a
object of
preposition; being
transitive
as,
**
We
^
be
criticised^
it all but
a
criticised.^
object of
like
verb;
as, **We
like
to
study
grammar."
studying grammar."
as, **To
apposition;
to
study anything
it."
diligently,to
give proper
attention proper
it,is
to master to
"Studying
it."
attention
it, is mastering
Constraction
a
of
an
Adjective.
"
In
the
sentence,
word An
"
"
He
is
a
medicine
good
gave
infinitive
me
have
the
to
same
u%e
use,
as
in the As
use
sentence,
it
was
He
permission
it
was
his tools." To
a
good medicine,
an
so
using permission.
the construction of
is therefore
infinitive the
a
with
noun
direct
adjective, modifying
may be
boys are to blame'' is to he found (findable)in (blamable), "Gas Indiana." Neither infinitive nor active participle an an be used resultant active can as a an adjective. When is so used it loses its verbal force and becomes participle merely an adjective(see Article 558).
sentences,
"
infinitive in the
used
The
also
as
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
221
552.
of
an
Adverb.
an
"
Whenever
an
infinitive
to have
performs
the
ofi"ces of
an
adverb, it is said
An infinitive limits
a
construction of
adverb,
with
as
the
an
construction adverb
limit
an
adverb
as,
"
usually
We
came
verb,
But
of
purpose;
to ieam.^^
it may
as,
adverb
"
to
express studied
"
I have
enough
weak adverb
to
to
sentences
as,
"He
of
an
of of
to
adverb
too.
The of
an
principal uses
adverb
are,
with
the
construction
Cause:
"I
grieve
"I
came
to
hear
to
it."
Purpose:
A
learnt fell ^o
went
future
event
*'
**
He
rise
to
no
more." me."
Manner:
Everything
He is old
suit
Degree:
**
enough
to
walk."*^
553.
How
"
to
determine
of
an
Inflnitiye what
or
Participle. It is often
the infinitive find what
to
one
to
determine It
struction con-
helpful to
can
is always
will be that
or
be
made
take
can
place
of
the
"
infinitive He
ciple, partiis is
when
is almost
be
found.
Thus,
likes to leam^^^
to
come
like, "He
our our
likes edueation.^^
same
"Time '^Future
beyond beyond
expresses ture^
control," is the
control." the
same
"
as,
time
He
is skilful in
as,
building houses,"
in arehitec-
thought
means
"He
is skilful
determining the construction of an infinitive or participle is to expand it into a clause and the clause He observe what use performs. Thus, desires that I He is the same desires me to see you^'' as, in which, that I see clause. see you^^^ you is a substantive
" " "
Another
of
He
came
here
to
learn
grammar
^"^is equivalent to
"
He
came
here
that he
might
learn
grammar^'' in which,
thit he
222
ORAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
might
learn
grammar
is
an
adverbial
clause.
same
"
The
The
on
boy boy
the and
on sitting
the bench
on an
struck struck
me," me,"
is the in
as,
"
that sits
bench is
the bench
adjectiveclause.
be found in
a
But
will participles
to express,
either
sentence.
554. When
Not the
"
be
correctlyparsed as having the construction when But it is used adverb. or adjective, phrase or clause, then it is the entire phrase
the of
a
noun,
a
part of
clause, not
construction
infinitive
noun,
or
participlealone,
adverb.
as,
that
has
the
we
or adjective,
Thus
wants
may
parse
as
to
an
learn
in
such
sentences
^'He
to noun,
leam^''
the
me
infinitive
wants.
having
But
the
construction
sentences
as,
of
"
objectof
to learn
in such should
He
an me
wants
say
to
learn
is
and infinitive,
to learn wants.
a
the
in which of
a
it is
noun,
a
found,
grammar^
construction
object of
Noun.
"
becomes Participle
Whenever
ciple parti-
and
lowed immediately preceded by the article the and folby the prepositionof it loses all its verbal force should then be parsed as a participial in the as noun,
sentences
:
"
following
much of the
The
closing of
was
the
bank
the
caused
alarm." fair."
"The The
dispute
same
concerning
of
a
opening
is
a
is true
participlethat
limited
noun;
directlyby an adjective. It then becomes Such walking is tiresome." as, "Ordinary be carefully must distinguished from the
in which the
same
structions con-
lowing, fol-
words
retain and
their
power
to be
by
this
adverbial be
elements
therefore
time
parsed
as
necessitates
closingall
other
forms
of
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
223 bank
business."
too
"
He
was
made
other Opening a bank here is opening many business in the enterprises." But since the participles sentences immediately preceding sustain also the relations of nouns subject of a verb, object of a verb, object of a the preposition,and complement of a copulative verb, mth the complete parsing of each will be as a participle construction of a noun. soon."
"
" "
The article
often becomes without the noun a even participle in the adjective, as or Painting^music, sculpture,
"
architecture, and
such
cases
literature
are
the
five
to
fine arts."
In
it is sometimes
a mere
from is
exercise delightful Painting in (1) evidently refers to an action, which takes time, in place, at some place upon some object,in some and It is therefore a paractor. some by some manner, ticiple. But painting in (2) is simply the name of one of the fine arts, not referringto any action, and is therefore A participle only a noun. always retains the idea of time^ and if active and transitive it can be given an object without its force in the sentence. Thus, the first might destroying be written, Painting pictures in the morning is a delightful
"
"
distinguisha participle in (1) as participialnoun, Painting and (2) Painting is a fine art." ;
"
"
difficult
exercise," but
a
we
would
^^
not
say,
"
Painting pictures is
Painting pictures is practisinga fine art." So we that it changes the meaning of the see second to put in an objectfor painting. When 656. A Participle becomes a Direct Adjective. any that is commonly is made word to limit a noun a participle immediately following it,it then loses its verbal force and
"
fine
art;" but
rather,
becomes
participialadjective; as, "The But in the following irresistible." driving winds were the same should word be parsed as a participle, sentence for it performs the verbal offices of taking an adverbial merely
a
direct
224
ORAMMAR
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
winds driving everything object: "The before them But in this sentence, as did much damage." in all such, the participle performs also the office of an that its complete parsing will be ew a partiso adjective, with the construction of an adjective. ciple
element
and
an
667. active
becomes Participle
Predicate the
Adjective.
"
When
an
participle performs
its verbal
"
office of
predicate adjective
is
"
it loses
"
nature;
"
as, "Wealth
are
deceiving.'^
Time
is fleeting.
adjectives.It
an
All such as amusing. should be parsed as participial predicate is impossible to give a sentence taining con-
Children
active
participle with
the
construction
of
predicate adjective following a pure copulative verb. Passive of frequently have the construction participles He lives there loved by everypredicateadjectives ; as, body."
"
658.
becoines Participle
sentences
as
Besnltant
or
"
Factitive
Adjective
^^
in all such
made
569.
a
him The
the
peculiarities
it
deceiving.
with of the We
are
Progressive Form
"
of
Finite Verb
some
is formed
present active
to
participletogether with
form
"
verb
he ; as,
Henry
Be
is
plowing
careful
to
the
field."
our reciting
from
the
conduct
distinguishthe progressive form of a finite verb, as in, He is pleasingme," as in, Your copulative and predicateadjective, And both be distinguishe is pleasing.'''' of these must from the copulative verb followed by a participle
lessons."
" "
.
with
the
a
construction
man
of done
predicate
is
"
noun,
as
in,
"Doing
560.
what
wants
pleasing him."
of
noun a
distinguish
the construction
(1)
as
direct adjective
in
from
in
:
"
of
apposition,
(1) My (2) My
desire task
to
to teach
is now is
satisfied ;
and,
teach
pleasant.
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
225
The
is
term
in
apposition when
it modifies without the
it may
pleasant^or To teach is pleasant; or, the terms change places so as to read, To teach^ my may task^ is pleasant. But in (1), desire and to teach do not the same to teach mean thing ; merely explains which desire for teaching: It would desire give no meaning to To teach is now satisfied." In the (1), therefore, say, of an teach has the construction to adjective; and in of a noun in apposi(2), to teach has the construction tion.
is
" "
"
sentence.
Thus,
(2)
may
"
(2)
in
An
with infinitive
one
the
construction
from adjective
as
:
"
of a
predicate predicatenoun^
a
of
(1) George
(2)
Iron To The
is to blame
to be
cease
is not
die is to way
to
(death
is cessation
of
life).
believe
is to investigate
(investigation).
sentences
will be
as
of The
(1) subjectssuch
as
and
(2), it
attributes
the
not
infinitive
completing
ideas
to
the
could
subject noun
not
express
all
identical,and
be
made
Such
exchange
infinitives,
places
But in
without
destroying
the
the
sense.
therefore, have
the
No and
to
to
same
cease
predicate adjectives. (4), the italicized infinitives complete but like predilike predicateadjectives, cate adjective will here take the place of is precisely the investigate.The sense
the
construction
of
if
we
write '*To
sentences,
the
cease
"
To way
cease
to
live
is to All
die," and
such
investigateis
as
to
to
believe."
infinitives,then,
and
to
and of
(3)
(4)
have
the
construction
226
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Infinitives and
Both Both Both Both Both
are are
are paxtioiples
alike
in
"
by person
not
and
number.
state.
assume,
assert,
(4) (6)
562. (1)
fine
never
express have
relatively,not of
the constructions
nouns,
Infinitives and
The
are participles
nnlike
as,
in
"
participle may
or an
become
^^
noun;
'^Painting
while
is the
one
of the
arts;"
loses
adjective; as,
nature.
Howling
wolves,"
infinitive
its verbal
(2)
The
sign;
none
except
its ending.
563.
to has
no
Sign
of the
Infinitive.
"
It must
be understood
that
the
use
force when it is used as the sign of prepositional The It is merely a sign,nothing more. infinitive. the infinitive is comparatively of the sign to before would
not
recent, and
form parse for the the
be
needed
if
we
had Brown
different others
present indicative.
as
Goold
and
they object of its sign to^ which the English of to-day furnishes call a preposition. But no ground for such a disposition. One had as well parse the present active the object of its ending as participle in which construction a ing. In Anglo-Saxon there was in the dative ; but have to governed a verbal no noun we of it in English, We told by high authority trace are
infinitive the that the human But very
race
has
descended this be
true
from
or
four-footed
ancestors.
whether
false,it would
be certainly the
man
of the
But this would to-day as four-footed. stupidityof parsing the English infinitive if it
a man ever
had
prepositional force,
additional
has
lost his
pair
in
of feet. This
infinitive is often
lengthened
into
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
227
order
came
in
order be
to
learn.^^
as
In the
such
tences, sen-
learn
should
to
parsed
the the
infinitive.
It
gives
564.
the
wrong
meaning
is omitted the
divide
phrase.
verbs and
The
sign
after
active rather
m(ike^
The
adverbs
as
lief; as,
etc.
in," "I
others. of the
had
lief not
6e,"
the
some
and
omission
sign after
^o
come
nlake
and say,
bid "Bid
is confined him
come
would in."
see are as
in," or,
When
"
Bid the
him
not
verbs
verb
have
to
and
followed
the him
the infinitive,
he^ as
suppressed; as, "They would "I saw him [to be] sentenced
(a)
definite what These rales
statements
can
may
not
be
no
more
be
given.
He
The
student
learn the
from
language expressed
do it ?
"
itself in
a
is the
best
usage. when
; as,
will often
a
find that
sign
Dare
is
sentence,
which,
omitted
put in
"
slightlydifferent
you
to
form, would
**
require
the
**
sign
dare
to be to
I dare
do
it ;
"
you
do, but
I dare
not
dw."
666.
The
Infinitive is that
form
ceded prea
by
noun,
an
the
sign
performing
assumes or
of office
the
or adjective,
adverb,
and
implies action,
same
being,or
state
without
affirmingit, and
number
retains
of its subject,
most
in the
English general
its
and
name
other the
modem
as
of
verb,
the
to
love, etc.
infinitive without
(6)
form
as
English,the
the
the
same
present
indicative,and
so
they
use
are
spoken
separate
of together,
ment. treat-
but
they
are
different
in
that
(c) All participlesending in ing and having substantive infinitives. frequentlycalled infinitives or participial
uses
are
also
228
GRAMMAR
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
((2) The
adverb,
very In
infinitive
commonly
that of
an
has
the
construction
of
noun,
or
of
an
seldom
adjective.
verb voice. has four from
(")
have
:
English,
"
every each
infinitives and
the verb write
four
we
participles,
"
two
of
Thus,
white. to be have
(a)
InfinitiveB
Present Present
Active, to
Passive,
to
(b)
Passive,
being
(/)
and
Of
course
every
intransitive
verb
would
lack
the
passive infinitives
is Participle
that
form
of
the
hy
noun,
an
its
performing
assumes or
the office of
or adjective,
adverb,
and
implies action,
the
same
being,or
state
without
retains
form
of regardless
(a)
of
a
the person
number
has the
of
its
subject,
of
an
The
participlecommonly
very
"
adjective,or
as
noun,
seldom
that
of
an
adverb.
sentences
the
following :
(1)
George
when
we
"I walk
saw
George walking
the
down be
Washington
observed that
to the
Street ; "
we use
(2)
"I
saw
wire,"
it will
the
participle
to the
wish
to direct
particularattention,not
when the
as a
agent
Here
; and
the
infinitive should be
act
is the
uppermost
the
thought.
of
an
walking
to walk
parsed
In
with participle is
an
construction the
(2), walk
and infinitive, of
a
clause,
saw.
the construction
noun,
the
object of
foregoing discussion no effort has been made to itives with anybody's dictum have it harmonize concerning infinthe other hand, no and pains have participles ; on with the uses it accord been spared to make performed by wherever infinitives and they may be found in participles
the
English
sentences.
Professor
Whitney
classes
infinitives
and
as participles
INFINITIVES
AND
PARTICIPLES.
229
nouns
and
from of
no
adjectives.He
small that
one
says,
"
The and
separates
The
them is be
one
in grammar,
it may it
can
point fairly
call
denied
a
who
is not But
seems
himself here
the
facts
Professor
Whitney
and
separates infinitives
distinct
more
adjectivesis
added, with
Then
might consistency,
"
he
ing mean-
consequence
one
in grammar, is not
that
right in
point is one of no small and it may be denied that fairly a regard to it can call himself
Participles.
"
grammarian."
667.
are
IndependentUse
absolute
in
a
of Infinitives and of To
There
several
but
constructions
infinitives
and
ciples, partinot
sentence
like,
of
"
tell the
truth, I do
like
adverb
to
be
tell the
to
parse
it would read, To supply the ellipsis, If we truth, [I confess]I do not like him." wish to tell without supplying anything, all that can
Here,
be done 568.
is to say that it is
an
infinitive used
independently.
Parsing
1. 2. 3. 4. He He The
participles.
find his hat. attended came by his friends. apples are to he picked to-morrow.
gone
to
I believe
him
state
to
the definitely
to
an
participle.
of
a
It is not
an
enough
say
of it
simply
that
it has
state
the
noun,
adjective,or
of
a noun
adverb.
nominative construction
Expressly
case, of
a or
whether
a noun
it has the
a
the
construction
in the the
of
in
objective case
of
; whether
a
it has resultant
direct the
adjective,
tion construc-
predicate adjective,or
an
adjective ; and
idea whether
if it has
adverb,
cause,
etc.
state
definitelythe
observe
it expresses,
whether
or
of
time,
purpose,
Also
it is the infinitive
participle
230
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTEKOE.
alone, or
noun,
its entire
clause,that
adverb.
should
be
given
the
construction
of
adjective,or
To
"
(1)
found,
find, v.,
find, found,
adv.
of purpose,
the
con.
of
an
and XI. limitinghas gone^ Rules XVI (2) [Being] attended, v., trans., attrib., reg., pass., part., of a pred. adj., limitingAe, Rules XVI pres., with the con.
and X. To be
con.
(3)
with
and X.
pass.,
inf.,pres.,
XVI
the
(4)
been,
to
"
To
have
am,
was,
inf.,pres. perf.,
the entire
con.
of
XVI
(h)
or
This
parsing
there is
does
not
case
necessarilygive case
would
reason case
infinitive
so our
only
tells what
no
be for
given
not
to
But
matter,
good
denying
case
to
means
form
but
relation.
569.
for
Parsing.
written
(a)
of the all the
Give
the
complete
and of
sentences
parsing, according
as
to the
models,
of all
italicized
words,
all others
are
signed by
See
the
teacher. the
(6)
was
Several
following
intended.
ambiguous.
sentence, and
he
can
that
possible meanings
one
of
each
which the
meaning
See,
also, that
give
parsing corresponding
to each
meaning.
570. (1)
Constructions.
is to suffer,
to rest.
come
(2)
likes have
to assist
us.
(4) Training
came us
horses
is
making
in at the
them door.
useful.
tumbling
get permission
is anxious here the go
to
to remain.
(7)
(8) (0)
boy
from
have
his trial.
not
to talk.
to
come.
Flee The
wrath
(10)
curious
to church
to
see
; the
vain, to
he seen.
INFINITIVBS
AND
PARTICIPLES.
231
(11)
(12)
The
A
dog lying by
letter written
is protecting her. is
more
pen
desirable
than
one
done
on
typewriter.
(13)
(14)
Learn
to live and
It is wrong To He The
see a
t6 deceive
(15)
(16) (17)
thing
is to believe
to he
believes task
trying
succeeding,
was
to write
an
essay is
assigned
me,
deserving
to
of punishment,
not
be to understand,
to be learning,
an
hour, let
us
get
our
nothing
but
criticise.
rustling of
leaves
return
the
leaves
frightened
us.
us.
frightened
near us
frightened
!
never
us.
(26) (28)
after
this, never
(27) Making
She
sport of
is to blame
rude
child,how dreadful 1 (29) Murdering her own (30) He sits there growling instead of giving thanks. succeed better, we may (31) In time to come
campaign
fell to rise child did is not
seems no more.
more
exciting.
well well
enough enough
to to
his work
to
(36)
(38) found
desire
(37) Being
She
brief and
to
thought
books
study
to
be better
than
(39) Good
here. Please Please
and
to be
(40)
(41)
excuse excuse
me me
writing
to
you.
down
the
street.
thought merely
is considered blames
one us
to ask
to be to
get what
he
asked /or.
He He
For
to be reliable.
(46)
(47)
undertakes
to know
try
to be is
a^
difficult
as
to be what
one
to be.
(48) Suddenly
there
came
tapping,
as
of
some
one
gently rapping,
rapping
at
my
chamber
door.
232
571.
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENOUSH
SENTENCE.
(ft)More
The The I I
am am
Constmotions. Interesting
upon the upon
(1)
(2)
slave
stepped
block
the
to
he sold,
to be sold,
auctioneer
stepped
wagon
going going
does
to sell my to town
wheat. wheat.
to sell my to
sea
Whom He He The
a
she
to go
want to
help f
to work to he to
thought
believes house
try
to
to learn
to he
sailor,
the
to
m"in
to have
been
hanged
this
satisfythe
was
moh. built
to
have
been
dedicated
morning
be
(9)
The The
leader.
(10)
(11)
boy
to become
the
wearer.
(12)
(13) (14)
to go
as
to
sleep.
be
as
lief not
live to
be in
awe
of
such
thing
as
I myself.
An
important study
is
is
reading.
it
reading, (16) George book is reading a Studying (16) (17) I want to try to do what he
attentively.
done.
wants
to
get ready.
to be
Is it better may
horn
great,
or
to have
greatness thrust
upon
us?
to he
broken.
did for
not
a
buy
it.
foundation.
(23)
(24) (26)
amusing
told.
children
is
written
them.
a
by Hawthorne.
amusing
has become
amusing
of the
child
problem.
(29) Amusing him is pleasing him. made the man (30) His peculiarities despised by everybody (31) A man
(32)
He His The The The died loved
amusing.
is
generally
bad
man.
by
his
friends,but despised by
him
to the
his enemies.
(33) (34)
(36)
made
despised by everybody.
are
being
written been
president.
man
having
run
written, the
horse
mailed
them.
manageable. un-
(36)
(37)
dog having
him
out, my
been been
became
frightened and
I believe
to have
mistaken mistaken
about
me.
(38)
I believe him
to have
for
me.
INFINITIVES
AND
PAETICIPLES.
233
(30) Marley was dead, to begin with, having (40) Selling whiskey to minors
for
been
forbidden^
of
we
may
look
happier
homes.
(41)
His
having disappointed
his denying
we
you made be
in his
surprising as
attempting.
having
never
shall
able
always put
ofE
I do The We
us.
not
team
are
to have
seen
you
try it before.
away.
we
by
him
to
is do
now
running
others
as
unto
would
have
others
unto
to be you. (46) It did not seem (47) He is said to be very rich. (48) You had better try to go, (49) They are about to begin, hold it half a (50) I sometimes To that bey or not to be, (61)
"
the
griefIfeel,
question
to
Whether The
*tis nobler
arrows
in the
suffer
slings and
arms
of outrageous
a sea
fortune,
Or to take
And
against
end
of troubles.
by opposing
them.
572.
Beview
What
of Infinitives and by
the
Participles.
of Show
(1)
speech
not
is meant
studying
that
each
part of
do the
Illustrate.
assert
"
always
classes of verbs,
finite verbs a (3) (2) infinitives and Show that participleshave (4) (a) attributive tend copulative; (b) transitive s,nd that Show infinitives that and
Define
transitiv in-
(6)
being,
or
Show
participles may
and
express
action,
the erties propdo of
state.
(6)
"
infinitives
have participles
of
verbs,
?
(c)
tense.
(7)
is govern
What
tenses
infinitives and
these Show the and
tenses
have participles
(8)
What
time
expressed by objects?
each
(9)
of
What
(10)
is
that
infinitives and
participles may
that has
a
govern
objects. (11)
Show that is the
What
only part
?
speech
subject ?
In what
case
(12)
case
infinitives
an
subjects.
(13)
what
subject of
of
a
finitive in-
(14)
that
In
is the and
subject
? participle
Dlustrate. may
case
(16)
Show
infinitives
participles when
substantives.
copulative
In what is be what
be
completed by complement
of
an a
either of
an
adjectives or
infinitive
(16)
In what
is the
copula? (18)
is meant ?
(17)
case
the the
complement subject
and
of
Illustrate
may
infinitive.
What nature
by saying
that
to
itives infintheir
have participles
double
(20)
In addition
234
verbal
ORAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
use,
what of
oses an a
may
each
or
have of
a
(21)
Show
how
to determine Show
;
construction that is
infinitive
how
a a
commonly
a
participle may
of
(a)
noun
(")
adjective; (c)
of the with of of
noun. a
resultant
progressing
the
a
finite verb. of
a
(a)
an
construction in
direct
an
with
the
noun
apposition ; (b)
from
one
infinitive the
with
the of
construction
a
predicate adjective
with
construction
predicate
(24)
are
In
what unlike?
are
infinitives
and what
participles alike
you and
"
? the
In
what the
they
(26)
Define
"
Tell
know
a
about
of
infinitive.
an as an
infinitive
participle.
Use
the word
interestixig,
;
as as a a
(a)
noun
adjective,
as a
[3]
a
resultant
(c)
part
form of
adjective ;
of
a
finite verb ;
as a
participle with
the of of
a a
the construction
of
"
an
(e)
participle with
of
noun,
[1] subject
of of is
a an
finite verb,
[2] object
of
verb, copula
each
copula,
an
infinitive Use
subject
objective,
words:
apposition.
(29)
similarly
following
amasing, 673.
perplezing, Bnles of
enticing, deceiving,
distseBsing.
Syntax.
SUBJECTS.
FINITE
VERB.
I.
The
case.
subjectof
finite verb
is
always
in
INFINITIVE.
II. when of
a
The
subject of
also the
an
infinitive
is in the
objectivecase
complement
subjector
attributive
PARTICIPLE.
III.
upon
case
When
other
the
subject of
in the absolute:
a noun
does participle
it is in the
not
depend
any
or
word
sentence,
nominative
as
possessivewhen
its
is used
absolute when
in
dependent construction,
the
with participle
subjectis
used
pendently. inde-
BULBS
OF
SYNTAX.
235
OBJBCm
.
TRANSITIVE
VERB.
IV.
The
object of
an
active
transitive
verb
is in
the
objectivecase.
PREPOSITION.
V.
The
objectof
is preposition
in the
case. objective
IDENTIFICATION.
ATTRIBUTIVE
COMPLEMENT.
VI.
noun
or
pronoun
same
used
case
as as
the
its
complement
of
copulativeverb
"
is in the
When the
the
VII.
case as
A the
noun noun
or or
pronoun pronoun
in it
apposition
is in
the
same
explains.
POSSESSIVB
CASE.
VIII.
a
noun
or
pronoun
noun
fying signi-
different
thing is
in the
ABSOIiUTE
CASE.
IX.
noun
or
pronoun
case.
used
independently is
in the
nominative
absolute
MODIFIERS.
ADJECTIVES.
X.
Adjectiveslimit
nouns
and
pronouns.
236
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
ADVERBS.
XI.
Adverbs
other
adverbs.
GONNECTIVB
OB BEIJLTION
WORDS.
CONJUNCTIONS.
XII.
Conjunctions
connect
words,
phrases, and
tences. sen-
PREPOSITIONS.
XIII.
the word
the
relation
of its
objectto
PRONOUN.
XIV.
A and
pronoun
agrees
with
its antecedent
in person,
number,
gender.
FINITB VERB.
XV.
and
finite verb
agrees
with
its
subject in
person
number.
INFIXITIYES AI9^D PARTICIPIiES.
XVI.
Infinitives
and
participles are
used
as
nouns,
and adjectives,
adverbs.
INTEBJEOTIONS.
XVII.
An
not
depend
for
cal grammati-
construction
word.
EXPIiETTVES.
XVIII.
are
The
used
words
some
others
often
merely
introductoryexpletives.
ANALYSIS.
237
ANALYSIS.
574.
sentence
Orammatical
as
Analysis
how
"
is such
separation of
related,
the
will show of
its
parts
are
675.
Value
Analysis :
the
(1) (2)
sentence
It
impresses
sentence.
principles governing
to relate
the construction
of the
It leads
ideas, and
of the
to
see
that
their relations
the
relations
parts of the
that express
them.
One's
upon
therefore, will
its
always depend
and
the
ferent dif-
accuracy,
precision,and
habit
of
Analjrsis* Analysis
"
be also
may
either
or
oral
or
written.
is
be in full
by diagram.
exercise in but
full
affords
valuable
and spelling,
neatness,
should
hot
require more
577.
of it than
is necessary
seems
to the
end
sought.
have
Analjrsisby diagram
its former
unfortunately to
fallen from
good standing. It has very largely from the schools. been discarded Admitting that, like be overdone, I confidently any other good thing, it may charge that all other criticisms I have heard urged against it are, to put it most superficialand unpedacharitably,
238
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
gogical.
"You how
;
The
most
profound
a
of
in
these
objections is,
"
cannot
put
sentence
diagram
till you
use
know
doing This objection(?) holds equally against solving a it ? problem in arithmetic, demonstrating a proposition in geometry, and writing out a translation. 578. Analysis may be regarded as a kind of abridged
you
"
and
when
know
how, what
is the
of
parsing.
their
It consists
in the
classification of sentences
and
elements.
OF
SEVTENOES.
Sentence
As to
(A)
A A
dinate.
581. 582.
a
PrincipalSentence
Subordinate
is
one
not
one
used used
as as
a an
modifier,
element in
Sentence
is
sentence, principal
(a)
John
^*
John
is
principal sentence,
James'*
but
in
^*
I believe
as a
struck
struck the
is subordinate, I be
used the
simple objective
sentence,
**
last, either
may clause is
believe,
or as
entire
struck
James,''
regarded
as
the
cipal prinof
an a a
sentence.
subordinate James
is used
the the
subject
clause
verb,
as
in
*^
John of the
struck
certain,"
Also
then when
is
as
principal
sentence.
it is used
Clause
are
is
subordinate
sentence.
Clauses
they perform
an
noun^
of
an
adjective^
of
585.
Clause
verb be of
a a
"
may
That
be
he
"
(1)
believe
The
is
thief
is evident."
"We
Industry
The
wins
to
good
to be
motto."
:
'^
(2) (3)
complement
I believe
copula
*'
His
motto
is,Labor
all
conquers
all
things.^'' **
The
his motto
a
Labor that
conquers he is
a
things.^"*
object of
verb
I believe
thief
ANALYSIS.
239
(4) (6)
by
The
"
object
of
preposition :
Ac
**
"
They
are
disputingaboiit
a
who
was
elected.'*^ In
I left after
came.
"
apposition ;
The
question, Are
we
nation
was
answered
Sumner."
586.
An
An
Adverbial
or
Clause
may
modify
degree^
as
:
"
(a)
than I
adverb
"
"
to adjective
are
"
express than 1
**
Henry
walks
faster
run.
You
better
am,
' '
verb
to
'*
express We Come
:
""
Time-. Place
:
when the
roses
the train
are
drrivesy
*'
blooming.'*''
you may
Condition Manner
: : :
will succeed
if
you
try.^^
direct.^^
'*
I shall He
came
proceed
that
as
(6) Purpose
Beason
**
he
might
you
be instructed.''^
are
**
I will leave
or
because
:
"
here.^^ he
(7) Opposition
Such
concession
are
Though
slay
me,
yet will I
trust
clauses
etc.
introduced
by though, although,
notmthstand-
ing, however,
An
Adjective or Relative
one
Clause
the
may
be
"
Restrictive:
or
**
that
restricts
predication,
or
distinguishes of
the
same
objects represented
Words that
are one
'*
by its antecedent
are
from
others
names
(2) Explanatory:
additional into
*'
that
explains
which
are
expresses
are
an
idea;
"
as,
Words,
who
signs of ideas,
was
divided
classes." man,
An
Solomon,
understood
of
kings."
that of
The
who
mathematics,
expresses
reason a
easilyfollowed
it has the been
explanation."
with
(a)
the clause.
explanatory
For
clause and
we
thought coordinate,
called of the
a
principalsentence, example,
way: in this ideas." "The
coordinating
tences sen-
express
are was
meaning
into of
last three
"Words "Solomon
divided the
classes,and kings,
and he of and
they
he
are
the the
signs
the
of
wisest
built
temple."
sentence
man
mathematics,
not
easily followed
the
explanation."
to say:
give
and that
the
meaning
are
preceding
in all
"Words should
nouns
they
in
names."
are
The
student
remember and in
a
who
used
explanatory
authorities
clauses, prefer
very
sparingly
that
all restrictive
clauses of
except
course,
immediately follows
must
preposition. Then,
be
used.
588.
(5)
As
to
structure, sentences
are
240 A
are
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
589Cows
Simple Sentence
quadrupeds.
came
is
statement; single
as
"
The ?
history of America
is a very
interesting
story.
Who
with
you
590.
sentences
Compound
Sentence
is
one
containing two
one
or
more
or
more
cod'rdinate
connectives;
Art not hit is
long
and
time that
is
were
fleeting.
He
aimed be
at the
target but
he
were
could last
They
first shall
last, and
they
that
shall be
(a)
and any
first in
a
compound
member,
sentence
is called Or
the may
leading sentence^
be
other,
coordinate
sentence. etc.
they
designated
as
first member,
second
591.
or
Fartial-Componnd Sentence
are
is
one
in
;
which
as
:
"
either
both
John
of the principalelements
and
compound
They
came
Mary
John
are
handsome
came
couple.
and
and
desired
an
interview.
and
James
remained,
592.
Complex
be either
you
are
Sentence
is
one
containing one
The subordinate
or
or
more
completesubordinate
itself may
I believe
sentences.
sentence
simple, complex,
I she
am
compound.
that said you
were
mistaken, and
the
man
taken. miscrown
If he
their
is industrious
is
economical,
prosperity will
efforts.
593.
She is
A
a
Complete Sentence
musician.
is
one
whose
verb is finite ;
as
"
594.
or a
An
Abridged
be
Sentence
as :
"
is
one
whose
verb
is
an
tive infiniweU
participle ;
her
to
a
I believe entertained.
musician.
She
being
musician,
we
were
695.
596.
as
:
"
Declarative
Sentence
is
one
that asserts
or
denies
He
is honest.
He
is not
honest.
ANALYSIS.
241 is
one
597.
;
Is he
'
An
as :
"
InterrogatiyeSentence
?
that
asks
tion ques-
honest
598.
;
How
as
An
:
"
Exclamatory
Sentence
is
one
used
in
tion exclama-
honest
he
is I
599.
An
;
as
Imperatiye
:
"
Sentence
is
one
whose
verb
perative is im-
Go
to
the
ant.
Hear
me
for my
used
cause.
(a) (")
but
An
imperatiye
**
is often beautiful
an
with
the
force
of
an
exclamatory
tence sen-
; as,
See
that of
bird."
sentence
The
subject
a
imperative
in the graves.
is
or
usually thouy
a
you,
or
ye^
noun
third
person,
pronoun
name.
in the
first.
be their
next
Hallowed bend
we.
be
thy
teacher, circle,
this wall
"
from
dismount
Cary^s
Dante^a
71,
canto
24.
600.
In the
following,describe
use.
as
to
rank^
plex com-
structure^ and
Also
point
out
simple and
the
sentence*
sick.
maketh
the of
heart
the with
portion
many bucket
goods hangs
is
that
waters
falleth to
the
me.
river
branches
land.
in the
well.
that
impart information.
man
piece
fall.
of work
vine
still
clings
to
the
at
every
gust
dead
leaves He
will return
was see
to school
when
Homer Then
the you
artist
not
OLASSIFIOATIOir
601. 602. Elements
are
OF
ELEHEFTS.
the constituent
to
parts of a
are
sentence.
(A)
According
rank, elements
Principal and
Subordinate.
242
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
BENTEKCfl.
603.
cannot
are
those without
which
sentence
the
Suijectand
is the
Predicate.
604.
Subject of
sentence
that
of which
The The
somethingis predicated.
a
(a)
(")
subject is always
unmodified with
subject
simple
its modifiers
is called the
complex subject.
Predicate
of
sentence
is the
of
an
attribute and
Birds
are
copula;as:
"
animals.
Here which
are
is sweet is and
are
and
are
are
animals
are
the
sweet
of predicates,
and animals
the
copulas
often Susan
a
and
the
attributes.
copula
and
(a)
The
attribute
reads
=
are
united is
a
in
one
word
as:
"
Susan
(b)
the
predicate
of
must
alwaysbe
that
can
verb
or
since
verb
is
only part
speech
predicate.
of the
or
**
(c)
the
some
The
copula
of the
to
subject.
form
as
It is either verb
to
impure.
He is
copula
other
is
always
are
be;
"
as,
wealthy."
"He
Many
verbs
used
was
impure
copulas; agreeable
;
feel dizzy;"
was
looks
sad;"
It is
"She
considered
appointed
used. be
colonel."
(d)
a noun
The
or an a
attribute
is the
or an
attributive
always
adjective
substantive
:
"
expression
the attribute
(6)
(1)
As A A A An
A
may
"
noun
He
is "If
merchant.^^ "A"." is
(2)
(3) (4)
pronoun:
I were
participle
infinitive clause
an
:
: :
"
Lying
"
tellinguntruths."
is to teach you be the
:
His
business
music."
man
"The
question
the She
is.Are
may
?"
As
An An-
adjective
: :
"
attribute is
"
adjective
infinitive
goody found
am
"Oil
is to be
:
in Indiana."
(3)
606.
prepositional
'
phrase to
"I
for peaces
are
(jB) According
Partial'
form, elements
and
Compound^
Complex.
ANALYSIS.
243
without
607.
Simple
from
Element
is
one
modifiers, or
sidered con-
apart
*'The
its modifiers.
In this
eentence
man
old
man
speaks fluently.**
it is without
are
fluently is
and
simple simple
element,
elements
because if
modifiers, and
apart from
speaks
are
they
considered
their
modifiers.
608.
Compound
Element
is
one
having
compound
'*
Smith and
and
Jones
Jones is a
went
to Boston
and
;
to
Chicago.**
element
In
this sentence
to Boston
Smith
to
compound
element
also,the
and
Chicago, 609. A
Partial-Compound Element
is
one
part of whose
base is
**
compound.
and
He
is wise
"
good.**
is amidst
Here
wise but
and the
good
attribute
is the is
partial-compound compound.
In this **The
sentence
predicate
work amidst
was
the
copula
simple,
is
performed
hardships
a
and
dangers.**
hardships and
dangers
partial-compound element.
610.
Complex
Element
is
one
whose
any
In
base
or
some
part
of it is modified
"
by something
ran
not
The
to
are
the
old
oak.**
The
little
children
the old of
a an
oak
complex
is the
or
elements. its
(a)
idea.
''
The It may
base be
element
a
primary
base
to
vjord,
phrase,
our
The
littlegirlcame
The little
to
school.
girlis the
element
of
our
the
element
girl,and boy
that is
to school
of the
that
is truthful
respect,**the base
of the element
is
element,
boy
is not
truthful,is boy,
base entire
is
truthful
When the that
that, is, or
truthful,but
is
clause, that
the form
truthful. (b)
element
base of
of the
*"
an
clause,determine
it is
a
of the
a
by
**
clause. student
is,if
simple
class
clause, call it
has
a
simple
believe
element
; as,
a
is attentive
a
in
If it is
compound
and
clause,call it
that
compound
**
element
a
that he is honest
If it is as,
pound partial-comhe is
;
clause,call
young and as, **A teacher that
it
partial-compound
If it is
a
I understand
capa"Ze.**
complex clause,
his work
is
call it
complex
makes
element
grumbles
when
heavy only
it heavier."
244
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
are
and
Adjeotive Element
an
is
one
that
stantive sub-
adjective.
is
one
ObjeotiYeElement
verb.
that
is the
object of
transitive
614.
a
Snbjeotiye Element
or
is
one
used
as
the
subject of
thing any-
of
an
infinitive. Element
or
Adverbial
a
is
one or a
that verb
modifies
as
else than
or
noun
pronoun,
its
subject
object.
616. An Attendant Element is
one
that
has
but logical,
no
grammatical, connection.
**The
sun
having risen, we
risen is the
pursued
for
our
journey.'*
its the
In
this
sentence,
The but
sun
having
independent
in
construction,
expresses
logicalreason
he
pursuing
not ;
our
We,
Still Those
while
spake,
ceas'd the
"
onward
so
passing through
wood
for
I name
Dante.
617. the
Connective It may
Element
sentence.
is
to
base, elements
the First
are
of
the
First
Class, or
of the
Third
Class
Class. is
one
An
Element
whose
base
is
single word.
**The furious
are
animals the
ran
rapidly away/*
All
the
elements
of this
sentence
of
first class.
620.
a
An
Element
of
the Second
an
Class is
one
whose
base is
prepositionand
The
its
or object,
infinitive.
Biver. He tried
to
city of Indianapolis
is
on
White
finish
his
work.
ANALYSIS.
245
621.
a
An
Element
of the' Third
Class
is
one
whose
base is
subordinate
I believe that
sentence.
will succeed.
T%at
the earth
18
spherical has
proved.
622.
Point
"
out
each
it
and modifies^
describe it : (1)
(2)
As As As
to to to
Btmctore.
use.
(3) (1)
(2) (3) (4) glee. (5)
base.
The A A The
man man
diligentin
is honest
came
business will be
would
have
failed in the
enterprise.
respected.
and
with
laugh
shout,
and
We
all desire
him
to become
minister. the
estate.
(6) The money being furnished, he purchased (7) Twilight is weeping o'er the pensive rose. (8) (9) (10)
While As Tou
we
the
robbers
were
plundering,
that
she
we
set
saw
house.
approached
will
the
wigwams.
please
to
speak
can
hear
Connectiye
are
is any
word
that
joinselements.
Coordinate emd
There
two
classes of connectives:
Subordinate.
625.
A
Coordinate It is
etc.
Connective
is
one
that
joinselements
of
equal
626.
rank.
nor^
always a
coordinate
but^ or^
of
Subordinate rank.
"
Connective
is
one
joinselements
unequal
It may
be
(1)
He
A
will
conjunction.
if he
promised.
We
belike
her
because
she
is
truthful.
246
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(2)
The which
relative that
not
pronoun.
w
boy
was
truthful
a
will The
always
man
make toith
friends. whom
had
dream,
is
all
dream.
you
were
walking
my
cousin.
(8)
There
relative he
conjunctive
a
may
time
when
regret
There "Where
is
land
of
pure
delight, reign.
saints
immortal
(4)
Be
An
ordinary
while
conjunctive
you may. Do
adverb. directed.
merry
as
you
are
Come
when
you
are
wanted.
(6)
As
A is
conjunctive
the labor
so
adjective,
the reward
(Very
should
rare.)
he.
DIAGBAMMING.
247
627.
DIAGRAMMING.
Subject
Ji"IS'et.
A6d.
el.
Predieate
Adv.
el.
Adv,
el,
{infinitive,)
8ubJ.
AtU, (appoHHve)
el.
eh
Subtjeet,
\ JPredieate,
Conneetive
{eonj, adv,)
628.
The
above
blank
diagram
the
be
exposes
at
glance all
diathe
the essential
"
629;
Explanation.
"
The
importance
subjectand
is indicated by the heavy of the principalsentence predicate line and line. separated They are written upon the same by a heavy vertical bar to show that they are of equal rank. All modifiers lines to show are placed below and on lighter that they are subordinate to the subjectand predicate. To distinguish an objective element^ let the line on which it is written from that be brought down extends one
over
a
The
mbject of
to
one
an
is written infinitive
upon
line
joined
a
drawn
a
under
in the
the
infinitive. A
nective con-
conjunction is
that
its
a
written
in
break
line.
so as
also is, A
must modifier
be written
an
to show
both
uses.
dotted
line
indicates
ment; eleappositive A
parenthesis,an
independent
element,
short
248
horizontal also to
GHAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
bar is used
a
to. separate
separate
relative the
The
an
attribute,
mines deter-
the
the
sentence
diagram: Word the left when to they precede the term modifiers turn modified; to the right when they follow it. Phrases (prepositionalor infinitive) always turn to the right. Clauses turn convenient. to the right or left,as is most
630. DUaBAHS AND ANALTSES.
direction
(1) Sugar is sweet. (2) Truth is a virtue. (3) Grass grows. (4) The little children, eager
the
for the
story, gave
to
speaker.
the
merchant,
and
we
is dead.
I went
returned.
Diagrammed
Analjrsis.
(1)
is^sweei. TnOh
(2)
Sugar
"
IT
(4) (3)
Grass
children
nttie
\ gave
a"ten^on to-speakeK
their
aXi
grows*
The
eageft
the\ (5)
Smiths
(6)
JETe
Its^-dead.
T
ifnerehanti
u
(XfM
we
^ent
th^
returned*
DIAGBAMMING.
249
632.
Written
AnalysiB.
is
a
(1) Sugar
the
simple declarative sentence, of which Sugar is is the simple predicate, simple subject, unmodified; and is sweet
is sweet ; is the is
a
unmodified
copula,
virtue is
and
a
sweet
the
attribute.
(2)
is the
Truth
simple
declarative is
a
sentence, of which
is the
Truth
; and
virtue the
complex
element
; is virtue, the
copula,
unmodified
virtue, the
first class.
simple adjective
of the
(8) Grass
the
grows
simple
grows,
declarative the
sentence, of which
Ghrass is
simple predicate.
the story, gave of which all their attention The children
to
(4)
the eager
The
for
speaker,
simple by by
the
declarative
sentence,
complex
and
simple
of the of the
subject, modified
first class ; also first
two little,
for
the story,
adjective element
the story,
a
class,of
which
by for
complex
of of
element
class,of
story, the
first class.
noun,
is modified
b^ the, a
dead,
is a
(5) Smith,
of which the
the
merchant,
is
simple
sentence,
Smith
is
Smith,
the merchant,
is the
complex
a
of subject,
simple subject,modified
first class ; merchant, of the
by
the
the merchant,
of the
base, is modified
sentence
element
simple
predicate, unmodified
copula,
we
and
dead is
a
attribute. declarative
tence, sen-
(6)
He
and
I went He and
and
compound
of which
I went He and
sentence, of which
connective Of the
compound also,went
coordinate
subject,and
is the
and
the
ordinate co-
; of which
sentence,
and is the
simple predicate.
we turned re-
compound
is the
sentence,
connective, and
of which
we
sentence, coordinate, simple, declarative simple subject, and returned the simple predicate, both
is the
unmodified.
688.
Order
^
of
the
^
Written Analysis,
or
Oral.
f(a)
(1) (2) (8)
,..
As ^s
to structure. to
use.
,^
sentence
|(j)
{(a)
(6)
Use.
(c)
Base.
6BAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
base
of each
modifier
and
describe
its modifiers
as
above.
complex
predicate.
'
Describe
of the
predicate
and
as
to
lb)Use.
(c)
Base.
as
Give The
the
base
of each
modifier the
describe
order with
above,
pupil should
he will most of the very
follow
above
to
precision.
same
In this way
one
readily learn
of drills in without
as a
and analyase,
time
;
best
careful,accurate,
any in grammar inattention in is in
rapid thinking
not
to
attempt
the
to
analyze
far
following
only
also
defeats
a
object so
means
lesson
but
is of
very
to
effective
of
a
creating
giving
the
pupil
himself
habit
of carelessness
thought
sion. expres-
634.
Simple
the
use
and
of
for
:
"
illustrating analysis,
(1) (2)
Flowers Dew
bloom.
sparkles.
banished.
will differ. decided. wind
was
(7)
(8) (9)
angry
is
howling.
murdered.
statue
was vases
Little A
Arthur
beautiful
marble
carved.
are
(10) (11)
(12)
Those We We He She
elegant
both
Etruscan
broken.
wept.
all consented.
(13)
(14)
spoke eloquently.
chattered searched know
incessantly.
everywhere. presently.
waves
deafening
wounded
dash
angrily.
the
soldier and
fought bravely.
elevates kissed
are
mind.
forth
and
moon
its mother.
planets.
were
and
Aristotle
the
most
distinguished
his
antiquity.
became governor of
(23)
defeat.
Lord
-
Comwallis
Bengal
after
disastrous
DIAGBAMMIKG.
251
the Indians and the whole
(24)
island
Peter
Minutes
traded for
with
bought
and
of
Manhattan
twenty-four dollars.
the Atlantic with
(25)
San
Columbus
crossed
ninety
men,
landed
at
Salvador.
635.
Sentences and
the illustrating
"
use
of
phrases :
is
(1) Gambling
stealing.
Gambling
I is
"
stealing*
Gambling
a
has
noun.
the
construction
are saw
of
subject
noun,
and
stealing that
of
predicate
They
I
both the
participles.
wounded
of
(2)
H
Mtooping dawn.
(3)
habit
of
sincerity in acknowledging
faults
is
guard against
Committing
them.
(3)
habit I is" AJs.
guard
A}
of"9ineerity
^
in
"
against
"
eonvmitting
them*
aehnwifledging fauUB
(4)
He
comes
attended
by
his friends.
(4)
He
comes
"
attended
by"fHend"9
his]
252
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
IBeing'i attended
predicate adjective.
is
the
constraction
of
(6)
This after
saw
the
man
mob. it may
mean
sentence
is had
either the
that
saw
the If
man
the
mob conveys is
that
man
I witnessed is the
execution.
the
sentence
the
meaning,
[having
be the
been"]hung having
the
"
construction
diagram:
(6)
""r
the\
636. Analysis.
sentence,
"
(6)
man
saw
the
man
hung by
the
the mob
is
simple
; of
clarative de-
of which the
/ is the
simple subject by
mobj
man
unmodified
which
;
hung
the first
is the
complex
the
predicate
a plex com-
is the
simple
predicate,modified
of
by
the
hung
man, first
by the mob^
class,of
of of
which the
by hung
adverbial
by
ment ele-
complex
second
the
first
a
which
[having
been']hung,
of the
base,
is modified
by by
is the of the
to
the m^b,
cla43S ; by mob
base, mob,
first class. I witnessed
man
is modified
sentence
means
say
the
execution, then
is its be
subject by
the
in the
The
abridged clause,
of
saw.
the
man
to
hung
mob,
object having
(6)
War
been
declared, we
all prepared to
fight
(6)
we
prepared
to
fight.
War
having
been
declared.
War
to
having
been
declared
is
but logically,
not
grammatically, related
prepared.
DIAGRAMMING.
253
637.
is
a
Analysis.
"
War
having
been
declared^
we
all prepared
to
fight
It
simple
declarative
to
sentence,
also
etc.
Prepared^
element been
the of
simple predicate, is
the second class.
modified
by
is
a
fights a simple by
adverbial
is logically modified
war or
having
declared^ which,
element of the
a
ically, grammat-
complex independent
the
attendant
first
class,of
which
war,
base, is modified
first class. in the
by having
been
declared,
simple adjective
the
of the
noun
case, construction
subject
of
an
of
participle
having
war.
declared, which
adjectivelimiting
638. attention
Analyze orallyand
to
the
grassy
italicized
bank stood
(1)
core.
On
tall,waving
ash,
sound
to
the
very
(2)
Red
God's
balance,
one
across a
the
sky.
called
him,
little fellow
is is
no no
playing by
playing
the
roadside.
by
the
roadside.
pardon
horse
a
prevented
blanket.
his
covered
madman's him.
to
prevent
his
as
robbing
saw
an
eagle wheeling
snow.
near
its brow.
lay
the
untrodden
was
business in idle
sauntering
about
the
neighborhood
f
and
gossip.
vision the
to
scorn
heard
saw
beating
upon
doorstep,
by mistake.
(15) Gambling
Did The you horse
see
is
the hitched of
struck
by lightning?
sold for
a
to the
carriage was
weeping
the
thousand
dollars.
(18) The burning (10) Have you not (20) Having sold
farm
near
the
capital was
strong
men
outrageous.
f
man
seen
his
residence
in
city, the
the
moved
to
his
lakes.
(21)
army
was
defeated,
(22) (23)
(24)
being
of
scholar
a
is not
being
scholar
man
is not
never
that
running
254
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
heard of that man's (26) I never (26) The child stood toeepfn^. limping. (27) The dog came (28) The philosopher sat buried
running
for
office.
in
thought.
a
(29)
turbulent
No
one
ever
saw
fat
men
heading giving
riot
or
herding together
in
mobs. way,
(30) The bridge at Ashtabula robed in (81) Spring comes the send can (32) A word
many
silken crimson
green. color
hurrying
to the
cheek
with
639. (1)
Subjective Elements.
whole of life.
the
(2) (3)
(4)
to excel
in any
worthy
time.
sun
work
is commendable.
ready
to
go at any
to see
impossible
birds
the
a
at
midni^t.
is too
gentle to
are
hurt
fly.
to
beginning
come,
migrate.
a
is yet to
me
deshred him
to
become
to be
found
men
in such
of his
guilt.
I believe for
some
to tell the
impossibility.
(1)
To live
(2)
^
I is
whole
desire
A
of -life.
the
~
\ ^
toexeel
is
"
commendable^
in"worh
(3)
worthy
to
go
at"
time.
any
It
I is"impo88ihle
(5)
STe lisis I
"
I
see
gentle
to too
to
hurt
the\
fly.
at"
midnight.
IT
DIAGBAHMma.
255
(6)
birds
The to
(J)
are
beginning
migrate.
WiUiant
lis"
to
come.
(8)
^heXdesired^
to beeofne"Maeon,
fJPor)
(9)
(10)
-
to he found
Iia
eviOence
i\Sm^
(For)
(a)
(b)
To To To To To
live in
(1) has
(2) has
the
construction
of
of of of
a an
noun,
subject of
is.
excel in go in
see
the construction
adjective limitingdesire,
adverb
(c)
(d) (e)
too,
in
hurt
(3) has the construction (4) has the construction in (5) has the construction
in
an a
limiting ready,
in
noun an
apposition with
of
it
of
adverb
(/)
To
migrate
in
(6) has
the
me
the
construction
of
noun,
object of
are
beginning,
(g)
(h)
i
To In
come
(7) has
construction
a
of
predicate adjective.
has the construction of
to become
Mason^
noun,
object
For
(i)
\o be
(0)
is
an
the of
clause,for
a
him
found
In
such
company^
noun,
subject
sibility^ impos-
)f is.
(J)
some a
men
to
be
an
has
some men
noun,
object of
believe.
a
noun
The
clause, for
truths has
the
construction Men
of
in the
objective
case, of the
subject
of the
infinitive to be.
is in the
infinitive to tell,and
for is
an
introductoiyexpletive.
256
640.
declaratiye which
GBAHMAB
OF
THE
BNGLISH
SBNTENGB.
Analyalft.
"
(8)
She
desired
me
to
become
Mason
is
simple
; of
sentence, of
which
me
She
is the
simple subject
a
unmodified
sentence,
of which
a
also, desired
desired is the
to become
Mason
is the
complex predicate,
me
by
is the
a
to
become
a
Mason,
complex
objective
is the
of
the
second Mason
class.
It is also
of which
become modified
copula,
the
by
me,
simple subjective
a, a
attribute,is modified
I believe / is the truth is be
an
adjective element
first class.
to
(10)
is
a
For
some
tell the of
to
to
be
an
impossibility impossibility
simple
the
declarative
sentence,
men
Believe is
for
some
the
be
an
complex
predicate,
some men
of
which
believe truth
to
the
simple predicate,
plex com-
modified
hjfor
of
to tell the
a impossibility, a
objective element
sentence,
the which
to
of be
the second
complex
;
impossibility is by
an,
a
simple predicate by
For
attribute,is
to
modified the
be,
copula, is modified
to tell the
a
truth, a complex
subjective element
of the second
to
class ; it is also
simple, by
is tell first
abridged,
the truth, modified is
subordinate
a
sentence, of which
complex
a
of the element
base,
To the
by the,
modified, also,by
men, of the
men,
complex
is
subjective element by
some,
a
class, of which
element
the
base,
For
is modified
an
simple adjective
first class.
introductory expletive.
to the
641.
Diagram
words
:
and
"
italicized
(1) (2)
(3)
These He For
apples
are
not
to be
eaten.
remained you
to assist
a
in the
work. will
to become
gi-ammarian
require much
study.
(4)
(5)
work it
to
plow.
teach grammar.
delightfulto
is
now
(6) My
(7) My (8)
to teach
satisfied.
to
teach
to
is
a
pleasant.
I wish
to be
a
I wish What
a
you is the
be
teacher, but
of the
preacher.
(a)
(6)
case
subject of (1)
of
finite verb,
(2) an
?
tive, infini-
(3)
participle?
what
case
In
is the illustrate
complement
three
use
copulative verb
(c)
have
Name
and
to
general
?
uses
infinitives and
participles
in addition
their
verbal
DIAGRAMMING.
257
difference
one
(d)
with
noun
The
(6)
and
(7)
of
an
illustrate
the
between the
an
infinitive
of
an a
the in
construction
adjective and
sometimes it
or
with
a
construction When
apposition, which
is in
sentence
troubles the
beginner.
finitive inbe
;
apposition, either
that task is
substantive
it modifies
same
may
omitted, leaving a
as
expresses To teach
essentiallythe
is
thought
two terms
in
(7), My exchange
to teach
pleasant, or,
without in
pleasant ; meaning
do
not
or
the
may
places
But
changing
desire and which
the
; as, To
mean
teach, my
the
same
(6)
to teach
merely designates
like of
an an
desire,
"
desire, not
appositive,but adjective.
like
an
desire
the construction
Analysis of Complex
He He When He That His that has lacks time
to
mourn
Sentences.
lacks I had time
to mend.
that
given
the
(3)
(4) (5)
completed
that the
boy
play.
announced
arrived.
(6) (7)
(8) (9)
objection was
been claimed is taller than
that
the
boy
was
too
young.
It has She It
was
Bacon
wrote
Shakespeare's works.
her
so
cold
that
knows
place
where the
comes.
where Christ
buried.
of them
so
be bom.
is the
boy
will be
man.
(13)
(14)
till Jesus
are as
profitableas they
my mother forsake
are
interesting.
then the Lord will
(16)
take
me
father
and
me,
(16)
meeting
arrived
on
the
field of Waterloo
just as Wellington
was
(17)
(18)
grieved
his
I heard
obtained
the
reputation
neighbors.
(1)
258
643.
mend
mourn
QBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
8ENTBNGB.
Analysis.
a
"
(1)
He
that
lacks
time
to
mourn
time
time
to
to
is
complex
time
declarative
sentence, of which
the
He
is the
complex
to mourn,
subject ; He,
a
simple subject,
by
;
.
that
lacks
a
of the
class is the
it is also
sentence, of which
simple subject ;
that lacks time
is also
connective, joining
of which
clause,
mourn, time
to
antecedent, He;
is the
sentence,
lacks
also, lacks
of the
to
complex
time, the
predicate,
a
is the
by time
to mourn,
complex
element
to mourn,
a
class,of
which of mend
base, is modified
class ; of which
by
cipal prinof
the
second is the
sentence,
which
complex
time
to
predicate,
mend,
a plex com-
lacks, the
simple predicate,
of the first
is modified which
by
of the
objective element by
to mourn,
a
class,of
time, the
second
644. simple
which
AnsdyaiB,
"
Book
is modified
by
that
had
a
given
to
him,
adjective element
sentence,
of
class ; it is also
simple declarative
; of
;
subordinate
is the
to
sentence,
also, had
given that
him
complex predicate
him,
a
had
given, the
element the of
simple predicate, is
the second also the
modified
by
a
to
simple
adverbial of its
antecedent, book,
subordinate
sentence,
given
to
him,
(3)
taek
DIAGRAMMING.
259
simple
ordinate sub-
645.
adverbial subordinate
Went
is modified of the of
by
third which
when
he
had
completed
a
his
task,
element
simple, declaratiye,
of which is the
sentence,
simple subject ;
when is modified which
sentence, also,had
had
completed
of the
his task
complex predicate; by
his
completed,
the
simple predicate,
first
task,
complex
modified
objective
by his,
a
element
class,of
task, the
base, is
pleted com-
of the adverbial
by when,
simple
first had
subordinate
completed
verb, went.
He
I announced
tthafj train
the
had
arrived.
646.
Analysis.
sentence,
"
He
announced He
that
the train
had
arrived
is
plex com-
declarative of which
sentence, of which
is the
simple subject,unmodified
had arrived is the
plex com-
also, announced
which announced
a
that
the train
predicate, of
that the train
a
is the
by
had
arrived,
is also
sentence, of which
that
introductory
the train', the
complex also,
subject, of
had arrived
simple
subject, is modified
subordinate unmodified. clause
first class ; of
is the
simple predicate,
(a)
substantive
needs
no
connective.
(5)
iJChaf) he
ia-^hief
the
\ Js-^^JdenL
647.
AnalysiB.
"
T?Mt That
he is the he
thief is
evident the
is
complex
That
tive declaraIt iS
sentence, of which
also
a
is the
thief is
simple subject.
of which is the thief is the
sentence,
is the
plex com-
introductory unmodified,
element of
simple
predicate,
and the
thief is the
Of the
predicate, is the
a
copula,
is the
thief,the
first class. which
attribute, modified
by the,
and
simple adjective
is evident the attribute.
simple predicate, of
is is the
260
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(6)
648.
of attribute
Analyais.
whicl)
was
"
Was
is the
a
that
the
boy
and
was
too
young
is the
was
simple predicate,
too
copula,
that
the
boy
young
the
; it is also
simple, declarative,
the
subordinate
sentence,
of which
;
boy^
the
complex
subject
is the
bop^
simple subject, is
; of
of the first
class
which
was
also,
was toas
too
young
complex
predicate,
and the young
the
copula, unmodified,
adverbial
element of
the
attribute, modified
simple
first class.
(7)
It
I has
been
eiatmed
Ziord fifccig)
Baeon
wrote
uforhg.
Shakespeare's
\
of which of
649.
R that
AnalysiB.
Lord Bacon
"
This
wrote
is
complex
modified element
sentence,
Shakespeare's
complex
Bacon
subject,
which
It, the
simple subject, is
a
by
that of of
wrote
speare's Shakea
works,
simple adjective
the which
third
class ; it is also
is the tory introduc-
simple,
declarative, subordinate
Lord Bacon the
wrote
sentence,
tJmt
expletive. (a)
in That
Lord
Bacon it.
works
is a substantive
clause
apposition with
(8)
She
is^-taUer
ihttn stater.
0"-f"g|^_
DlA(iRAMMmG.
261
650.
adverbial
Analysis.
element
"
Taller
is modified
by
than
a
simple
of the
third
class
it is also
sentence, of which
than
is the
connective, etc.
(10)
(9)
Indian It
\know8_
ptacB
aretuvUd,
I waa"coid
:?
that
'
Mb
fnereury\ fro9B.
where
(a) So (5)
in
(9)
is
an
adverb element
of
degree,
where
modified class.
by
tJiat the
mercury
froze, a simple
Place
adverbial
of the third
by
his
friends
; it
are
buried, a simple
buried and
adjective element
third
class. limits
are
(c) WJiere
joins its clause
is
relative
noun
conjunctive adverb
place.
to the
(11)
(a)
or
Demanded
by
ijohere Christ
a
should
be
born,
simple
class ; it is also
responsive, subordinate
a
sentence,
substantive is
etc.
a
connective. be well
to
connective that
is needed
no
clause.
ever a
It
may
interrogative word
connective.
262
GBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SBNTENCB.
(12)
man.
ItttUhe^so
the
(a)
either
As
, .
80
are
correlative,or
cannot
regarded
as
adverbs,
for
is, in
is the
copulative,not
predicate
So
of the is modified
attributive.
(6)
80,
principali^ntence, by As
is As is
the
the
boy,
simple
adverbial
element
is the the
copula, joining
As,
As
to
is also
80.
connective,
its subordinate
(13)
We
}w^fvork^
(a)
element
Will
work
is modified
by
the
comes,
comes a
simple
adverbial
class,of which
comes,
is the
preposition, and
subordinate
object;
is the
it is also
simple, declarative,
comes
sentence, of which
Jesus
the
simple predicate.
(5)
Till must
not
be
parsed
as
conjunctive
sentences.
(14)
DIAOBAMMINO.
263
{d)
is
a
As
.
as
are
or
responsive adverbs
The second
of
a"
degree.
is
a
First
a"
simple adverb,
profitable.
conjunctive
adverb
; it limits intereaing
joins its
subordinate
sentence
(15)
(a)
Then
is modified
by When
my
father
sentence,
and
my
mother
forsake
a
me,
partial-compound, compound,
mother member of the is the
;
adverbial
element
of the third
class ; it is also my
partialand my first
declarative, subordinate
of v^hicb my
father
compound,
the
complex
is the
subject, of which by
my,
a
father
is the
father,
base,
mother my,
a
is modified
first class ; my
second
member,
mother^
of
the
base, is modified
by
. .
(6)
When
sentence
When
.
then
are
responsive adverbs
and
is
conjunctive
then, which
adverb is
a
forsake,
and
joins its
subordinate
to
simple
adverb
limits
will take.
(16"
Blucher
orHixed
Iof~JWkte"lDO
W^J^ngf"n
I waenweting
om/iauffht
of-J^jgp"leonm
taet
jjsd
264
ilf
GBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
(a)
(6)
is
conjunctiye adverb
sentence adverb
to
of
time
; it limits
vj"ib
meeting^
and
joins its
subordinate is
a
arrived,
Just
simple
of
degree,
and
limits
a$.
(17)
he
\heeanie.''hunMer
the
*g
yrcift-fgtoer
The
(a) (b)
Humbler verbs. wiser.
The
first theS"d,
conjunctiveadverb
to the
of
degree degree,
became
; it limits wUer^
and
sentence
second adverb
the
are
is
simple
became
limits humbler.
grew,
copulative
fie grew
meaning
to the
degree to
which
(a) (b)
When
is
conjunctive
to
was
adverb
of time
; it limits
heard, and
joins
sentence
an
grieved,
adverb of manner, is not connective.
as
indirect
interrogative or responsive
a
had limiting
obtained. is
a
How
(c)
clause
That
to
relative
pronoun,
used
the
object
of bore ; it
joins its
reputation.
"
651. AnalysiB.
reputation
that he
J bore
was
grieved when
his
I heard
how is
a
he had
obtained
the
among
neighbors
complex
declarative
DIAGRAMMING.
265
sentence,
was
of
which when I
is heard
the
simple
how the he
subject,
had
of
which that
was
sentence,
he bore is the
grieved
his
obtained
reputation
which he had adverbial
among the
neighbors predicate,
that class is the he
;
is
complex^predicate,
by
his
a
grieved
obtained element
simple
when
heard
a
reputation
of of the which third /
bore it is
neighbors,
complex
complex,
unmodified had
declarative,
;
sentence,
tence, sen-
simple
when
subject,
how he
of the of
also,
among his
heard
obtained
reputation
which heard of
he
bore
neighbors
modified
is the
complex
a
predicate,
adverbial
the first
simple
class clause the
;
predicate,
it to is also
by
when,
simple
element the
the
subordinate heard he
;
connective,
is among is also is the had
a
complex
how he
loas
grieved;
that class of which
modified,
his
reputation
of the third
bore it he
complex
objective
element
complex, simple
indirect-interrogative, subject,
unmodified
;
sentence,
sentence,
his
also,
is the
obtained
how
the of
reputation
which had element
that obtained of
a
neighbors
complex by
how,
that first he
predicate,
a
predicate,
also
modified
simple
bore
;
by
the
reputation
of the
among
neighbors, base, by
is
complex by
among
a
element
class of
reputation,
first
the,
his
simple
adjective
a
element
the
class,
of of the which
that
simple
adjective
element
class is
simple, subject,
is the
subordinate
of which of
sentence,
sentence,
which
the his
simple neighbors
also,
bore of bore his which is
that
among
predicate, simple
its
simple
first class his
predicate,
;
modified the
tive, connec-
by
element
that he
it is
also
to
joining
bore is of
among
neighbors,
a
reputation
ment eleand of the
modified,
the the second
by
among of
neighbors,
among
complex
is
class,
is
neighbors
base,
neighbors,
first class.
noun,
modified
by
his,
simple
adjective
266
GBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
ABRIDGMENT.
Simple Sentence may be changed to one that is complex by expanding any one of its words or phrases into A ivise man will always be sought a proposition. Thus,
652.
'*
by
the
those
thxU
if simple sentence ; but and the phrase desiringto learn, be exword panded mse^ shall have into propositions, the complex senwe tence, A man that is tvise will always be sought by those which the same desire to learn^'* thought. expresses
desiring
to
leam^'^ is
"
653. 654.
Expanflion.
"
This
Sentence
process may
may be
be
called
expansion.,
Complex
is
simple by contracting
or
its
the. Franklin, wh" was phrases. Thus, "Dr. bred a printer,'*: was useful institutions, of many projector "f^Because the truths are some of corr^prehension, difficult He guished that he might see the distinweak came rejectthem,"
words
"
are statesman,^'*
complex
sentences;
but
we
may
make
clauses
them
:
"
simple by
Dr.
was
contracting their subordinate stitutio Franklin, the projectorof Tttany useful inbred a printer," Some truths being difficult
"
rejectthem,"
process
"
He
came
to
see
Abridgment.
are
"
77ie into
changed
by which equivalentwords or
subordinate
phrases
is
abridgment.
SENEBAL FBINOIPLES OF has ABBIDailENT. the
same
656. in
(1)
that
The
Abridged
sentence
as
Part
construction
the
simple
the
clause
in the
complex
tence; sen-
is, it is either
or substantive, adjective,
verbial. ad-
ABRIDGMENT.
867
the construction
or
'
(a)
The the
best
way
to
of
clause it may
is
to
observe
construction And
to
phrase
of
into
a
which
or
be serve ob-
abridged.
the
determine of the
word be
phrase,
construction
it may
expanded.
(2)
It will
be
observed
from
it is
are
the
changed
are
in
nate subordiwithout
abridged
Since the
of be of
Abridgment.
a
"
may
kinds
expressed by abridgment:
of
a
word
or
thought phra%e^there
and
of
arise Phrase
Word
Abridgment
be
Abridgment.
659. The Basis word
abridgment
may
noun^
an
be seen from as a participle^ adjective^ ox abridging may the following: The our Jones, who was doctor^ died." "The who is plat/boy that is studious will learn." man, ing with the children^ is my uncle."
" "
(a)
and
our are
Clauses
denoting time
and
"
or
reason
"
are
their
When
had the
risen
was
we
sued pur-
in time
train
the
same
in
**
thought
train
as
*^The
having risen, we
were
pursued
our
and
The
being late, of
a
in time."
660.
The
or an
"
Basis
be
tional preposi-
that is man infinitive phrase. Thus, "A He lied that he of generosity; and generous^'* A man "He lied to escape punishment,'** might escape punishment^'' (a) (h)
clauses money which
"
The
inflnitive
phrase phrase
a
is
employed
also
a
^^
=
introduced The
by
iniiiiitive
abridge
certain
^*
adjective
me some
introduced with
to
by
I may
preposition buy
^
relative,as
**
Send
which
my
dinner which
Send
me
**
some
money
to
with
buy my
to
dinner.^
*'For
to
strive,"
At
which
shoot,"
is its ante-
On
which
a
found
or abridgments depend," etc., are contractions does that is,it not join peculiar use of the relative,
in which
to
26S
cedent
its the
GRAMMAR
OF
THA
fiKGLIfiH
SfiKTfilKCfi.
limitingclause.
but of does the
The
not
relative in such
cases
relates the
not
or
refers
to
antecedent,
antecedent
to
join anything
an
to it ; for
infinitive limits
infinitive The
does
require
nective con-
join it
to the
relative
as
itself is the
an
object
element,
in
the
adverbial
as
interrogative
used
substantives
to
an
are
abridged by omitting
and may whtU
etc.
subject, changing
v3hom
to oaky to
predicate
the
to
infinitive,
whom
we
placing
cLsk
**
=
before
*^
it the
not
interrogativeword;
In
not
I know
have
to dOi where
to look, whom
send, when
the words
begin,
how
to
proceed, abridged
But
it must
not
no
be
understood
that either
whom,
connectives
in the
a
expanded
connective.
in the
interrogativeword
is ever
OASE 661.
same
as
OF If the the
SUBJECT
DT
ABBIDGED
FBOFOSITIOITS. the
tained re-
in the
Ex. I and
"
"I
desire
I desire
to learnt
(See
Rules
II.)
When the
clause does subject of the subordinate not refer to the same as the subjectof the principal clause, is in the nominative it is retained in the abridgment, and the objective absolute case, the possessive, or ; as : 662.
"
**
When
shame
is had
gone"
stolen he
*'
Shame
money
being lost,
=
all of
is gone.** the
that
he
the be
a
"I
=
heard
stealing
to be
a
that
merchant'^
I desire
merchant,'''^
(See
I, II, and
III.)
OASE 663.
OF The
OOMFLEMENT
IN
ABBIDOED
a
FBOFOSITIOITS. is either
an
complement
a
of
copulative verb
adjectiveor
664. If
noun^
an
or
some
expression so used.
a
it will remain adjective, adjective and modify the subject of the abridged proposition.
it is
predicate
in
verb
the
ABRIDGMENT.
269
665.
If it is
noun
or
pronoun,
its
case
will
always
be
used as the or governed by Rule VI : A noun pronoun its case complement of a copulativeverb is in the same as When the subjectof a copulative subject. Exception. is possessive, the complement is nominative. participle
"
(a)
She
me
niaatration
sentence
of
Rulo." is
**If
were so
shej^^
is /, the
**
I wished
**
to
be
"/ie/*
in either
to be
nominative,
sabject.
him his
He
wished
her,''^ Me,
the
*^
sabject being
a
of to be, is
objective,and
asked
is the the
same or
objective.
of the
He
scholar,
in the
case.
we
opinion/'
be used either for
He,
subject
is participle, is in the
as same
nominative
If
a
absolute, and
should it to be appears the
'scholar,
in the tive nomina-
complement,
construction nominative
pronoun show
reason
would
no
absolute
to the
since
supposing
of all
this such
an
exception
In
a
above,
complements
is
a man
are participles
in the
absolute
case.
*'
(")
called
abridging certain
thief,
form
same
^^
Here
that in
is
the take
relative its
as
dropped,
but upon read and the which
:
**
and
noun
nothing
that the is the clause is
a man
appears
the is
abridged
put in the
the Man above is
to
place
word
complement
called
case
the
depends.
a
Thus,
^^ thief,
sentence
abridged
nominative
to
Here
in is
the
no
thief
for
man,
nominative.
This,
finite
a
however,
the and verb I I
am am
exception
A
VI,
subject
of
is, is also
of
a
subject
an or
of called,
substantive
same
may
be
;
subject
be the
both the
same
in-finite verb
sentence
a
or
it may
object of
sentence.
preposition
that
we
subject of why
And
participlein
the the
not
aware
last statement,
unable the
to understand
may
be
object
of
one
and
subject
the
of another.
to be
it is
certainly not
a man
inconsistent be at the
with
same
realityof
the I may
thought
conveyed
action while he
; for
may
objector recipient
strike
**
of
one
and is my
For which
ple, exam-
taking
of
my
may that
be say of
expressed,
that
**
I struck cannot
thief taking
both
^*
money."
one
authors the
word say
or
the
object
and
a
subject
In
another," expressed
above for A and
no
also
every which
not
participle must
statements
are
subject
either the
understood,"
if be
inconsistent. it has
no
sentence,
word
can
thief is supplied
the
a
subject
that
of
taking,
subject,
sentence.
for
subject
without
destroying
the be about consulted
the
little the he
reasoning
be
will make
it clear
thief is both
doubts
object of struck
in the the
ter, mat-
entertain
no
being
identical
270
oljeet that
GBAHMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
6ENTENGE.
was
struck,
and the
the
only
reason
that he
was
could the
give
of
for the
making
taking, (e)
of
him
the
object of
it is evident
must
striking
is that
agent
But
while
that
noun
or
pronoun it
can
may
be found
in two bat Me
one
constructions, it
them.
be
remembered in the
that
be
governed by
to
For
example,
the
sentence,
the
**He
wants
learn/'
not
^*
is
nominative,
it is the
man
because
it is the
subject of
to learn.
wants,
because I
saw a
subject of
a
infinitive
sentence,
aiid of the
called
man thief,**
is both
the
object
it is the
subject
But
man,
of
called, but
the
is
objective only
of
because
object
saw.
thief,
the
complement
of called.
called, is
of In
objective tq agree
**That
in case
with
subject
been the is
Bxcoption.
"
h^ is
has
never
this,the subject
is scholar, both
in the
finite verb
is to the
participle leaving
been but
scholar
Jie to
possessive
a
his, and
has
never
have,
of
^*
His
being
is
scholar
subject
being,
nominative the
evidently possessive;
f
was
complement,
nominative taken
(1) Scholar
(2)
any become No
was
before
clause process
change
in
has
place
in the
of
change
its case,
unless the
it should
follow
the
rule
and
possessive when
It is not it denote
subject becomes
it does
not
possessive.
the
(3)
does
possessive,for
have
possessivesign,neither
all such is nomi-
possession.
or
the
complement
in
cases,
666.
Diagram
and
"
to
italicized words:
(1)
(2)
belief is
no
that need
stars
are
suns
is held
by
astronomers.
that the
she soul
be
present.
has been
(3) (4)
(6)
opinion
that
is immortal
almost
universally longer.
put
his
no
cannot
put
fire into
speeches
the world
should
speeches
into
(6)
the
The
sumptuous
are now
have in
lighted
the
since the
the
ginning beof
of time
only
pictures of
historian
past.
ABRIDGMBNT.
271
(7)
star
The
smallest in
dewdrop
endeavor the reins ruins
to
that
lies
on
the
meadow
at
night
has
sleeping (8)
We His in
its bosom.
secure
should hands
the
friendship place
loved
that
of
the
Being
been
that
holds
of
the
marked
(10)
(11)
never
betray
that in
the
heart
that
her.
is the
was are
(12) (13)
of
Webster There
country
a
will
remember
with will
pride.
occasions in
a
life in which
great mind
live years
rapt enjoyment
moment.
to combat
was
(14)
knight
the
The
challenge
the
a
given by touching
to encounter.
the shield
of
the
challenger
Atlantic
wished that
(15)
winds
single region
fan. crime such
the
Indians
can
now
call their
own
do
the
(16)
attempt
of
being
to
young
man,
which upon
the
honorable
I shall
gentleman
spirit of
nor
decency
charged
me,
neither The
palliate
deny.
tJiot honor feels.
one
(17) (18)
to
It is not
always
whose
easy
to
make
one*s
self
just
what
wishes
be.
(19) He,
prisoner (20) (21) (22) (23) (25)
on
beneath the
proud
isle of made
as
footstep Europe
St. Helena. what he
as
trembled,
became
rock-bound
to have
God A He We
seems
him
was.
has
three
me
times what I
much
B.
told
are
never
before.
here
to hear
what
in return what
away.
refused
to divide
are
stolen.
(26)
(27) "2S) (29) (30)
virtuous
came were same
happy.
satisfied.
many
son
has wins
the
indications
a"
his father.
may
laugh.
heart of also fortifies it. others will himself be blest.
purifiesthe
seeks the
to shoot
good
threatened
whoever
Toward
night
the
schoolmaster
to the
cottage where
little friend
lay sick,
was a
There Youth
time time
when when
was
free to roam. of
is the
the seeds
character
are
sown.
lovers'
vows
in every
whispered
word.
272
OBAMMAE
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTBNCB.
(37) At midnight,In
The Turk
When
Should tremble
in the
wave
is a coral grove
rove. gold-fish
delight, reign.
farewell shot
we
soldier
his discharged
our
hero
buried.
solemn
droningflight.
a
(42) (43) I
(44)
governess.
general appointedcaptain.
sick. darkened train
was
(45) The boy (46) He reached the station justas the (47) Gather roses while they bloom. (48) Smile whenever you can.
(49)
While there is
the
room.
starting.
(50) The (51) You may wait tillthe train arrives. (52) You cannot reap until afteryou sow. moment as it flies. (53) Improve each shining (54) He has been here ever since his brother came. ascend. (55) Oft as the morning dawns should gratitude (56) He was just about to start when I called him back, (57) She has not been here since you came.
(58)
When
me.
the tombs
of envy
(59) Knowledge
timber
should
not
much
tillthey
are
the
sun
was
low,
snow.
When
wherever nightovertakes (62) He sleeps (63) He builds a palaceof ice where the
fall.
hath He removed
(64)
our
Where
there^s
as
(65) As far
the east
us.
far
from transgressioiis
_-^i
ABRIDGMENT.
278
(66) (67)
which riven
Man
cannot
act
more
perfidious part
to deceive.
than
to
use
his utmost
efforts to obtain No
axe
confidence had
in order
levelled the
forms
giant
of that the
the had
crowded been
grove blasted
in and of
a
the
fantastic
of withered
by lightning growth
Whilst the
contrasted
strangely
of all these
verdant
freshness
younger.
(68)
on
idly
and
stupidly gazing
it
this menacing
meteor,
the
which whole
their
horizon,
the
suddenly
the
burst, and
Camatic.
poured
down
upon
plains of
and who
(69) Grod, by
all
whose
kindness
we
live,whom
he
we
worship,
ated cre-
things, is eternal.
I knew
(70)
to
why
he
he
was
sent
there, how
who when the
is to
he
is
is to go
next, and
comes,
is to return
misfortune hand
a
and do
when
we
on
listless desert
stretches
sky,
of
"
then
realize
friendship.
and affairs have of the shown
me
(72)
loose
The
world
that writer^s
one
half
history
Wendell
is
conjecture, and
much
rest
is the
opinion.
Phillips.
(73)
On
the
bosom the
sun
of
river.
his
Where And
unloosed
the
starlightstreamed
a
Sailed
vessel,light and
the Greeks
(74)
Once As
again
in their
arise.
noblest hours.
country's
667.
Discuss
Diagram
to
and
analyze
attention givingspecial
was now
the clauses.
the
The
sun
edge
of the
level
(2) (3)
were
The
heavens
the firmament
showeth
howling
in
of
the
wolf
and with
the the
shrill
screaming
of the
of
the
panther
nightly
not
concert
war-whoop
savages.
to
ought
the
or
to
the sacrifice
sentiments
of the soul
gratifythe
appetites of
You
body.
he is in has that
no
fault
blossoms
autumn
(6) If spring
Th)B He
man
will have
no
fruit.
without
neglects his
business
will
soon,
be
business.
reads all
whatever
our
is instructive. is ourselves
to Jrsuiw
(9)
And
knowledge
274
OBAMMAB
OF
THB
BNGLISH
SENTENCE.
has
fine
deBcriptionBof morning,
but
not
so
maxiy
as
woods
are
husked^ the
and
sent
waters
rest,
lake is dark
to Oxford
no
stilL
a
king
troop of horse;
but force.
tories own
argument
you the
The
bounding
with
steed
pompously pleasure
bestride,
the
Shares
and
pride.
tells
that
statue
lies hurUd
in
block
of marble.
(16)
not, in mournful
an
numbers,
dream.
Life is hut
empty
"red.
a" ever.
He She Qood
looks is
as
as
"r
hateful
morning^ gentlemen.
thanks
to
(20) Many
As
for
your
kindness. lustre
night
stars, woe
gives to
man.
(22) (23)
to none^
to all she
never
smiles
once
extends
but rejects,
on a
offends.
summer^s
sweet
a
day
with
meadows shares
hay.
(24)
For The
felon^s
cell.
earthly type
of hell.
Demosthenes
eloquence.
(26) was a foot deep, (27) The snow (28) They painted the house white, (29) She is without a home, (30) He made the axe sharp, (31) It is possible that we are wrong, this course that I will pursue no longer. (32) Let it be understood s Progress is that peculiarity of the Pilgrim'' (33) The characteristic
was
pole
six
feet long,
it
is the
only
work
of
the
kind
a man
that
possesses soul
so
strong human
interest
(34)
Breathes Who
never
there
to
with hath my
dead.
?
a
himself own,
to
said,
land ills
This
is my the
native
(35)
HI
fares
land,
hastening
prey^
Where
wealth
accumulates the
and
men
decay.
have
(36)
Poets Were
praise they
what
would
got
known
ABRIDGMENT.
275
(37)
than outside.
I have
men
observed
to
that the
in
all ages
women
have that
we
been
more
ful care-
adorn
part of the
head
generally call
About
the
(38)
of
be
an
How
long
end
was
it
before the
has
man
came
to
three-quarters might
hour, The
(39)
(40) (41)
lose his
why
God
ordained
faith
glorified.
But For
own
Son
of
Man
hath
not
man
where if he
to
shall it ?
profit a
gain
the
whole
world
and
(42)
with of
The
alarmed
colonists
that
the
yells of
the
the
savages
every WesU
fitful gust of
issued
from
interminable
the
(43)
embossed
From
beneath
the flap of
ornamented
au
enormous
pocket
martial
of
soiled
vest
of
silk,heavily
which, from
with
seen
tarnished
silver^ace,projected an
company, of
war.
instrument,
been
being
some
in such
might
have
easily mistaken
The fashion that
for
mischievous the
implement
bear
(44)
to the
plates of
we
magazines
street.
resemblance ];^ostriking
humanity
A proper all the
meet
(46)
themselves
description of
of
habit
of
chewing
and
tobacco the
would
haust ex-
filthyadjectives
further
ever are use.
language,
spoil
adjectives
made
for
Did it
(46)
and
occur
to
you
what
you
are, what
you
were
for,
whither
you of
going
of
?
to
(47)
disasters
the
greatest benefits
a
be
reaped
men.
from
great financial
saving
man
large crop by
your all sorts of
of young what
(48) (49)
must
no
know receive
dress
your
business
is.
will
the most
excellent you
remember
starves
that, if
those
you
it,and
the
it leads advice
that you
you,
that
never
give
any
money. You
to
are
(60)
are
worth
to
yourself what
you xchere
you
are
are
capable
of
of
enjoying ;
you
worth
society the
Indian know
happiness
when
capable
are
imparting.
(61)
The We
knows
not
his friends
buried.
departed.
office.
so soon
why
he
declined
the
obtained
man
is
mystery
no
to
me. was
the
confessed
court.
his
guilt
is
is
when
evidence
found
against him
surprised the
he he gave
(66) (67)
(68)
the
a a
matter
of
uncertainty.
discussed.
concealed
was
body
subject
was was
that is much
decision
guilty.
murdered.
(69)
general opinion
Morgan
276 (60)
your
OBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
8ENTBNGE.
It Ib
care
so
liUU
for
the
unproyement
of
mincL
The
we a
(61) (02)
nation
f is
and
now
answered.
Bursts
through gUde
zephyrs play,
greenwood,
Soft the
And
the Sweetest
herald
vtaving birches
incense
on our
sprinkle
way.
(03) I hear that the young prince is an excellent scholar. (04) To see you here on such a day surprises me. know love them. who (65) Animals whom we worship. (06) We know God is the Lord. whose (07) Blessed is the man (08) He accepts what others reject. in dignified displeasure. (09) After denying the charge he withdrew continued the march. sun rose we our (70) After lies under monument dec"hmarble a (71) Many a despicable wretch
rated with
2i,
flatteringepitaph.
Dante stood before the gates of All
Hell,he
read
over
portal's
here.
awful
inscription: from
hope abandon,
on
ye who
enter
Sentences
Pope's Essay
I.
CriticiBm.
'Tis with Go
our
judgments
each
as
our
watches,
his
own.
none
just alike,yet
believes
II.
In
poets
as
true
as
genius
is but
rare,
True
taste
seldom
is the
III.
critic's share.
Some And
are some
bewildered made
in the
maze
of
schools.
but
coxcombs
IV.
nature
meant
fools.
Some Turned
have
at first for
wits, then
poets, passed.
fools
at
proved plain
last.
Nature And
to all
things
fixed
the
limits
fit.
wisely
curbed
proud
VI.
man's
pretending wit
Where The
beams
of warm soft
imagination play,
away.
memory's
figures melt
SELECTIONS.
277
VII*
Hear
When
how
to
learned repress,
her
useful rules
our
indites,
indulge
flights.
work's your
study
meditate
and
delight.
by day
and
by night
IX.
Of
'
all the
causes
which
conspire
and with
to blind
Man's What Is
erring judgment,
the weak head
misguide
the
mind, rules.
strongest bias
of fools.
pride, the
never-failingvice
X.
Trust Make
not
use
yourself;
of every
but
your
"
to
know,
friend
foe,
XI.
little learning is
dangerous thing
not
;
:
deep,
shallow
or
taste
the
Pierian
spring
the
draughts
intoxicate
us
brain,
again.
perfect judge
the
same
will read
worl^of
wit writ.
With
spiritthat
XIII.
its author
Whoever Thinks
thinks what
faultless
was,
nor
piece to is,nor
ne^er
XIV.
Poets,
The With And
like
to trace
naked
and
the
cover
living grace.
every their
gold
hide
and
jewels
part,
of art.
with
ornaments
want
XV. But
true
the
unchanging
it shines
none.
sun, ;
Clears It
and
whatever
upon
gildsall objects,but
it alters
278
GBAMMA"
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
XVI. Some
by
old in
words
to fame
mere
have modems
made
pretence,
phrase,
in their sense.
a
labored the
nothings, unlearned,
in
so
strange
the
style,
smile.
and
make
learned
xvn. Be
not
the
first
by
to
whom
new
are
tried.
Nor
lay
aside.
xvni. True As
ease
in
move
writing
comes
from have
art,
not
chance,
to dance.
those
easiest
who
XIX.
learned
We Our
think wiser
our
fathers
no
fools,^
wise
we us
grow
so.
sons,
doubt,
XX.
will think
Some
valuing
those
own
side
or
mind.
:
Still make
themselves
think but
we
measure
of mankind
Fondly
When
we
we
merit
then.
men.
praise
ourselves
in other
XXI.
When
It draws
first that up
sun
too
powerful
obscure
beams
displays,
vapors
which
its rays.
XXII.
Be His
thou
the
first true
merit
to befriend
praise
is
lost,who
All As
seems
infected
that
to
the
infected
spy. eye.
all looks
yellow
the
jaundiced
Sentences
from
Pope's Essay
I.
on
Han.
Awake,
To
my
1 leave
all
meaner
things
low
ambition,
the
pride
of
kings.
SELECTIONS.
279
since
life can
little more
us
sapply
to
just
to look
about
and
scene
die,
man
Expatiate
A A Or
free
maze
of
a
;
:
mighty wild,
but
not
plan
where
weeds
and with
ni.
promiscuous shoot,
fruit.
garden, tempting
above,
but
or
man
below,
what
we
reason
from IV.
know
Of man,
From
what
see
we
but
or
his station
to
here.
refer ?
which
to reason,
which
Through
'Tis
ours
worlds
to trace
unnumbered him
though
in
our
the
Grod
be
known,
only
VI.
own.
He,
See
who worlds
through
on
vast
immensity
compose
one
can
pierce.
worlds
universe.
runs.
Observe
What What
system
planets
heaven
suns,
being peoples
has
star,
as we are.
May
tell
why
made
shall know
him he
why
breaks
man
restrains
fierycourse,
the
a
or
drives
o*er the
plain ;
the
l^en
Is
now
dull ox,
why
now
now
clod.
victim, and
man^s
EgypVs
and dulness
Grod ;
Then His
shall
pride
comprehend why
actions',passions\ being's, use and end ; Why doing, suffering,checked, impelled ; and This hour a deity. a slave, the next
VIII.
Heaven
All From Or who but
from the
hides
the
book
of
Fate,
:
prescribed
men,
brutes could
from here
what ?
know spirits
suffer
being
below
280
QSAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
not
nature
suns
from when
this
burning
to one
livid deaths
or
earthquakes swallow,
grave, whole
when
sweep ?
nations
deep
X.
As
much
that
end
constant
as
coarse
requires
desires ;
Of showers
As As much
men
and
eternal
sunshine,
temperate,
XI.
springs, and
skies,
wise.
forever
calm,
rational if not
we
call.
with
pleased
with
nothing,
blessed
all?
XII.
Why
For
has this
not
man
microscopic
man
eye
a
plain reason,
is not
fly.
XIII.
thundered him he
opening
music had
ears,
stunned
would
of the
sphprps.
still
wish
that
heaven and
left him
whispering zephyr,
XIV.
Who Alike
finds
not
Providence it
all
good
and
wise,
in what
gives, and
XV.
what
denies?
And,
Alike The That
if each
system
in
gradation roll.
whole
not ;
all
system
only,
whole
must
fall.
XVI.
All
are
but
parts of
nature
one
stupendous whole,
God the souL
Whose
body
is,and
XVII.
Know The
then proper
thyself,presume study
of mankind
not
God
to scan
is Man.
SELECTIONS.
281
XVIII.
Could
he
whose
or
bind,
?
Describe,
fix
movement
of his mind
XIX.
Two
principlesin
to urge,
a
human and
reason
nature
reign
'
"
to restrain
good,
its
nor
that
to
bad,
or
we
call ;
works
to
end,
; to
move
govern
all ;
And,
Ascribe
operation, still
their
good
improper,
ill.
XX.
of motion, balance
acts
the
soul;
comparing
rules
the
whole.
XXI.
Modes
of self-love the
passions
moves
we
may them
call ; all.
*Tis real
good,
or
seeming,
XXII.
As On
The Wild
fruits savage
surest
ungrateful
stalks virtues
to the
planter's care,
to
bear.
root.
passions shoot,
at their
nature's
vigor working
XXIII.
Vice
is
monster
of
so
frightfulmien.
but
to be
seen
As,
Yet We
to be
seen
hated, needs
too
with
her
face.
first
endure,
pity, then
embrace.
670.
Seleotions from
Gary's Dante's
Inferno.
In
the
midway
me
of this
a
our
mortal
life,
e'en wild its
to tell
I found Gone It
were
in the easy
from
no
and
task, how
robust
savage and
That Which
forest, how
to remember
rough
growth,
Line
only, my
not
dismay
death.
"
Renews,
in bitterness
far from
1, canto
1.
282
GBAMMAB
OF
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
n.
Tet to diflooone
of what
there
good befell,
there.
"
Line
How Such
first I entered
can
say,
sleepy
senses
dolness
instant
trae
weigh'd
I left,
My
But The
down,
a
when
path
heart
when
mountain's had
saw
clos'd
that valley,
pierced
that
my
with broad
dread,
I lookM
aloft,and
with
his shoulders
Already vested
Who
leads
planet's beam.
safe
all wanderers
through
every
way.
"
Line
10.
IV. Those
Are
None
to be
fear*d, whence
none
evil may
else,for
are
terrible beside.
V.
Line
87,
canto
2.
As
Bent Rise So And That
was
florets, by
down and
the
frostyair
their
of
night
has
clos'd,when
on
day
blanched
;
their
leaves.
all unfolded
my
to my
spiry stems
new
faintingvigor
heart
one
restor'd.
courage ran.
"
such
kindly
soon
as
undaunted
replied.
Line
127.
VI.
lake.
Line
91f canto
^.
VII.
One
stillanother
the
earth
beneath
Adam's
themselves
at
a
by
falcon
one
shore.
"
beck,
at his
call.
Line
105.
VIII. This So
clammy
dews
"
Fear
Line
121.
SELECTIONS.
288
deep slumber
that main
in my I shook
brain
crash
heavy thimder,
one
myself,
"
by
force rous'd.
X.
Xt'nel,
canto
4.
We,
Those
while
he
spake,
ceasM
not
our so
onward I
name
road,
Line
Still passing
through
the wood
; for
thick spirits
beset
XI.
"
61.
So
I beheld
united
the
bright
school song.
of sublimest like
an
eagle soars.
^Line%9.
My
Into And
sage
a
guide leads
ever come
me, vez'd
from with
no
climate
storms
to a
part I
where
xin.
lightshines.
^Line
145.
There
Minos
:
stands
of all
Grinning
Who Giyes
with
ghastly
feature
he,
the
crimes, beneath,
:
dismisses him
According
For when
he
foldeth him
; and
before
comes
ill-fated
severe
soul,
It all confesses Of
that
judge place
sins,consideringwhat
the
in hell
so
Suits
transgression,with
it to descend. XIV. As
his tail
oft
Himself
He dooms
Line
4, canto
6.
in
large troops
reigns.
borne
And
The
multitudinous,
on starlings
when
winter
are
their
wings
abroad,
"
So bears
the tyrannous
gust those
XV. Soon
as
evil souls.
Line
40.
the
wind my
Sway'd
**0 With
them
toward
I spirits
fram'd hold
si)eech:
Line 77.
wearied us, if
discourse
"
by
none
else restrain'd."
284
QBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
XVI. As doyea
By
And
fond
desire
invited, on
sweet
wide
nests
firm, to their
the issuM
Cleave Thus
air, wafted
from
the that
by
their
along
Dido
troop, where
ranks.
such force
"
They through My
cry
ill air
speeding
; with
by strong prevail'd
XVII.
affection
urg^d.
Line
80.
"
gracious
the
a
creature
and
benign
! who
go*st
Visiting,through Us,
Our Since who world
obscure,
stain imbru'd
;
bloody
of for
our
If, for
all,we thy
evil
own^d, arise,
"
pray*r
thou
should
on
peace
hast
pity
plight."
Line
87.
xvni.
"
is
quickly learnt,
from
me
Entangled
Ta*en
by
cruel
that
sort
fair
as
form,
in such
grieves me
still.*'
"
Line
99.
XIX. No Of
to
remember
I
days
"
joy,
when
mis'ry
is at hand
Line
118.
XX.
We,
Of
o'er the
shades
thrown
the
heavy tempest
their
passing, set
that
feet seem'd.
"
Upon
emptiness,
substance
Line
33,
canto
6.
XXI.
Consult
thy knowledge
each
; that
decides
That,
as
thing
to
more
It feels
more
sensibly
both
pain.
"
Line
108.
XXII.
So On
'tis will'd
high,
there
where
on
the
Heav'n's
vengeance
the
proud.
"
Line
10,
canto
7.
SELECTIONS.
285
descending
the dismal
to the
fourth
steep ledge,
all the
woe
"
Gain*d
Hems
shore, that
in of all the
universe.
XXIV.
Line
16.
Not Or
all the
ever
gold that
rest
is beneath
the
moon, souls
"
hath
been, of these
for
one.
toil-worn
Might purchase
Line
65.
XXY.
My
We Its We
theme reachM
pursuing,
the
I relate that
ere our
lofty turret's
where afar
remote
base,
eyes
height ascended,
marked,
the and
two
cressets
hung
from
another that
light
scarce
"
signal, so
catch
could
its beam.
Line
1, canto
8.
XXVI.
There
How Who many here
now
above
hold
themselves shall
mighty kings
in the
wallow
mire,
"
Leaving
behind
horrible
dispraise 1
Line
47.
XXVII.
The
hue,
coward I
saw
dread my
on
my
turn
pale
had
cheeks
Imprinted,
ChasM And that
guide
back,
worn.
"
newly they
inwardly
restrained
Line
1, canto
9.
frogs
ground
a
each
one
heap
so
; more
saw
than
thousand
one
spirits
sound.
,
Destroyed,
Who
fleeingbefore
feet the
passed
with
unwet
Stygian
"
Line
?"
XXIX.
Upon By
And
the
utmost rocks
verge environ'
of d
craggy
woes
came.
were
Where
beneath
to
more
yet
stow'd
here
shun
the
horrible
excess
286
6RAMHAB
OV
THB
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
Of
fetid exhalation,
the
npward
we
cast
From
profound abyss,
monament
behind
the
lid
Of
great
stood
:
retirM,
**
Whereon
I have
in
charge
Line
Tope Anastasius,
From the
Fhotinus
drew
"
right path."
XXX.
1,
canto
IL
The
We Such
place
came,
where
was
to
descend
as
the and
precipice
on
rough
Alp,
eye
objectlay,as
every
would
Line
1, canto
12.
proceed,
and
:
know shalt
thou
art
now
round,
sand and
come
Upon
Around As
horrid
look
therefore thou
thee,
my
such
things
shalt behold.
"
would
speech
discredit.
Line
19,
canto
13.
XXXII. Men
once
were
we,
that
now
are
rooted
here.
"
Line
38.
XXXIII.
My
Just
soul, disdainful
in death I was, from
and
disgusted, sought
and I
Refuge
as
scorn,
became.
"
unjust
toward
mysell
Line
72.
of you,
return
the from
world wrong
indeed my
he
memory, cruel
that blow.
lies
"
prostrate under
envy's
XXXY.
""ne
77.
When The
departs
seventh wood it
fierce soul
torn
from
the
to
body, by itself
the the
Thence
asunder
gulf falls.
chance of
By
No
Minos
doom'd,
into but
place assigned,
it,there
a
wheresoever
as a
Hurls
sprouting,
grain
thence
spelt,
Line 9a
It rises to A savage
sapling,growing
plant
"
'
SELECTIONS.
287
yet
to listen to the
trunk
,
stood, expecting
noise wild
speech,
man
when
us
surprised,as
hoar and
perceives
his and
the who
approach
heasts
place boughs
"
BtationM
watch,
of the hears.
Loud
rustlinground
him
Line
112.
XXXVII.
Soon
as
the
charity
of native
land leaves
now
"
Wrought
Was
in my
bosom,
to him
I the scatterM
Collected, and
hoarse
restor'd,who
with
utterance.
Line
1, canto
14.
XXXVIII. To We
X
the third
limit the
thence second
came,
which and
from of
the
round
Divides,
where
justiceis display*d
"
Contrivance
horrible.
XXXIX.
Line
4,
Things
A
then
first
next
seen
plain
we
reachM,
that
from
Each
plant repelPd.
XL. The mournful
Line
7.
wood
round the
waves
round
Its
garland on
the
all
sides,as
XLI.
wood
"
Spreads
sad
foss.
Line
10.
Of naked
All
spirits many
flock
I saw, laws
"
Subjected.
Line
IS,
O'er Dilated On
sand of
fell
slowly wafting
fiakes the of wind
snow
down
as fire,
Alpine summit,
when
is hushM.
"
Line
26.
XLIII.
Unceasing
Now The
was
the that
play of
way
wretched
hands.
off
^
this, now
glancing, to shake
'
Line
37.
288
OBAliMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
XUV. he himself, who Straight exclaimM My guideof him, dead such now When living,
was
:
'*
aware
I ask'd
as
Such
I waB
"
I am.**
Line
46.
XLV.
kingswas one, Who and held, the Theban walls with siege, girt As stillhe seems to hold,God in disdain. And sets His highomnipotence at naught.
seven
This of the
"
Line
64.
XLVI.
on Silently from the gushes
we
pass'd
yet lifts
^-Line 72.
To
where
there
forests^ bound
wave
A little brook,whose
crimson'd
My
thee,since
that gate
none
threshold is to
Denied,naught else so worthy of regard. As is this river, has thine eye discerned, 0*er which the flaming all is quenched. volley
XLVIII. So That The
"
Line 81.
spake my guide; and I him thence besought, to know. havinggiv*nme appetite food he too would give, that hunger crav'd.
"
Line 86.
XLIX,
A mountain
Call'd Ida,joyousonce with leaves and streams, Deserted now like a forbidden thing.
Lethe But
not within
this
hollow,in the
Whither Whose
blame
hath been
by penitence remov'd.
Line
131
SELECTIONS.
289
LI,
One
of the
solid in the
margins
o'er, and
water.
bears from
us
now
Enveloped Arising,
Both
mist, that
the from
stream
hovers
saves
fire
piers and
-"Line
LII.
1,
canto
15.
They
One And As
an
each eyes
one
ey'd
us,
as a
at eventide
new
another
us
under
moon,
toward
sharpened
their
sight as
eye.
keen
"
Line
17.
Lin.
**
son
I"
said he,
"
whoever
a
throng
years,
One No
instant fan
to ventilate
him,
when
Smites
sorest.'
'
"
Line
37.
only
so
would
I have
thee have
clearly note
no
my
conscience
as
;
"
fortune
she
I stand list,
Line
101.
alone
I
th'
extremity
pac'd
mournful
"
seventh
where circle,
the
tribe Line
Were
seated. LVI.
41,
canto
17.
And A
when
amongst
I
saw
them with
looking round
azure
I came,
yellow
wore
purse
a
wrought,
and
That
lion's countenance
port.
"
Line
56.
Lvn.
Pursuing Among
^
thus
our
solitary way
and
the
not
our
crags
splintersof
the
the
rock,
"
Sped
feet without
help
of hands.
iine
17.
Lvni.
So
were
mine
eyes
inebriate whom
with
Of the vast
multitude,
various
to
Disflgur'd,that
they longed
stay and
Line
1,
canto
29,
290
QBAMMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
on,
nor
waste
Our As
words
his to
; for
so
language
by
is to
him,
"
others, understood
LX.
none.
Line
72,
canto
31.
O'er better
The Well And
waves
to
speed
her
rapid
course
lightbark pleas'd
the
of my
to leave
genius
so
lifts the
sea
sail,
;
cruel
behind
region
will I
sing,
sinful blot
In which Is
spiritfrom
to
purged, and
for ascent
Heaven
"
prepares.
Line
1,
canto
1, Purgatorio.
LXI. The Which I dawn had chasM the that matin from
ocean
hour afar
stream.
of
prime.
Line 114.
it,so
spy*d
trembling
of the
"
LXII.
My
Hath All
sins
were
horrible
; but
so
wide
arms
it receives
"
who
turn
Line
118,
canto
3.
divine
to
me
of thine
impart
the I may of
much.
form
to
of that in my Shalt
happy
behold
realm
shadow^
set
thoughts
me
forth
view,
leaves.
thy
favor'd
tree
to the
foot, and
crovm
myself
"
with
Line
20,
canto.
1, Paradiso,
than
not
vainly
such
doth
as
he
set
loose
from
shores
returns
he
forth,
skill.
and
wanteth
^Line
LXV. Let As Or The
not
one ere
116,
canto
13.
people be
reckons crop frown be
too
on
svdft
to
judge.
in
the
blades
field,
seen
ripe.
For
I have winter
thorn
rudely all
the
long
REVIEW
OF
SENTENCES
AND
ELEMENTS.
291
after
bear that
the
rose
upon way
its top ;
across
bark,
in the
all the
the
at the
sea
straight and
speedy, perish
last,
"
liayen^s mouth.
Linel2Q.
should
have
been
tum*d
Christian, and
rest not
miracle
a
been
wrought,
great
"
Would The
in itself be such
were an
miracle,
part
so
hundredth
Line
104,
canto
2i.
671.
Seview
the
of Sentences
value of
and
Elements.
Of Diagrams.
(1)
Discuss
Analysis.
Outline
of mements
(a)
(6) (c)
Substantive
Adverbial
Class
Second
Class
(h), phrase.
clause.
Third
Class
(2) (3)
Define
Define
and and
illustrate:
"
adg, adh,
aeg,
adi; aei;
hdg, bdh,
bdi;
cdg, cdh,
ceg,
cdi,
aeh,
ceh, cei.
(4) Referring to
"
ad,
ae,
af, cf,
ag
eg.
(5) Referring to
articles 03 and
04, illustrate
"
ad, bd, cd ;
ae,
be,
ce
292
ORAHMAB
OF
THS
ENQLISH
SENTENCE.
PREFACE
TO
THE
FIRST
THOUSAND.
672.
Apology.
has for
"
The
only apology
to
the
author
list of the
of
this
book
having
Sentence
and
for
the
long
of
books
Grammar
English
ject, sub-
is that in
pupils of every grade of the beginning classes of the country from advancement, from of logic, six to twelve school to the collegestudent classes a day, months in the year, with from to four one and in a class, ought to result in to three hundred one teaching
an
it to
experience useful
With
to
the
student
that
and
a
the
teacher may
of
grammar.
realized 673.
the
has
hope
been
"
such
result
be
this work
Claim of the
prepared.
It is not much
Book.
as
product
new;
of
originality. Not
this is
itself is
and book
the
contains
Indeed, if
be
cepted ac-
should
most
by reluctantly
the writer of its
But
while
thought
and
has
been
in substance also to
expressed by great
have
authors
a
teachers, he claims
modified, and variety of sources, arranged what, it is hoped, is the most valuable text-book for advanced students, high schools, normal schools, and collegesthat has yet been published on this subject. is claimed The author wishes to emphasize what by some that and of the greatest educators denied by others is a science and should be taught as such. English grammar and grammarless tongue^^^ English has been styled the in the light of other languages. justlyperhaps,if viewed
"
accumulated
from
''
PREFACE
TO
THE
FIRST
THOUSAND.
293
is without that
If
a
grammar grammar
;
means
inflection only^our
if it is founded
sentence
language
the
but
upon
idea
the
determines, and
its excelled
mined is deterour
positions of
a
parts, then
by none. It has been urged against 674. Objection to Orammar. that it never the study of grammar produces good speakers This is partlytrue. and writers. Language must precede sponding precede its correjust as any other art must grammar,
grammar
"
boast
of
science; but
remain
without is
the
science
the
art
would
that the mostly by imitation in child language, ai;id his only gets his first lessons teachers. his parents, playmates, and tation books are By imialone, with surroundings, he may acquire proper the most forcible style; but, with more elegant and most probable surroundings, he will acquire by imitation also
imperfect.
It
the
most
or
slang.
of
as
675.
Language
formed
is Learned.
"
If
our
habits
be
guage lan-
helpless that receives with equal facility the blank the as page faultless expression and the grossest vulgarism. By most imitation we good speakers and writers, might become
were
by
imitation
we only,
would
and
and
more
hear
if But
we
could
see
such
tunities oppor-
exist. such
Even
a
in the mixture
be
found
the
tares
and
the the
will
require
to
the
discriminatinganalysis of
it clear that
two
we
student
separate them.
will make
to
little
thought
we
acquire
which
rect cor-
language
be called the
one
must
perform
rejection
"
processes,
must
may
and acception
our
learn
to imitate
language of
can
best
we
speakers and
must cast
do
and
then
can
away
it its imperfectio
this
be
done
only by
thoughtful
294
GBAHMAB
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
student
in every
of
language,
there
and
is
an
after he
has
fully realized
in every
%entence
tliat
a
ward
idea^ and
thought*
676. Other Use its of Orammar.
"
But
a
it must
means
not
be understood
that
practicalutilityas
of
acquiring'
language
the greatest^ benefit to be anly^ or even derived from drill in grammatical study. As a mental evident thinking,it is unexcelled. Nothing is more logical than that carelessness in expression indicates carelessness in thought. Careless thinking can be avoided only by This can be done only caref ullyanalyzing thought itself. it is expressed. No by analyzing the language in which power
is the
superior to that of analysis, that and one is well can analyze the English sentence prepared to analyze anything else. "Briefly," says Leslie Stephen, "to teach a child to it for association with it, to prepare speak is to educate
others, to lay it open
it with
to
a
of the
human
mind
is
to all
manner
of influences, to
start
knowledge already elaborately organized, of thinking and uate teach it methods imagining, to insininto its mind philosophicaland religiousprinciples,
mass
of
and
must
to
inoculate be
it with
innumerable in the
associations, which
important
elements
development
of
its
character."
677.
Diagrams.
the
"
The
system
not
of claim
diagramming
as
used
It
in
was
this book
author
does
his
own.
originated by
Professor
the
most
W. credit
F.
L.
Sanders,
and
he
is
of
attractive, the
methods
has made of in
complete,
Sanders's
its
diagramming.
Mr,
only change
is in the
the
author
system
It
arrangement
somewhat
of the
and infinitive
tive objec-
Bvhject.
has been
common
for
certain
class of
PREFACE
TO
THE
FIRST
THOUSAND.
295
educators
reasons a
to condemn
being, that
before
of his he
use
the
sentence
no
can
it,and
The of
knows
see
how, there
how the foolish stration demon-
is
doing
he
it.
reader
such
talk is when
of
thinks
applying
it to
the
solutions
to
of
indeed
every
the
eye
what
mind. mind
It
is is
well-known
by psychological principle
more
has been
conceived
more
deeply
any
two
and of
clearlyimpressed
senses
reached
reached
the
than
a
when
of them.
To
diagram
of its
to to
sentence
is to exhibit the
most
the
eye
the relations
parts.
This
a
is
a
for a teacher satisfactory way correct or understanding of a sentence is no misunderstandings of it. There do not make we use study in which there
used the any of is
no
give
class
correct
their of
and
other
of
branch
branch
of
study
in
which
be
advantage than in English grammar ; and that teacher adopts and thoroughly understands of diagramming will find it a source good method
interest in
to
to better
and
any
enthusiasm
other way. "There
in
his
class
not
to
be
aroused
Here is
an
President
effort
Bascom
speaks
made
to
the
point,
matter
experiments,
eye is
and
avail than
678.
Analysis.
This,
so
far the
as
the
author
ever
knows,
is the
sentence
originated by
must
President
as
Alfred
to
element
as
be
described
structure,
and
to
use,
and
to
very
careful
accurate
ing think-
indispensable.
296
GRAMMAR
OF
THE
ENGLISH
SENTENCE.
679. will
Sjrntax.
approve
The
"
author
method is
feels of
confident
teachers in this
of it the
the
syntax
to
use
book.
of
By
pupil
compelled
and also
knowledge
in
grammatical
them. 680. Selections.
principles
his
judgment
apply
ing
The
"
selections
used
have
been of the
taken
most
from
more
hundred of
and
many
prominent
objects
sentences
as
have will
been best
kept
in
firsts
greatest
to
collect
illustrate
possible
that is
variety
will be the
of
constructions
to
second^
make that he
attractive
pupil,
language
literature. If
so
learning
to
grammar the
of of
may
appreciate
beauty
this
book
shall
aid
some
of
those
it
may
reach
and
in shall
acquiring
create
careful,
an
thoughtful
interest for those
discrimination,
in which
them
higher
allied,
it
thought
will then
studies have
to
grammar its
is work.
so
closely
accomplished
JONATHAN
RIGDON.
Centrax
Normal
College,
August
6,
1890.
INDEX.
Abridgment,
Accasative
652-667.
(see Objective). Action, 48-60. 286-329. Adjective, 25, 26, 37 (c), Classes of, 288-309. Definitive,290, 295-298. Descriptive, 289, 291-294. and Resultant, Direct, Predicate
302-309.
261-
155-158, 277-279.
Outline
310-317,
92-102,583-587.
of, 329.
07i, 299-301.
Classes
of, 93-101.
and
Restrictive
237.
Explanatory,
232-
Syntax of, 321-328. 440-474. Adverb, 27, 28, 37 (c), Classes of, 445, 465. Outline of, 469. Parsing of, 467, 468. Property of" Comparison, 466. Review of, 474. Syntax of, 470-473.
.
Agent,
48-50.
574-671. Analysis, 36 (cQ,36 (e), By diagram (see Diagram). Form of, 676-578. Sentences for, 666-670. Value of, 676. Written, 676, 632, 633, 636, 637, 640, Construction
643-651.
(c). Conjunction, 31, 32, 37 {d),498-621. Classes of, 603-513. Outline of, 616. Parsing of, 514, 515. Review of, 521. Syntax of, 517-520. Connectives, 37 (d), 240-242, 623-626.
44
"
Conjugation,
Nominative Nominative
Animal, 5. 156 (2), Apposition, 149 (3), 152, 154 (7), 160(5), 161, 172,273-276. Attribute, 14, 15, 51, 62, 54-^57. Capitals, 103. Case, 42 (4),125, 126, 145-181. Nominative, 146-149, 251,
274.
159.
Nominative
Declension, 44 (a). Of Nouns, 176. 198. Pronouns, Of Personal 269 (1), Of Interrogative Pronouns, 206. Of Relative Pronouns, 228. 269 Diagram, 577, 627-629, 631, 635, 636, Absolute, 153, 154,
639,642-660.
207
(3),280.
298
INDEX.
Btmanti,
Outline
001-022.
Language,
of, 671.
Logic,
][an,4.
17 (a).
Stymolofy, 36 (6). Bzplaiiatory see (Glanse). XzplotlyM, 35, 37 (e). XzprMiicm, 10, 36 (a).
FaotitiYe
38
(see Property).
(see Besaltaiit).
42 (3), 125, 126, 133-144, 282-
a""dtr,
Declension
284.
Granutiar, 36. "nd of, 36 (a). 527. Difficulty /Xtn"to?Mo/, 36(6). Q^ of Aer languages, 528. Grammatieal Form, 38 (see Property). Idea, 3, 15, Impreuion,
Inflnitiye
17. 11.
of, 175. Parsing of, 176-180. Properties of, 124-176. Case, 125, 126, 145-174.
Gender, Nomber, Person.
Review
of, 181.
Number,
(see Infinitiye
and
and
ple). Partici-
InflniUve
37 Are Are
Participle, 23(a),
526-^72.
0/ Of
an
urUike, 562.
548.
thought^ idea expressed by the object of a verb. Of a transitive verb, 48, 49, 53, 6567, 62, 162, 261-264. Of an intransitive verb, 163. Of a preposition, 160 (2), 165, 265268.
Of
536.
the
verb
or
**
May May
express
what,
Resultant
be
modijied
537.
by adverbial
ment, ele-
Objective,"
Adverbial, 168. By enallage, 174, 258. copula, ComplemerU of an infinitive
164.
"
Noun,
Direct
555.
Adjective, 556. A Predicate Adjective, 557. A Resultant Adjective, 558. of finite Progressive form
559.
verb,
Properties of, 538-541. Review of, 572. 563, 564. Sign of ir^nitive, Subject of, 542-546. What part of speech, 629-572. Inflection, 43, 131-181. Of Verbs, 423-426.
Constnictiora, 160. Cognate, 164. In apposition, 160(5), 172. 160(3), 170. Subject of an infinitive, Without a governing word, 168. 36 (c). Orthography,
Outline
"
Interjection,33, 34,
37
(e),522^25.
Of Of Of Of Of Of
Substantives, 260. Adjectives, 320, Adverbs, Am. Conjunctions, 516. Prepositions, 4m, Verbs, 430.
INDEX.
299
Parsing, 46,
Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of
47.
Prosody,
36(c).
104-^113.
Adjectives, 318, 319. Adverbs, 4ffl,468. Conjunctions 614, 615. Infinitives and Participles, 668f
Punctuation,
Relation Bestriotive Beview"
671.
Interrogative Pronouns, 216, 216. Nouns, 176-180. Prepositions, 483-486. Personal Pronouns, 199, 200. Relative nouns, or Conjunctive Pro247, 248.
427-429.
and
ciple). Parti-
Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of Of
Adjectives, 329. Adverbs, 474. Conjunctions, 621. Introduction, 114. Infinitivesand Participles, 672. Nouns, 181.
Pronouns,
Sentences
286. 497.
Prepositions,
and
Elements,
671.
Verbs,
432-439.
Besultant"
Adjective,
AUributes,
302-309.
64, 289-272.
Predicate
Adjective, 302-309. Object, 169. 61, 62, 64-67, of Syntax, 673. Bules
Noun, 161, 162, 269-272. Preposition, 29, 30, 37 (d), 476-497. Classes of, 478. List of, 482. Outline of, 486. Parsing of, 483-485. Beview of, 497. Syntax of, 487-496. Terms of, 479-481. Use of, 488-496. Phrase, 80-91. Pronoun, 21, 37(a), 182-285.
Classes
Sentence,
Classes
Parts
66-74.
of, 579-600.
of, 17.
Subject, 17, 4"n50. Of an act agent, 48, 49. idea expressed by the Of a thought subject of a verb, 17. Of a finite verb, 48, 49, 261-263. Of an infinitive,170, 254, 265, 642"
==
of, 186-260.
Of
260. Personal, 186, 188, 192-201. Subjective, 614. Interrogative. 186, 189, 202-217. Relative or Conjunctive, 186, 190, Substantive, 19(6), 37 (a),116. 218-260. Classes of, 251 (d). Antecedent Outline of, 260. 221. of, 191, 220, Declension Substance, 14, 16. of, 198, 206, 228. Parsing of, 199, 200, 215,216,247,248. Synopsis, 44 (c). Properties of, 197. Syntax, 36 (6),36(d). Review of, 286. Of Adjectives, 321-329. Property, 38-46. Of Adverbs, 470-474. Of Adjectives= Comparison, 310-317, Of Conjunctions, 617-621. 326-327. Of Substantives, 251-286. Of Adverbs Comparison, 466. Of Interjections^524, 526. Of Infinitives and Participles, 638Of Prepositions, 487-497. 541. Of Verbs, 431-439. Of Pronouns, 197. Rules of, 573. 379-426. Of Verbs, Synthesis, 36 (d),36 (/).
"
300
INDEX.
Teiuie,40,
42(7).
3^ 13,
16.
Transitive
and
Intransitive,
338-341.
52,
53^
Thooglit,
58,
59,
63,
65,
Inflection Ytrb,
23,
150
423-426.
24,
330
37
ASH
(6),
4fr^,
S8-61,
60-
Outline
Parsing
160,
333-378. Review
427^29. 432-439.
Classes
Of,
57-65,
and
342-344.
Attributive 64,
Copulative,
60,
61,
Style Syntax
of,
422.
65,
of,
431.
Complete
Finite and
and
Incomplete,
150,
57,
334-337. 345-359. 360-378.
62.
Properties
Mode,
Person
of,
391-398. and 399-420. 42
379-426.
Infinite,
and and
Regular Principal
Irregular,
Auxiliary,
Number,
150,
421.
Tense,
Strong
and
Weak,
356
\d
and
e).
Voice,
(6),
387-590.